ML16259A379

From kanterella
Revision as of 10:23, 16 September 2018 by StriderTol (talk | contribs) (Created page by program invented by StriderTol)
(diff) ← Older revision | Latest revision (diff) | Newer revision → (diff)
Jump to navigation Jump to search
Arkansas Nuclear One, Unit 1-2016-09-FINAL Operating Test
ML16259A379
Person / Time
Site: Arkansas Nuclear Entergy icon.png
Issue date: 09/01/2016
From: Vincent Gaddy
Operations Branch IV
To:
Entergy Operations
References
Download: ML16259A379 (491)


Text

ES-301Administrative Topics OutlineForm ES-301-1Facility: ____ANO-1_______________________Date of Examination: __8/22/2016__Examination Level:

RO SROOperating Test Number: _

2016-1__Administrative Topic (see Note)Type Code*Describe activity to be performed A1Conduct of OperationsKA - 2.1.5, Importance rating 2.9(RO/SRO)R, NGiven their work history, select the eligibleoperators to fill vacancy due to illness ofthe on watch ATC.

A2Conduct of OperationsKA- 2.1.20, Importance 4.6RO/SROR, D,PPerform calculation for makeup to theSpent Fuel Pool A3Equipment ControlKA - 2.2.13, Importance 4.1 RO R, NDetermine the mechanical and electricalboundary isolations for P-36B MakeupPump seal leak. (Do not need to drain thepump)A4Radiation ControlKA - 2.3.7, Importance 3.5 RO R, NGiven a survey map and associated RWP,determine the entry requirements toperform a task in the P-34A Decay HeatRemoval Pump Room.Emergency PlanNot usedNOTE: All items (five total) are required for SROs. RO applicants require only four itemsunless they are retaking only the administrative topics (which would require all fiveitems).* Type Codes & Criteria:(C)ontrol room, (S)imulator, or Class(R)oom(D)irect from bank ( 3 for ROs; 4 for SROs & RO retakes)(N)ew or (M)odified from bank ( 1)(P)revious 2 exams ( 1; randomly selected)

ES-301Administrative Topics OutlineForm ES-301-1Facility: ____ANO-1_______________________Date of Examination: __8/22/2016__Examination Level:

RO SROOperating Test Number: __

2016-1__Administrative Topic (see Note)Type Code*Describe activity to be performed A5Conduct of OperationsKA - 2.1.5, Importance rating 3.9(RO/SRO)R, NGiven their work history, select the eligibleoperators to fill vacancy due to illness ofthe on watch ATC.

A6Conduct of OperationsKA- 2.1.20, Importance 4.6RO/SROR, D,PPerform calculation for makeup to theSpent Fuel Pool A7Equipment ControlKA - 2.2.13, Importance 4.3 SROR, NReview and approve the tagout providedfor P-36B Makeup Pump seal leak. If notapproved, provide the reasons why.

A8Radiation ControlKA - 2.3.4, Importance 3.7 SRO R, NProvided with the dose history for eachindividual. Determine which of the 5 areeligible for performing the task during anemergency situation.

A9Emergency PlanKA - 2.4.44, Importance 4.4 SRO R, DDetermine the correct PAR andevacuation/sheltering required for a given GE.NOTE: All items (five total) are required for SROs. RO applicants require only four itemsunless they are retaking only the administrative topics (which would require all fiveitems).* Type Codes & Criteria:(C)ontrol room, (S)imulator, or Class(R)oom(D)irect from bank ( 3 for ROs; 4 for SROs & RO retakes)(N)ew or (M)odified from bank ( 1)(P)revious 2 exams ( 1; randomly selected)

Unit 1 2016 NRC ExamADMIN JPM A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)UNIT: 1REV # 1DATE: ______________________________TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - CONDUCT OF OPERATIONSTASK: PERFORM WORKING HOUR HISTORY REVIEW AND SELECT ELIGIBLE OPERATORS TO FILLVACANCY DUE TO ILLNESS OF THE ONCOMING ATC WATCHJTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-195/ANO-SRO-ADMIN-NORM-191KA VALUE RO:2.9 SRO: 3.9 KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.5APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO: XTASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM: PERFORMPOSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________SRO:___________ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:______ CLASSROOM:_____TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): EN-OM-123______________________________________________________________________EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:___________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power operations. The scheduled day-shift oncomingATC operator has called in and stated he will not be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness.The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met. PQ&S Computer program is not available.TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly selected operators A, C and E that are available tocome in to fill the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> dayshift ATC watch vacancy in accordance with the work hour limits for coveredindividuals and correctly stated why operators B and D cannot come in.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: Working Hour History for the last 14 days for Operators A,B,C,D, and E A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)INITIATING CUE:The Shift Manager has directed you to review the given work history of five eligible qualified operators anddetermine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATC vacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordancewith the Fatigue Management Program. Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A(C)1. Review working hour history for Operator 'A'.Determines that Operator 'A' is eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits._______________(C)2. Review working hour history forOperator 'B'.Determines that Operator 'B' is NOTeligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy because the operator will exceed the "Maximum of 72 work hours in any 7 day period" working hour limit._______________(C)3. Review working hour history forOperator 'C'.Determines that Operator 'C' is eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits.

._______________(C)4. Review working hour history forOperator 'D'.Determines that Operator 'D' is NOTeligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy because the operator will not have had a "Minimum 34-hourbreak in any 9-day period" workinghour limit._______________(C)5. Review working hour history forOperator 'E'.Determines that Operator 'E' iseligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits.END A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)EXAMINER ANSWER KEYOperatorEligible/Not EligibleReason (if not eligible)Operator AEligible (C)Operator BNot Eligible (C)Will Exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period. (C)Operator CEligible (C)Operator DNot Eligible (C)No 34 hour3.935185e-4 days <br />0.00944 hours <br />5.621693e-5 weeks <br />1.2937e-5 months <br /> break in a 9 day period. (C)Operator EEligible (C)

A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)EXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

The plant is at 100% power operations. The scheduled day-shift oncoming ATC operator has called in and stated he willnot be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness. The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met. PQ&S computer program is not available.INITIATING CUE:The Shift Manager has directed you to review the given work history of five eligiblequalified operators and determine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATCvacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordance with the Fatigue Management Program.Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.

A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)EXAMINEE'S COPYOperatorEligible/Not EligibleReason (if not eligible)Operator AOperator BOperator COperator DOperator E

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A2 A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 1 OF 5 UNIT: 1 REV#: 2DATE:SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: Conduct of OperationsTASK: Perform Spent Fuel Pool Makeup Calculation.JTA#: ANO1-RO-SFC-NORM-17KA VALUERO:4.6SRO:4.6KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.20APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO:

XSRO: xTASK LOCATION:INSIDE CR:OUTSIDE CR:BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE:SIMULATOR:Classroom:PerformPOSITION EVALUATED: RO:SRO:ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR:

PLANT SITE:Classroom:TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:

PERFORM: XAPPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES:20 MinutesREFERENCE(S): 1104.003, Att. C2EXAMINEE'S NAME:

Logon ID:EVALUATOR'S NAME:THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THISJPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:UNSATISFACTORY:PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:StartTime StopTimeTotal TimeSIGNED:DATE:SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 2 OF 5THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Given the following Plant conditions: Plant is in refueling Outage 1R26 SF Pool level is -0.4 ft. SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm. BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm. Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed. Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is ClosedTASK STANDARD:Determined initial SF Pool volume is 362,843 gallons from Table 2.Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.Determined final SF Pool level is 0.0 to -0.1 ft.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:1104.003, Attachment C2SIMULATOR SETUP:

NAEXAMINER'S NOTES:

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 3 OF 5INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SFP to raise Boronconcentration to 2400 ppm. Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed. Determine final SFP Volumeand Level.PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDS(Circle One)(C)1. Determine initial SF Poolvolume from Table 2.Determined volume is 362,843gallons from Table 2. SAT UNSAT N/A2. Record data.Recorded data. SAT UNSAT N/A (C)3. Determine feed volume to beadded to SF Pool.Determined feed volume to be3684 +/- 2 gallons. SAT UNSAT N/A (C)4. Determine final SF Poolvolume.Determined final SF Pool volumeto be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons. SAT UNSAT N/A (C)5Determine final SF Pool level Determined final SF Pool level isfrom 0.0 to -0.1 ft. SAT UNSAT N/A END A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 4 OF 5ANSWER KEYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Given the following Plant conditions: Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26. SF Pool level is -0.4 ft. SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm. BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm. Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed. Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is ClosedINITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup toSFP to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.Determine final SF Pool volume.Determine final SF Pool level.Document the results of the review below:(C) Determined initial SF Pool volume is currently 362,843 gallons from Table 2.(C) Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.(C) Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.(C) Determined final SF Pool level is from 0.0 to -0.1 ft.Final Level interpolation:(366,692 - 365730) = - 0.1 .(366,692 - 366527) XX = - 0.1 (165) = - 0.017 feet 962Final Level = - 0.017 A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 5 OF 5EXAMINEEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Given the following Plant conditions: Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26. SF Pool level is -0.4 ft. SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm. BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm. Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed. Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is ClosedINITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, formakeup to SF Pool to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.Determine final SF Pool volume.Determine final SF Pool level.Document the results of the review below:

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.003PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CHEMICAL ADDITIONPAGE:62 of 153CHANGE: 054ATTACHMENT C2Page 1 of 7SF POOL FEED CALCULATIONS TABLE 1Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume/Ft DepthSF Pool(gal/ft) SF Pool+ Cask Pit(gal/ft) SF Pool+ Tilt Pit(gal/ft) SF Pool+ Cask Pit+ Tilt Pit(gal/ft)Refueling Canal(gal/ft)IncoreTank(gal/ft)7,5708,3498,8459,62411,0701,141 TABLE 2Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume (gallons)Elev.(ft)LI-2004SF Pool SF Pool+ Cask Pit SF Pool+ Tilt Pit (1) SF Pool+ Cask Pit+ Tilt Pit (1)Refueling Canal IncoreTank401.5+1.0 ft298,120330,899343,537376,316401.4+0.9 ft297,363330,064342,653375,354401.3+0.8 ft296,606329,229341,768374,392401.2+0.7 ft295,849328,394340,884373,429401.1+0.6 ft295,092327,559339,999372,467401.0+0.5 ft294,335326,725339,115371,504400.9+0.4 ft293,578325,890338,230370,542400.8+0.3 ft292,821325,055337,346369,580400.7+0.2 ft292,064324,220336,461368,617400.6+0.1 ft291,307323,385335,577367,655400.5 0.0 ft290,550322,550334,692366,692342,80027,400400.4-0.1 ft289,793321,715333,808365,730341,69327,286400.3-0.2 ft289,036320,880332,923364,768340,58627,172400.2-0.3 ft288,279320,045332,039363,805339,47927,058400.1-0.4 ft287,522319,210331,154362,843338,37226,944400.0-0.5 ft286,765318,376330,270361,880337,26526,830399.9-0.6 ft286,008317,541329,385360,918336,15826,715399.8-0.7 ft285,251316,706328,501359,956335,05126,601399.7-0.8 ft284,494315,871327,616358,993333,94426,487399.6-0.9 ft283,737315,036326,732358,031332,83726,373399.5-1.0 ft282,980314,201325,847357,068331,73026,259399.4-1.1 ft282,223313,366324,963356,106330,62326,145399.3-1.2 ft281,466312,531324,078355,143329,51626,031399.2-1.3 ft280,709311,696323,194354,181328,40925,917399.1-1.4 ft279,952310,861322,309353,219327,30225,803399.0-1.5 ft279,195310,026321,425352,256326,19525,689(1) Tilt Pit volume from CR-ANO-1-2008-1859-CA2.During refueling,canal level must bemaintainedbetween -0.5 and0.0 on the SFPLevel indicator(LI-2004).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.003PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CHEMICAL ADDITIONPAGE:63 of 153CHANGE: 054 ATTACHMENT C2 Page 2 of 7 CAUTION Performance of this section requires verification that feed volume will not result in overflowing of the SFP or other attached volumes.

NOTE It is necessary to coordinate with Dry Fuel Personnel when making up to the Spent Fuel Pool during Dry Fuel Operations.

Step 1.0 is solely performed to determine volume of boric acid at a known concentration to achieve a desired final SFP boron concentration, and generally would not be used.1.0 IF it is desired to calculate the volume of boric acid required to achieve a desired final SFP concentration, THEN perform the following:

1.1 Determine initial SF Pool volume from TABLE 2. Interpolate if necessary.

1.1.1 IF appropriate, THEN add Refueling Canal and Incore Tank volume.

V i = _____________gal = Initial Volume from TABLE 2 1.2 Record the following data:

C i = __________ppmB = Initial SF Pool concentration C f = __________ppmB = Final desired SF Pool concentration C fd = __________ppmB = Feed concentration to be added to SF Pool 1.3 Determine feed volume to be added to the SF Pool V fd = ( V i ) x ( C f - C i ) ( C fd - C f)V fd = ( ) x ( - )

( - )

V fd = __________gal.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.003PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CHEMICAL ADDITIONPAGE:64 of 153CHANGE: 054 ATTACHMENT C2 Page 3 of 7 1.4 Determine final SF Pool volume Final volume = ( V fd) + ( V i )Final volume = ( ) + ( )

Final = __________gal.

Volume NOTE If final SF Pool level is determined to be greater than +1.0 ft or greater than zero when refueling, then the addition will have to be made in separate operations.

1.5 Determine final SF Pool level from TABLE 2, interpolate as necessary.

1.5.1 IF final volume greater than table values THEN a second addition will have to be done following a level reduction.

1.6 Perform the other sections of this Attachment as required.2.0 IF needed, THEN find the volume of feed (V fd) AND use TABLE 1 for SF Pool gal/ft.

IF Refueling Canal or Incore Tank is connected to SF Cooling System THEN add the appropriate gal/ft to the SF Pool gal/ft.

V fd = [(Final level) - (Initial level)] x ( gal/ft )

V fd = [(________ft.) - (__________ft.)] x (________gal/ft)

V fd = __________gal.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A3 1 of 6A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)UNIT: 1REV # 2DATE: ______________________________TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - EQUIPMENT CONTROLTASK: PERFORM IDENTIFICATION OF COMPONENTS THAT NEED TO BE ISOLATED AND DANGERTAGGED FOR AN INBOARD SEAL LEAK ON MAKEUP PURIFICATION PUMP P-36AJTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-078KA VALUE RO:4.1 SRO: 4.3 KA

REFERENCE:

2.2.13APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO:TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:_ PERFORM_POSITION EVALUATED: RO: : XSRO:___________ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:_____ CLASSROOM: XTESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM: XAPPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): EN-OP-102, PROTECTIVE AND CAUTION TAGGING; P&ID M-231;ELECTRICAL PRINT E-5 ONE LINE DRAWING FOR ENGINEERED SAFEGUARD BUSES A3 AND A4.EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 6A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power. A bad inboard seal leak is present on MakeupPurification Pump P-36A. A Danger Tag will need to be generated to isolate this inboard seal leak.No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.TASK STANDARD: The applicant identified the following components at a minimum for danger tagging.A-306 - Racked Down, MU-20A - Closed, MU-21A - Closed, MU-18A - Closed.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: P&ID M-231 Makeup & Purification System Drawing; Electrical Print E-5 oneline drawing for Engineered Safeguard Buses A3 and A4.

3 of 6A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS has directed you to identify the components that need to be danger tagged to electrically andmechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A to isolate this seal leak. Also provide the component dangertag position required.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C): (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/ANOTE: Provide examinee with a copy of E-Print E-5 and P&ID M-231 (C)1. Reviews controlled documentationto determine source of power to P-36A to add to the tagout (E-Print E-5 or OP-1107.002 Attachment A)Determines that Electrical CircuitBreakerA-306 will need to be"Breaker Racked Down" and addedto the tagout.

_______________Note: The Candidate may add a Caution Tag to be placed on the MU Purification Pump P-36A Remote HandSwitch.(C)2. Reviews controlled documentationto determine the P-36A pumpdischarge Isolation will need to beadded to the tagout (P&ID M-231)Determines that P-36A DischargeIsolationMU-20A will need to beClosed and added to the tagout.

_______________(C)3. Reviews controlled documentationto determine that a P-36A minimumrecirc isolation will need to beadded to the tagout (P&ID M-231)Determines that a P-36A MinimumRecirc IsolationMU 21A or MU-22A(in series) will need to beClosed andadded to the tagout.

_______________(C)4. Reviews controlled documentationto determine the P-36A pumpsuction Isolation will need to beadded to the tagout (P&ID M-231)Determines that P-36A SuctionIsolationMU-18A will need to beClosed and added to the tagout.

_______________NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END 4 of 6A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)EXAMINER ANSWER KEYComponent #Component NameComponent Position A-306MU Pump P-36A Electrical Circuit BreakerBreaker Racked DownMU-20AMU Pump P-36A Discharge Isolation ValveClosedMU-21AMU Pump P-36A Minimum Recirc Isolation ValveClosedMU-18AMU Pump P-36A Suction Isolation ValveClosed 5 of 6A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)EXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

The plant is at 100% power. A bad inboard seal leak is present on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A. A Danger Tag will need to be generated to isolate this inboard seal leak.No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS has directed you to identify the components that need to be dangertagged to electrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A toisolate the seal leak.Also provide the component danger tag position required.

6 of 6A1JPM-RO-HCRD5 (A3)EXAMINEE'S COPYComponent #Component NameDanger Tag Position EPrint E-5 Sheet 1 M-231, sh. 1 EPrint E-5 Sheet 1 M-231, sh. 1 Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A4 Page 1 of 5A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUNIT: 1REV # 1DATE: ______8/4/2016_________JPM ID: A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - Radiation ControlTASK: Ability to comply with radiation work permit requirementsJTA#: ANO1-RO-DHR-NORM-2KA VALUE RO:3.5 SRO: 3.6 KA

REFERENCE:

2.3.7APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO:TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR:_________ CLASSROOM: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE:_____________ SIMULATOR: Classroom: ________X_______POSITION EVALUATED: RO:____X______ SRO:___________ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:______ Classroom:__X___TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___X________APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): RWP 2016-1002, P-34A survey map,EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

Page 2 of 5A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASURETHE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.INITIAL PLANT CONDITIONS Decay Heat Removal Pump P-34A has indications of a leak on the pump inboard seal. The SM/CRS has directed you to quantify the leakage from the P-34A pump inboard seal. Your total dose for the year is currently 1950 mrem. You are a qualified CAT 3 Advanced Rad Worker.TASK STANDARD:Using the above information, applicant determined: Remaining available dose is 50 mR MAXIMUM stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area is 26.1 to 26.0 minutes. Required protective clothing requirements are single set of anti-Cs.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: RWP 2016-1002, P-34A survey map .SIMULATOR SETUP:

NA Page 3 of 5A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREINITIATING CUE:Use the attached RWP, 2016-1002 Task 1.Using the above information, determine your MAXIMUM stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area and therequired protective clothing for entry.(C)PERFORMANCE STEPPERFORMANCE STANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A1. Reviews P-34A Pump surveymap to determine dose rates inthe vicinity of the inboardpump seal.Examinee determined dose rate of115 mR/hr at the inboard pump seal.

_______________(C)2. Determines stay time based onthe given dose in the pumpinboard seal area not toexceed the RWP limits. 50 mR X 60 min = 26.1 minutes115 mR/hr 1 hrExaminee determined stay timebased on RWP limits of 50 mremwould allow him to stay at the pumpinboard seal area for 26.1 minutes(-0.1 minutes).

_______________(C)3. Reviews P-34A Pump surveymap for contamination smeardata to determine theprotective clothing (PC)requirements for this task.Examinee identified thecontamination levels are > 1000dpm/100 cm 2 but less than 100,000dpm/100 cm 2; therefore, a single setof Anti-Cs is required to enter into theP-34A pump room.

_______________END Page 4 of 5A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREANSWER KEYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

Decay Heat Removal Pump P-34A has indications of a leak on the pump inboardseal. The SM/CRS has directed you to quantify the leakage from the P-34A seal. Your total dose for the year is currently 1950 mrem. You are a qualified CAT 3 Advanced Rad Worker.INITIATING CUE:Refer to the attached RWP, 20161002 Task 1 and the P-34A pump roomsurvey map.Using the above information, determine: Your remaining available dose for the year based on ANOadministrative limits.

50 mR Your "MAXIMUM" stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area.50 mR X 60 min =26.1 minutes (-0.1 minutes) (C)115 mR/hr 1 hr Your "Protective Clothing" requirements:Single set of Anti-Cs (C)

Page 5 of 5A1JPM-RO-ADMIN-RWP3 (A4)ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREEXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

Decay heat Removal Pump P-34A has indications of a leak on the pump inboardseal. The SS/CRS has directed you to quantify the leakage from the P-34A seal. Your total dose for the year is currently 1950 mrem. You are a qualified CAT 3 Advanced Rad Worker.INITIATING CUE:Refer to the attached RWP, 20161002 Task 1 and the P-34A pump roomsurvey map.Using the above information, determine: Your remaining available dose for the year based on ANOadministrative limits.

__________________________________________________________ Your "MAXIMUM" stay time at the P-34A pump inboard seal area.

__________________________________________________________ Your "Protective Clothing" requirements:

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________

1a1-05_jpgTemplate:Survey:ANO-1606-0004 ANOPage 1 of 1Thursday, June 30, 2016Details 1001a1-05_jpg10CFR50.75G Decomm 13 1RAB 31720970Harrell, John08/22/2016 15:58In-Progress20161001RxPwr:Template:Frequency:Room:Unit:Building:Elevation:Badge:Reviewed By:Notes:Surveyed By:Survey Date:Status: Rwp:Hydro Inj Rate:

NAInstruments Used NA NA NA 6/29/2016 7/31/2016CHP-CR-148 LM-177 MDA:DC & Bkg:SrcChk Date:Cal Due Date:Instrument:

NA NA NA 6/29/2016 12/31/2016CHP-DR-3319-3 MDA:DC & Bkg:SrcChk Date:Cal Due Date:Instrument:Smear Data (DPM/100cm2)

DPM 20000 1 DPM 25000 2 DPM 30000 3 DPM 35000 4LAS Data (ccpm/LAS)ccpm/LAS 6000 1ccpm/LAS<100 2ccpm/LAS<100 3ccpm/LAS<100 4B/G to Alpha RatioAlpha Data (DPM/100cm2)

DPM Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 1 of 7RWP Title:OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES UNIT-1RWP No.: 20161002Rev. 00Comments:*20161002*RWP Type:SPECIFICRWP Status:

ACTIVEBegin Date: 1/1/2016Close On Date: 12/31/2016Prepared By:NICKELS, THOMAS WJob Supervisor:Jeff HortonEstimated Dose:528 mremEstimated Hours:

14,400.00Actual Dose:293 mremActual Hours:

9,041.99Locations Buildings Elevations RoomsLOW LEVEL RADWASTE BUILDING 354NON-LOCKED HIGH RADIATIONAREAOLD RADWASTE BUILDING 354NON-LOCKED HIGH RADIATIONAREAOUTSIDE CONTROLLED ACCESS ALLOUTSIDE CONTROLLED ACCESSUNIT 1 AUXILIARY BUILDING ALLNON-LOCKED HIGH RADIATIONAREARadiological ConditionsDescriptionValueUnitSmear data is in dpm/100 cm2 unless otherwise noted.<1K - 40KDPM/100CM2General area gamma dose rates are in mrem/hour unless otherwise noted.0.1 - 200MILLIREM/HOUR Tasks TaskDescriptionStatus 1OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES UNIT-1Active 2OPERATIONS TRAINEE ACTIVITIES UNIT-1ActiveRequirements Requirement Groups Requirement Descriptions N/AAdditional Instructions Instruction 1: Instruction 2: Instruction 3:ApprovalsApprover TitleName DateALARA REVIEWSTELL, RANDALL E12/22/2015RWP PREPARERSTELL, RANDALL E12/22/2015RP SUPERVISORLYNCH, BERT A12/22/2015Attachments N/A Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 2 of 7Task Number:

1RWP No.: 201 61002Rev.: 00Task

Description:

OPERATIONS ACTIVITIES UNIT-1Task Status:

Active Estimate Dose:420.00Estimate Hours:12,000.00 Hi-Rad: YesHot Particle:

NoLocked Hi-Rad: No Hi-Contamination:

NoAlarm SettingsDose Alarm (mrem)50.00Dose Rate (mrem/hr) 150.00RequirementsRequirement GroupsRequirement DescriptionsContamination ControlAll materials are required to be surveyed in a small articles monitor or hand frisked by RP(with RP Supervisor approval) PRIOR TO unconditional release from a RadiologicallyControlled Area.IF the RCA is a satellite RCA and a "Contamination Area" is entered, THEN theradworkershould perform a whole body frisk and proceed to the nearest whole body contaminationmonitor (PCM-1B or equivalent).IF the RCA is a satellite RCA with no whole body contamination monitor available, THENtheradworker should: a) perform a hand and foot frisk. b) IF the frisk indicates contamination ispresent, THEN contact RP. c) IF the frisk DOES NOT indicate thepresence of contamination,THEN proceed to the nearest whole body contamination monitor and gamma sensitivemonitor.Notify RP prior to exposing a contaminated surface or opening a contaminated system.Obey the monitoring instructions posted at the RCA exit pointUpon exit of an RCA, whole body monitoring is required utilizing a whole bodycontaminationmonitor (PCM-1B or equivalent). A whole body gamma monitor must also be cleared (PM-7or equivalent).Upon exiting areas posted as "Contamination Area", perform a hand and foot frisk at thedesignated frisker location.Use RP approved mats or pads when kneeling, sitting or laying in contaminated areas.Use face shield for activities that have increased risk of facial contamination. Theseactivitiesinclude working with contaminated components overhead, or having a body position thatpresents the potential for facial contamination.With RP approval, reaching across a contamination boundary is permitted usingsurgeon'sgloves OR cotton liners with rubber gloves. When reaching into the area ofhighercontamination, gloves must be removed when hands are returned to the lower level side of theboundary.Dosimetry RequirementsFOR WORK IN HIGH RADIATION AREAS

-If your work conditions are in OR willcausehearing impairment (such as work in a high noise area, use of a communications headset, etc.)THEN the use of an EAD amplifying device (PAM) is required.If an EAD dose alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Immediately leave the RCA. 3) NotifyRP.If an EAD dose rate alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Back out of the immediate area untilthe alarm clears. 3) Notify others in your work crew. 4) Immediately notify RP for furtherinstructions.Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areaswhereyour ability to hear is diminished.Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areaswhereyour ability to hear is diminished.Whole body DLR and EAD required for entry.Additional Instructions Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 3 of 7Instruction 1:

Task Number:

1RWP No.: 201 61002Rev.: 00RequirementsRequirement GroupsRequirement DescriptionsEngineering ControlsWhen venting or draining, monitor the rate of system drain to ensure the rate of drain doesNOT exceed the capacity of the floor drain.Exposure ReductionUse Low Dose Waiting Areas whenever possible to minimize exposure.Protective RequirementsAll joints between Anti-C gloves /sleeves and Anti-C ankles/ booties must be taped.Entry into Contamination Areas require single Anti-Cs.Entry into High Contamination Areas require double Anti-Cs .RP CoverageA "Cat 3 Advanced Radworker" may enter posted High Radiation Areas using a gammasensitive RP instrument to monitor dose rates. (NOTE: An EAD is NOT an appropriatesurvey instrument. LHRA/ VHRA entry requires continuous RP coverage.).Contact RP Supervisor or RP tech prior to entry to verify adequate RP coverage andcontamination controls for your work activity. RP is not required to be notified for entries tothe Auxiliary Building to perform routine activities that do not involve High Radiation Areas,Contamination Areas, overhead entry or system breaches.Entry into High Radiation Areas requires a radiological brief from RP, AND an electronicalarming dosimeter (EAD) to meet Tech Spec monitoring requirements.Initial / Intermittent RP coverage is required for entry into High Radiation Areas.Notify RP when performing operations activities which could change plant radiologicalconditions. For example venting/draining radioactive systems, performing degas or decayheat/shutdown cooling operations, or other non routine system functions.Radiological ConditionsContact Radwaste Personnel for radiological conditions in the Radwaste Buildings.Radiological conditions should be reviewed to ensure awareness of conditions in your workarea. This information can be obtained from either a Status Board or RP personnel.Respiratory ProtectionBased on historical and current data, the airborne radioactivity is less than 30 percent of aDAC. Respiratory protection is not required unless otherwise directed by RP Supervision.Special Radiological RequirementsCritical Step - Prior to movement of irradiated fuel or other irradiated materials, notify RPShift Tech or RP Supervisor that movement of fuel / irradiated components is going to occur.DO NOT move fuel or irradiated components near cask loading gate or tilt pit gate when theadjacent pit is drained as this can result in high general area dose rates.The prerequisite for a secondary resin transfer include 1) Secure the fill head such that changesin pressure will not cause a spill. 2) Conduct a walkdown (pre-transfer) to ensure that hoseconnections and leak integrity is satisfactory. 3) Construct a berm sufficient to contain thematerial being transferred.Additional Requirement: -Critical Step - Ensure ARM is installed on the bridge and isoperation prior to performing any fuel movements. The ARM alarm set point is determined byRP supervision.Stop Work CriteriaCritical Step - Indications either from local samples or remote indication (CAM) of airborneradioactivity in quantities in excess of 30 percent of a DAC.Critical Step - Loss of control of radioactive material such that loose surface contaminationoutside of any protective measures is greater than area postingsCritical Step - Radiation dose rates in the immediate area are greater than the EAD dose ratealarm set point.CRitical Step - Work involving alpha contamination greater than or equal to 100 dpm/100cm2CAN NOT be worked on a General RWP.

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 4 of 7 Task Number:

1RWP No.: 201 61002Rev.: 00Additional InstructionsInstruction 1: Instruction 2: Instruction 3: Instruction 4: Instruction 5:Attachments N/A Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 5 of 7Task Number:

2RWP No.: 201 61002Rev.: 00Task

Description:

OPERATIONS TRAINEE ACTIVITIES UNIT-1Task Status:Active Estimate Dose:108.00Estimate Hours:2,400.00 Hi-Rad: YesHot Particle:

NoLocked Hi-Rad: No Hi-Contamination:

NoAlarm SettingsDose Alarm (mrem)10.00Dose Rate (mrem/hr) 100.00RequirementsRequirement GroupsRequirement DescriptionsContamination ControlAll materials are required to be surveyed in a small articles monitor or hand frisked by RP(with RP Supervisor approval) PRIOR TO unconditional release from a RadiologicallyControlled Area.IF the RCA is a satellite RCA and a "Contamination Area" is entered, THEN theradworkershould perform a whole body frisk and proceed to the nearest whole body contaminationmonitor (PCM-1B or equivalent).IF the RCA is a satellite RCA with no whole body contamination monitor available, THENtheradworker should: a) perform a hand and foot frisk. b) IF the frisk indicates contamination ispresent, THEN contact RP. c) IF the frisk DOES NOT indicate thepresence of contamination,THEN proceed to the nearest whole body contamination monitor and gamma sensitivemonitor.Notify RP prior to exposing a contaminated surface or opening a contaminated system.Obey the monitoring instructions posted at the RCA exit pointUpon exit of an RCA, whole body monitoring is required utilizing a whole bodycontaminationmonitor (PCM-1B or equivalent). A whole body gamma monitor must also be cleared (PM-7or equivalent).Upon exiting areas posted as "Contamination Area",perform a hand and foot frisk at thedesignated frisker location.Use RP approved mats or pads when kneeling, sitting or laying in contaminated areas.Use face shield for activities that have increased risk of facial contamination. Theseactivitiesinclude working with contaminated components overhead, or having a body position thatpresents the potential for facial contamination.With RP approval, reaching across a contamination boundary is permitted usingsurgeon'sgloves OR cotton liners with rubber gloves. When reaching into the area ofhighercontamination, gloves must be removed when hands are returned to the lower level side of theboundary.Dosimetry RequirementsFOR WORK IN HIGH RADIATION AREAS

-If your work conditions are in OR wi llcausehearing impairment (such as work in a high noise area, use of a communications headset, etc.)THEN the use of an EAD amplifying device (PAM) is required.If an EAD dose alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Immediately leave the RCA. 3) Notify R P.If an EAD dose rate alarm occurs: 1) Secure Work. 2) Back out of the immediate area untilthe alarm clears. 3) Notify others in your work crew. 4) Immediately notify RP for furtherinstructions.Periodically check your EAD. This check shouldbe performed more frequently in areaswhereyour ability to hear is diminished.Periodically check your EAD. This check should be performed more frequently in areaswhereyour ability to hear is diminished.Whole body DLR and EAD required for entry.Additional InstructionsInstruction 1:

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 6 of 7 Task Number:

2RWP No.: 201 61002Rev.: 00RequirementsRequirement GroupsRequirement DescriptionsEngineering ControlsWhen venting or draining, monitor the rate of system drain to ensure the rate of drain doesNOT exceed the capacity of the floor drain.Exposure ReductionUse Low Dose Waiting Areas whenever possible to minimize exposure.Protective RequirementsAll joints between Anti-C gloves /sleeves and Anti-C ankles/ booties must be taped.Entry into Contamination Areas require single Anti-Cs.Entry into High Contamination Areas require double Anti-Cs .RP CoverageA "Cat 3 Advanced Radworker" may enter posted High Radiation Areas using a gammasensitive RP instrument to monitor dose rates. (NOTE: An EAD is NOT an appropriatesurvey instrument. LHRA/ VHRA entry requires continuous RP coverage.).Contact RP Supervisor or RP tech prior to entry to verify adequate RP coverage andcontamination controls for your work activity. RP is not required to be notified for entries tothe Auxiliary Building to perform routine activities that do not involve High Radiation Areas,Contamination Areas, overhead entry or system breaches.Entry into High Radiation Areas requires a radiological brief from RP, AND an electronicalarming dosimeter (EAD) to meet Tech Spec monitoring requirements.Initial / Intermittent RP coverage is required for entry into High Radiation Areas.Notify RP when performing operations activities which could change plant radiologicalconditions. For example venting/draining radioactive systems, performing degas or decayheat/shutdown cooling operations, or other non routine system functions.Radiological ConditionsContact Radwaste Personnel for radiological conditions in the Radwaste Buildings.Radiological conditions should be reviewed to ensure awareness of conditions in your workarea. This information can be obtained from either a Status Board or RP personnel.Respiratory ProtectionBased on historical and current data, the airborne radioactivity is less than 30 percent of aDAC. Respiratory protection is not required unless otherwise directed by RP Supervision.Special Radiological RequirementsCritical Step - Prior to movement of irradiated fuel or other irradiated materials, notify RPShift Tech or RP Supervisor that movement of fuel / irradiated components is going to occur.DO NOT move fuel or irradiated components near cask loading gate or tilt pit gate when theadjacent pit is drained as this can result in high general area dose rates.The prerequisite for a secondary resin transfer include 1) Secure the fill head such that changesin pressure will not cause a spill. 2) Conduct a walkdown (pre-transfer) to ensure that hoseconnections and leak integrity is satisfactory. 3) Construct a berm sufficient to contain thematerial being transferred.Additional Requirement: -Critical Step - Ensure ARM is installed on the bridge and isoperation prior to performing any fuel movements. The ARM alarm set point is determined byRP supervision.Stop Work CriteriaCritical Step - Indications either from local samples or remote indication (CAM) of airborneradioactivity in quantities in excess of 30 percent of a DAC.Critical Step - Loss of control of radioactive material such that loose surface contaminationoutside of any protective measures is greater than area postingsCritical Step - Radiation dose rates in the immediate area are greater than the EAD dose ratealarm set point.CRitical Step - Work involving alpha contamination greater than or equal to 100 dpm/100cm2CAN NOT be worked on a General RWP.

Entergy Arkansas Nuclear OneRADIOLOGICAL WORK PERMIT***** NOT FOR FIELD WORK *****Consult Posted Copy for Official Radiological Work Permit InformationPage 7 of 7 Task Number:

2RWP No.: 201 61002Rev.: 00Additional InstructionsInstruction 1: Instruction 2: Instruction 3: Instruction 4: Instruction 5:Attachments N/A Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A5 A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)UNIT: 1REV # 1DATE: ______________________________TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - CONDUCT OF OPERATIONSTASK: PERFORM WORKING HOUR HISTORY REVIEW AND SELECT ELIGIBLE OPERATORS TO FILLVACANCY DUE TO ILLNESS OF THE ONCOMING ATC WATCHJTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-195/ANO-SRO-ADMIN-NORM-191KA VALUE RO:2.9 SRO: 3.9 KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.5APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: X SRO: XTASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM: PERFORMPOSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________SRO:___________ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:______ CLASSROOM:_____TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________

APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): EN-OM-123______________________________________________________________________EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________

EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:___________________________________________________________________________

__________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power operations. The scheduled day-shift oncomingATC operator has called in and stated he will not be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness.The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met. PQ&S Computer program is not available.TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly selected operators A, C and E that are available tocome in to fill the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> dayshift ATC watch vacancy in accordance with the work hour limits for coveredindividuals and correctly stated why operators B and D cannot come in.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: Working Hour History for the last 14 days for Operators A,B,C,D, and E A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)INITIATING CUE:The Shift Manager has directed you to review the given work history of five eligible qualified operators anddetermine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATC vacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordancewith the Fatigue Management Program. Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A(C)1. Review working hour history for Operator 'A'.Determines that Operator 'A' is eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits._______________(C)2. Review working hour history forOperator 'B'.Determines that Operator 'B' is NOTeligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy because the operator will exceed the "Maximum of 72 work hours in any 7 day period" working hour limit._______________(C)3. Review working hour history forOperator 'C'.Determines that Operator 'C' is eligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits.

._______________(C)4. Review working hour history forOperator 'D'.Determines that Operator 'D' is NOTeligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy because the operator will not have had a "Minimum 34-hourbreak in any 9-day period" workinghour limit._______________(C)5. Review working hour history forOperator 'E'.Determines that Operator 'E' iseligible to fill the oncoming ATC watch vacancy without exceeding any working hour limits.END A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)EXAMINER ANSWER KEYOperatorEligible/Not EligibleReason (if not eligible)Operator AEligible (C)Operator BNot Eligible (C)Will Exceed 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> in a 7 day period. (C)Operator CEligible (C)Operator DNot Eligible (C)No 34 hour3.935185e-4 days <br />0.00944 hours <br />5.621693e-5 weeks <br />1.2937e-5 months <br /> break in a 9 day period. (C)Operator EEligible (C)

A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)EXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

The plant is at 100% power operations. The scheduled day-shift oncoming ATC operator has called in and stated he willnot be able to come in to take the ATC watch due to an illness. The 54 hour6.25e-4 days <br />0.015 hours <br />8.928571e-5 weeks <br />2.0547e-5 months <br /> rolling average working limits in the last six weeks are met. PQ&S computer program is not available.INITIATING CUE:The Shift Manager has directed you to review the given work history of five eligiblequalified operators and determine which one(s) would be available to fill the ATCvacancy for the upcoming 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> day-shift in accordance with the Fatigue Management Program.Explain why any operator may be ineligible to fill the vacancy if any cannot.

A1JPM-NRC-WHHR (A1/A5)EXAMINEE'S COPYOperatorEligible/Not EligibleReason (if not eligible)Operator AOperator BOperator COperator DOperator E

From: Gaddy, Vincent To: Farina, Thomas

Subject:

RE: Markups to ANO1 Scenario 1 and Admin JPM A1/A5 Date: Tuesday, August 30, 2016 9:49:30 AM I agree!From: Farina, Thomas Sent: Monday, August 29, 2016 3:37 PM To: Gaddy, Vincent <

>

Subject:

Markups to ANO1 Scenario 1 and Admin JPM A1/A5 Vince, During administration of the ANO1 operating test last week, two changes to the final

approved exam submitted by ANO were identified as requiring revision.

First, Scenario 1 requires a change to Critical Task 2 due to an unreasonably narrow

window between failure of ES Channels 1 and 2 to actuate at 1590 psig, and RCS pressure

dropping below the CT failure criteria of 1550 psig.

This window afforded the applicants only a few seconds to recognize and respond to the malfunction.

The exam team in coordination with the licensee staff revalidated a more reasonable Critical Task 2, listed

below. Attached is the intended markup to the D-1.

Original Scenario 1 CT-2:

"CT-2 Initiate HPI on a loss of Subcooling margin

- Complete the manual actuation of ESAS Channels 1 or 2 prior to RCS press < 1550 psig."

Revised Scenario 1 CT-2:

"CT-2 Initiate HPI on a loss of Subcooling margin

- Complete the manual actuation of ESAS Channels 1 or 2 prior to subcooling decreasing to zero."

Second, administrative JPM A1/A5 requires a revision to its task standard, due to

identification during administration that one of the operators who was intended to be

ineligible to stand a 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> watch, was in fact eligible (operator D).

Therefore, of the five operators listed, only operator B is ineligible.

Attached is an email from ANO staff confirming the accuracy of the revised task standard.

Original JPM A1/A5 Task Standard:

"The examinee has correctly selected operators A, C and E that are available to come in to fill the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> dayshift ATC watch vacancy in accordance with the work hour limits for covered individuals and correctly stated why operators B and D cannot come in.

"Revised JPM A1/A5 Task Standard:

"The examinee has correctly selected operators A, C, D, and E that are available to come in to fill the 12 hour1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> dayshift ATC watch vacancy in accordance with the work hour limits for covered individuals and correctly stated why operator B cannot come in.

"If you approve of these revisions to the as-given exam, please reply in the affirmative.

The final exam uploaded into ADAMS will be marked up to reflect the revised materials, and your response email will be attached as documentation of your approval.

Thanks, TJ Thomas Farina Sr. Operations Engineer

USNRC Region IV

Division of Reactor Safety, Operations Branch

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A6 A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 1 OF 5 UNIT: 1 REV#: 2DATE:SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: Conduct of OperationsTASK: Perform Spent Fuel Pool Makeup Calculation.JTA#: ANO1-RO-SFC-NORM-17KA VALUERO:4.6SRO:4.6KA

REFERENCE:

2.1.20APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO:

XSRO: xTASK LOCATION:INSIDE CR:OUTSIDE CR:BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE:SIMULATOR:Classroom:PerformPOSITION EVALUATED: RO:SRO:ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR:

PLANT SITE:Classroom:TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:

PERFORM: XAPPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES:20 MinutesREFERENCE(S): 1104.003, Att. C2EXAMINEE'S NAME:

Logon ID:EVALUATOR'S NAME:THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDS CONTAINED IN THISJPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:UNSATISFACTORY:PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:StartTime StopTimeTotal TimeSIGNED:DATE:SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 2 OF 5THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Given the following Plant conditions: Plant is in refueling Outage 1R26 SF Pool level is -0.4 ft. SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm. BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm. Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed. Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is ClosedTASK STANDARD:Determined initial SF Pool volume is 362,843 gallons from Table 2.Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.Determined final SF Pool level is 0.0 to -0.1 ft.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:1104.003, Attachment C2SIMULATOR SETUP:

NAEXAMINER'S NOTES:

A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 3 OF 5INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup to SFP to raise Boronconcentration to 2400 ppm. Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed. Determine final SFP Volumeand Level.PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDS(Circle One)(C)1. Determine initial SF Poolvolume from Table 2.Determined volume is 362,843gallons from Table 2. SAT UNSAT N/A2. Record data.Recorded data. SAT UNSAT N/A (C)3. Determine feed volume to beadded to SF Pool.Determined feed volume to be3684 +/- 2 gallons. SAT UNSAT N/A (C)4. Determine final SF Poolvolume.Determined final SF Pool volumeto be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons. SAT UNSAT N/A (C)5Determine final SF Pool level Determined final SF Pool level isfrom 0.0 to -0.1 ft. SAT UNSAT N/A END A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 4 OF 5ANSWER KEYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Given the following Plant conditions: Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26. SF Pool level is -0.4 ft. SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm. BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm. Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed. Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is ClosedINITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, for makeup toSFP to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.Determine final SF Pool volume.Determine final SF Pool level.Document the results of the review below:(C) Determined initial SF Pool volume is currently 362,843 gallons from Table 2.(C) Determined feed volume to be 3684 +/- 2 gallons.(C) Determined final SF Pool volume to be 366,527 +/- 5 gallons.(C) Determined final SF Pool level is from 0.0 to -0.1 ft.Final Level interpolation:(366,692 - 365730) = - 0.1 .(366,692 - 366527) XX = - 0.1 (165) = - 0.017 feet 962Final Level = - 0.017 A1JPM-RO-SFPMU (A2/A6)PAGE 5 OF 5EXAMINEEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Given the following Plant conditions: Plant is in Refueling Outage 1R26. SF Pool level is -0.4 ft. SF Pool Boron concentration 2300 ppm. BAAT Boron concentration 12,250 ppm. Tilt Pit and Cask Pit gates are removed. Fuel Transfer Tube Isolation SF-45 is ClosedINITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform 1104.003, Chemical Addition, Attachment C2, formakeup to SF Pool to raise Boron concentration to 2400 ppm.Determine amount of Boric Acid volume needed.Determine final SF Pool volume.Determine final SF Pool level.Document the results of the review below:

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.003PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CHEMICAL ADDITIONPAGE:62 of 153CHANGE: 054ATTACHMENT C2Page 1 of 7SF POOL FEED CALCULATIONS TABLE 1Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume/Ft DepthSF Pool(gal/ft) SF Pool+ Cask Pit(gal/ft) SF Pool+ Tilt Pit(gal/ft) SF Pool+ Cask Pit+ Tilt Pit(gal/ft)Refueling Canal(gal/ft)IncoreTank(gal/ft)7,5708,3498,8459,62411,0701,141 TABLE 2Spent Fuel Pool and Systems Volume (gallons)Elev.(ft)LI-2004SF Pool SF Pool+ Cask Pit SF Pool+ Tilt Pit (1) SF Pool+ Cask Pit+ Tilt Pit (1)Refueling Canal IncoreTank401.5+1.0 ft298,120330,899343,537376,316401.4+0.9 ft297,363330,064342,653375,354401.3+0.8 ft296,606329,229341,768374,392401.2+0.7 ft295,849328,394340,884373,429401.1+0.6 ft295,092327,559339,999372,467401.0+0.5 ft294,335326,725339,115371,504400.9+0.4 ft293,578325,890338,230370,542400.8+0.3 ft292,821325,055337,346369,580400.7+0.2 ft292,064324,220336,461368,617400.6+0.1 ft291,307323,385335,577367,655400.5 0.0 ft290,550322,550334,692366,692342,80027,400400.4-0.1 ft289,793321,715333,808365,730341,69327,286400.3-0.2 ft289,036320,880332,923364,768340,58627,172400.2-0.3 ft288,279320,045332,039363,805339,47927,058400.1-0.4 ft287,522319,210331,154362,843338,37226,944400.0-0.5 ft286,765318,376330,270361,880337,26526,830399.9-0.6 ft286,008317,541329,385360,918336,15826,715399.8-0.7 ft285,251316,706328,501359,956335,05126,601399.7-0.8 ft284,494315,871327,616358,993333,94426,487399.6-0.9 ft283,737315,036326,732358,031332,83726,373399.5-1.0 ft282,980314,201325,847357,068331,73026,259399.4-1.1 ft282,223313,366324,963356,106330,62326,145399.3-1.2 ft281,466312,531324,078355,143329,51626,031399.2-1.3 ft280,709311,696323,194354,181328,40925,917399.1-1.4 ft279,952310,861322,309353,219327,30225,803399.0-1.5 ft279,195310,026321,425352,256326,19525,689(1) Tilt Pit volume from CR-ANO-1-2008-1859-CA2.During refueling,canal level must bemaintainedbetween -0.5 and0.0 on the SFPLevel indicator(LI-2004).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.003PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CHEMICAL ADDITIONPAGE:63 of 153CHANGE: 054 ATTACHMENT C2 Page 2 of 7 CAUTION Performance of this section requires verification that feed volume will not result in overflowing of the SFP or other attached volumes.

NOTE It is necessary to coordinate with Dry Fuel Personnel when making up to the Spent Fuel Pool during Dry Fuel Operations.

Step 1.0 is solely performed to determine volume of boric acid at a known concentration to achieve a desired final SFP boron concentration, and generally would not be used.1.0 IF it is desired to calculate the volume of boric acid required to achieve a desired final SFP concentration, THEN perform the following:

1.1 Determine initial SF Pool volume from TABLE 2. Interpolate if necessary.

1.1.1 IF appropriate, THEN add Refueling Canal and Incore Tank volume.

V i = _____________gal = Initial Volume from TABLE 2 1.2 Record the following data:

C i = __________ppmB = Initial SF Pool concentration C f = __________ppmB = Final desired SF Pool concentration C fd = __________ppmB = Feed concentration to be added to SF Pool 1.3 Determine feed volume to be added to the SF Pool V fd = ( V i ) x ( C f - C i ) ( C fd - C f)V fd = ( ) x ( - )

( - )

V fd = __________gal.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.003PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CHEMICAL ADDITIONPAGE:64 of 153CHANGE: 054 ATTACHMENT C2 Page 3 of 7 1.4 Determine final SF Pool volume Final volume = ( V fd) + ( V i )Final volume = ( ) + ( )

Final = __________gal.

Volume NOTE If final SF Pool level is determined to be greater than +1.0 ft or greater than zero when refueling, then the addition will have to be made in separate operations.

1.5 Determine final SF Pool level from TABLE 2, interpolate as necessary.

1.5.1 IF final volume greater than table values THEN a second addition will have to be done following a level reduction.

1.6 Perform the other sections of this Attachment as required.2.0 IF needed, THEN find the volume of feed (V fd) AND use TABLE 1 for SF Pool gal/ft.

IF Refueling Canal or Incore Tank is connected to SF Cooling System THEN add the appropriate gal/ft to the SF Pool gal/ft.

V fd = [(Final level) - (Initial level)] x ( gal/ft )

V fd = [(________ft.) - (__________ft.)] x (________gal/ft)

V fd = __________gal.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A7 1 of 6A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)UNIT: 1REV # 2DATE: ______________________________TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - EQUIPMENT CONTROLTASK: PERFORM REVIEW AND APPROVAL OF COMPONENT LIST AND SEQUENCE OF TAGGINGFOR A INBOARD SEAL LEAK ON MAKEUP PURIFICATION PUMP P-36AJTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-076KA VALUE RO:4.1 SRO: 4.3 KA

REFERENCE:

2.2.13APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: SRO: XTASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:_ PERFORM_POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________SRO: XACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:_____ CLASSROOM: XTESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): EN-OP-102, REV. 18, PROTECTIVE AND CAUTION TAGGING; P&ID M-231;ELECTRICAL PRINT E-5 ONE LINE DRAWING FOR ENGINEERED SAFEGUARD BUSES A3 AND A4.EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

___________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 6A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at 100% power. A bad inboard seal leak is present onMakeup Purification Pump P-36A. An off shift RO has identified a list of components needed to isolate P-36A to stop the seal leak. No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly identified the following three errors on the provided listand should not approve of sending this list to the tagging group. 1) MU-20A should be added instead ofMU-20B 2) Breaker A-306 should be the first sequence component instead of third 3) MU-21A should beadded to the tagout in the CLOSED position.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: P&ID M-231 Makeup & Purification System Drawing; Electrical Print E-5one line drawing for Engineered Safeguard Buses A3 and A4.

3 of 6A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS has directed you to review the list of components needed to generate the tagout toelectrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification Pump P-36A. Also review the tag hangingsequence. Either approve this list and provide it to the tagging group to prepare a tagout or identify andmarkup any errors, provide correction comments, and return them to be corrected.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C): (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/ANOTE: Provide examinee with a copy of E-Print E-5 and P&ID M-231 (C)1. Reviews controlled documentationto determine if Tag Sequence Item'1' 'MU-20B' should be added to therequested tagout. (P&ID M-231)Determines that P-36A DischargeIsolationMU-20A instead ofMU-20Bshould be added to the tagout.

_______________Note: The Candidate may direct that a Caution Tag be added to be placed on the MU Purification PumpP-36A Remote Hand Switch.(C)2. Reviews controlled documentationto determine if Tag Sequence Item'3' 'A-306' should be added to thetagout. (E-Print E-5 or OP-1107.002 Attachment A)(Reference EN-OP-102 Rev. 18Attachment 9.2 "TaggingSequence") See Answer KeyDetermines that Electrical CircuitBreakerA-306 will need to be"Breaker Racked Down" and addedto the tagout.However, perEN-OP-102 the breaker should bethe first tag hung in the taggingsequence instead of third

._______________(C)3. Reviews controlled documentationto determine if any other Itemsshould be added to the requestedtagout. (P&ID M-231)Determines that P-36A MinimumRecirc IsolationMU-21A should beadded to the tagout in theClosedposition._______________(C)4. After review of the tagging list,decides to approve or disapprovethe suggested tagging list andsequence.Determines that the errors need to becorrected andshould NOT beapproved and sent to the tagginggroup for tagout preparations.

_______________NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END 4 of 6A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)EXAMINER ANSWER KEY Correct Sequence Tag SequenceComponent #Component NameComponent Danger Tag Position 2 1MU-20B(1)MU Pump P-36ADischarge IsolationValveClosed 3 2MU-18A (2)MU Pump P-36ASuction Isolation ValveClosed 1 3 A-306(3)MU Pump P-36AElectrical Circuit Breaker Breaker RackedDownApproved and sent to tagging group for tagout preparation: YES ______ NO ______(5)If "NO" Why Not? (6)(1) In Tag Sequence 1 MU-20 A should be added instead of MU-20 B (C)(2) No errors associated with Tag Sequence 2 but should be on the tagout.(3) Breaker should be the first component in the tagging sequence instead ofthird (see Correct Sequence)(C)(4)ShouldDetermine that P-36A Minimum Recirc IsolationMU-21A should be added to thetagout in the Closed position. (C)

(5)"NO" Should be selected (C)(6) Typos, error in the sequence of items, and missing a required component.FYI - From EN-OP-102 (Rev 18) Attachment 9.28.0, Tagging Sequence:8.1 All Tagouts require tags to be hung and cleared in the order specified on the Tang Hangsheet or Tags To Be Removed sheet. When no definitive order is required for certaincomponents of a Tagout, the Operations Supervisor may specify a given order number formultiple components (e.g., multiple components listed on the Tagout may be given order number"5" when their sequence to each other is not important).8.2 Recommended tagging order for pumpsA. Control SwitchB. Breaker for main powerC. Breakers for auxiliary power (motor heaters, oil pump, etc.)D. Discharge valveE. Suction valveF. Other components within scope of Tagout 5 of 6A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)EXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

The plant is at 100% power. A bad inboard seal leak is present on Makeup Purification Pump P-36A. An off shift RO has identified a list of components needed to generate a tagoutto isolate P-36A to stop the seal leak. No venting or draining of the pump is required at this time.INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS has directed you to review the list of components needed to generatethe tagout to electrically and mechanically isolate Makeup Purification PumpP-36A.Also review the tag hanging sequence.Either approve this list and provide it to the tagging group to prepare a tagout oridentify and markup any errors, provide correction comments, and return them to be corrected.

6 of 6A1JPM-SRO-HCRD5 (A7)EXAMINEE'S COPY Tag SequenceComponent #Component NameComponent Danger Tag Position 1MU-20BMU Pump P-36A DischargeIsolation ValveClosed 2MU-18AMU Pump P-36A SuctionIsolation ValveClosed 3 A-306MU Pump P-36A ElectricalCircuit Breaker Breaker RackedDownApproved and sent to tagging group for tagout preparation: YES ______ NO_______.If "NO" Why Not?

M-231, sh. 1 EPrint E-5 Sheet 1 EPrint E-5 Sheet 1 M 231,sh.1 NUCLEARMANAGEMENTMANUAL QUALITY RELATEDEN-OP-102REV. 18 INFORMATIONAL U SEPAGE 77 OF 99Protective and Caution Tagging ATTACHMENT 9.2 GENERAL TAGOUT STANDARDSSHEET 10 OF 108.0 Tagging Sequence8.1 All Tagouts require tags to be hung and cleared in the order specified on the Tag Hang sheetor Tags To Be Removed sheet. When no definitive order is required for certain components ofa Tagout, the Operations Supervisor may specify a given order number for multiplecomponents (e.g., multiple components listed on the Tagout may be given order number "5"when their sequence relative to each other is not important).8.2 Recommended tagging order for pumps A.Control switch.

B.Breaker for main power.

C.Breakers for auxiliary power (motor heater, oil pumps, etc.).

D.Discharge valve.

E.Suction valve.

F.Other components within scope of Tagout.8.3 Recommended tagging order for generation equipment:

A.Prime mover.

B.Output breaker.

C.Field breaker.

D.Auxiliary electrical power.

E.Auxiliary mechanical equipment.8.4 The recommended tagging order for draining equipment is:

A.Component isolation:1) Close high pressure valve.2) Close low pressure valve.3) Open breaker for high pressure valve.4) Open breaker for low pressure valve.

B.Perform draining evolution as applicable.

C.Tag a selected drain valve(s) in the required position for adequate drain down.Tag a selected vent valve(s) in the required position for adequate vent.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A8 1 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)UNIT: 1REV # 2DATE: ______________________________TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - RADIATION CONTROLTASK: PROVIDED WITH THE DOSE HISTORY FOR 5 INDIVIDUALS DETERMINE WHICHOF THE 5 ARE ELIGIBLE FOR PERFORMING A CONTAINMENT ENTRY DURING AN UNUSUAL EVENT.JTA#: ANO-RO-ADMIN-NORM-189KA VALUE RO:3.2 SRO: 3.7 KA

REFERENCE:

2.3.4APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: SRO: XTASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: OUTSIDE CR: BOTH: XSUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE: SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:_ PERFORM_POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________SRO:____X _______ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR: PLANT SITE:_____ CLASSROOM: XTESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM: XAPPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 20 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): EN-RP-201 REV. 04, DOSIMETRY ADMINISTRATION; EN-RP-203 REV. 07, DOSEASSESSMENT; OP-1903.033 CHANGE 023, PROTECTIVE ACTION GUIDELINES FOR RESCUE REPAIR &

DAMAGE CONTROL TEAMS.EXAMINEE'S NAME:_______________________________ Logon ID: ___________________EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

___________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time ____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

2 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner should verify that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG-1021 App. E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: Unit 1 is at 100% Power. There are indications of a 30 gpm RCS leakin the Pressurizer area. Unit 1 has declared an Unusual Event for this condition.Radiation Protection has completed a containment entry to assess the radiological conditions in the area ofan isolation valve that can be used to isolate the leak on a PZR Pressure instrument tubing. Radiologicalconditions are as follows: General area external whole body dose rates near the isolation valve is 200 mrem/hour.Dose due to airborne radioactivity in the area of the isolation valve has been assessed using EN-RP-203 and willprovide 0.1 ALI/hour (Annual Limit on Intake) of Committed Effective Dose Equivalent (CEDE. The task to isolatethe leak will take 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />. No extension of any dose limits has been approved for this task. Operator 'E' is aDeclared Pregnant Woman (DPW). All of the potential operators being accessed for this task have a NRC form4 on file for all past exposure. All of the potential operators have a Lifetime TEDE (Total Effective Dose Equivalent)of Less than 10 Rem.TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly identified that operators 'C' and 'D' can go into the Containment andisolate the 30 gpm RCS leak without exceeding their annual Total Effective Dose Equivalent (TEDE) limit .TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: Dose history for five operators with a spreadsheet to use in determining eligibility.

3 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)INITIATING CUE:The Shift Manager has directed you to review the dose history of five Waste Control Operators and determine whichone(s) have the available dose margin to go into Containment and isolate the RCS leak without exceeding the wholebody TEDE required site dose limit for these plant conditions. Assume all dose is received at the valve during theisolation task. Assume no respiratory protection will be used for this task.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C): (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/ANOTE: Provide examinee with the dose history spreadsheet attached to this JPM.1. Reviews controlleddocumentation to determine whatthe required TEDE dose limits arefor the plant conditions.Determines that the Routine AnnualAdministrative Guidelines of EN-RP-201 are in effect and the TEDE doselimit is 2000 mrem for operators 'A'through 'D' and 50mrem/month or 400mrem/gestation period for operator 'E'.

_______________(C)2. Calculates the effective wholebody external dose for this taskbased on the general area doserates of 200 mrem/hour.Determines that the external wholebody dose for this will be 200mrem/hour x 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> =

100 mrem._______________(C)3. Calculates what the CEDE for 0.1ALI/hour (Annual Limit on Intake)will be for the 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> taskcompletion time.Determines that the airborne CEDE forthe area will be 0.1 x 5 Rem = 500mrem/hour. Therefore the CEDE forthis task will be 500 x 0.5 hour5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br /> =

250 mrem._______________(C)4. Calculates the whole body TEDEfor the task by adding theexternal whole body dose and theinternal dose.Determines that whole body TEDE doseis equal to 100 mrem + 250 mrem =

350 mrem._______________(C)5. Calculates the accumulated doseeach operator would have if theycompleted the required isolationtask.(Operator 'A') 1800 + 350 =

2150 mrem(Operator 'B') 1700 + 350 =

2050 mrem(Operator 'C') 1600 + 350 =

1950 mrem(Operator 'D') 1500 + 350 =

1850 mrem(Operator 'E') 25 + 350 =

375 mrem_______________

4 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A (C)6. Reviews what each operator'sfinal whole body TEDE dosewould be if they performed thetask and compares this dose tothe required limit for eachoperator and determines whichones are eligible or not eligible.(2000 mrem for operators 'A'through 'D' and 50mrem/month or400 mrem/gestation period foroperator 'E')A) 2150 mrem > 2000 mremthereforeOperator 'A' IS NOTeligible.B) 2050 mrem > 2000 mremthereforeOperator 'B' IS NOTeligible.C) 1950 mrem < 2000 mremThereforeOperator 'C' ISeligible.D) 1850 mrem < 2000 mremThereforeOperator 'D' ISeligible.E) 375 mrem > 50mrem/monthThereforeOperator 'E' is NOTeligible._______________NOTE: Inform examinee that JPM is complete.

END 5 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)EXAMINER ANSWER KEY OperatorAccumulated dose for the current YearAccumulateddose if task isperformed by operatorEligible/Not Eligible Operator A1800 mrem2150 mremNot Eligible (C)

Operator B1700 mrem2050 mremNot Eligible (C)

Operator C1600 mrem1950 mremEligible (C)

Operator D1500 mrem1850 mremEligible (C)

Operator E25 mrem375 mrem350 mrem thismonth / taskNot Eligible (C)Routine Annual Administrative Guidelines of EN-RP-201 are in effect and the whole body TEDEdose limit is 2000 mrem for operators 'A' through 'D' and 50 mrem/month or 400 mrem/gestationperiod for operator 'E'.

6 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)EXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

Unit 1 is at 100% Power. There are indications of a 30 gpm RCS leak in the Pressurizer area. Unit 1 has declared an Unusual Event for this condition. Radiation Protection has completed a containment entry to assess the radiologicalconditions in the area of an isolation valve that can be used to isolate the leak on a PZRPressure instrument tubing. Radiological conditions are as follows:

o General area external whole body dose rates near the isolation valve is 200mrem/hour.

o Dose due to airborne radioactivity in the area of the isolation valve has been assessedusing EN-RP-203 and will provide 0.1 ALI/hour (Annual Limit on Intake) of CommittedEffective Dose Equivalent (CEDE). The task to isolate the leak will take 0.5 hours5.787037e-5 days <br />0.00139 hours <br />8.267196e-6 weeks <br />1.9025e-6 months <br />. No extension of any dose limits has been approved for this task. Operator 'E' is a Declared Pregnant Woman (DPW). All of the potential operators being accessed for this task have a NRC form 4 on file for allpast exposure. All of the potential operators have a Lifetime TEDE (Total Effective Dose Equivalent) of Lessthan 10 Rem.INITIATING CUE:The Shift Manager has directed you to review the dose history of five Waste Control Operators anddetermine which one(s) have the available dose margin to go into Containment and isolate theRCS leak without exceeding the whole body TEDE required site dose limit for these plantconditions.Assume all dose is received at the valve during the isolation task.Assume no respiratory protection will be used for this task.

7 of 7A1JPM-SRO-RAD2 (A8)EXAMINEE'S COPY OperatorAccumulated dose for the current YearAccumulateddose if task isperformed by operatorEligible/Not Eligible Operator A1800 mrem Operator B1700 mrem Operator C1600 mrem Operator D1500 mrem Operator E25 mrem Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam ADMIN JPM A9 ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREA1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)

Page 1 of 5UNIT: 1REV # 1DATE: ______________________________TUOI NUMBER: A1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)SYSTEM/DUTY AREA: ADMINISTRATIVE TOPIC - EMERGENCY PROCEDURES/PLANTASK: DETERMINE A PROTECTIVE ACTION RECOMMENDATIONJTA#: ANO-SRO-EPLAN-EMERG-301, Issue Protective Action Recommendation to Offsite AuthoritiesKA VALUE RO:2.4 SRO: 4.4 KA

REFERENCE:

2.4.44 Knowledge of E Plan PARAPPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO: SRO: XTASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR: X OUTSIDE CR:_________ BOTH:________SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE:______ SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:____

X_____POSITION EVALUATED: RO:____N/A___SRO:_____X_____ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT:PLANT SITE:______ SIMULATOR: CLASSROOM:________TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES: 15 MINUTESREFERENCE(S): 1903.011 and 1903.010EXAMINEE'S NAME:________________________________ Logon ID: _______________________EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

__________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREA1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)

Page 2 of 5THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:A Failed Fuel condition has occurred on Unit One two hours ago.The EOF has been activated and is operational. A General Emergency has been declared per FG1,Loss of ANY two barriers AND loss or potential loss of third barrier, two minutes ago. Fuel failure isestimated to be 20%. A release is in progress. Wind direction is from 225 degrees. Dose assessmentreports that dose_rates at site boundary are expected to exceed EPA protective action guidelineswithin 30 minutes based on greater than 1,000 mrem TEDE.THIS JPM IS TIME CRITICAL.

_______TASK STANDARD: The examinee has correctly chosen and recommended PAR 7 with an _____ evacuation of zones G and K; shelter zones J, L, and M andgo indoors for zones H, I, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, and U within or equal to 15 minutes.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS

1903.011 Attachment 6

_________________________________________________________________________________

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREA1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)

Page 3 of 5INITIATING CUE:You are the EAL reviewer in the EOF and you are directed to recommend a Protective ActionRecommendation to the EOF Director.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C)2, 3 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A1. Consult Attachment 6 of1903.011, EmergencyResponse/Notifications.Turned to Attachment 6 of1903.011, Protective ActionRecommendations (PAR) forGeneral Emergency.

_______________(C)2. Recommend PAR based onevent conditions.Selected PAR No. 7 due to1) First PAR for the event2) LOSS of the containmentfission product barrier based onDose Assessment reports3) Expected to exceed 1,000mrem TEDE in 30 minutes

_______________(C)3. Recommend PAR based onevent conditions.Stated, due to wind direction,evacuate zones G and Kshelter zones J, L and Mgo indoors zones H, I, N, O, P,Q, R, S, T, and U

_______________NOTE: PAR 7 states that the EOF will recommend Evacuate 5-10 Miles Downwind when safer to do so.Examinee may state that zones J, L, and M will be evacuated when safer to do so.(C)4. Provides the PARrecommendations within theprocedural required time limit.PAR recommendations providedwithin or equal to 15 minutes ofthe start of the JPM after readingand understanding the Initiating cue._______________END ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREA1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)

Page 4 of 5 KEYPAR Recommendation ____

7_________ (C)Evacuate Zones __

G and K________________________ (C)

Shelter Zones ___

J, L, and M

_______________________ (C)

Go indoors Zones _H, I, N, O, P, Q, R, S, T, and U

__(C)JPM Start Time (after candidate understands the initiating cue) ___________.JPM Stop Time ____________

JPM Duration ______________ (C) ( 15 minutes)

ADMINISTRATIVE JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREA1JPM-SRO-PAR2 (A9)

Page 5 of 5EXAMINEE'S COPYJPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS

A Failed Fuel condition has occurred on Unit One two hours ago. The EOF has been activated and is operational. A General Emergency has been declared per FG1, Loss of ANY two barriers AND loss or potentialloss of third barrier, two minutes ago. Fuel failure is estimated to be 20%. A release is in progress. Wind direction is from 225 degrees. Dose assessment reports that dose rates at site boundary are expected to exceed EPA protectiveaction guidelines within 30 minutes based on greater than 1,000 mrem TEDE.THIS JPM IS TIME CRITICALINITIATING CUE:You are the EAL reviewer in the EOF and you are directed to recommend a Protective ActionRecommendation to the EOF Director and the initial zones to be evacuated, sheltered or go indoors.Time starts after reading the "INITIATING CUE"PAR Recommendation ______________Evacuate Zones __________________________________________Shelter Zones ____________________________________________Go indoors Zones _________________________________________

ES-301Control Room/In-Plant Systems OutlineForm ES-301-2Facility: __Arkansas Nuclear One - Unit 1

___Date of Examination: _8/22/2016_Exam Level:

RO SRO-I SRO-UOperating Test No.: __

2016-1__Control Room Systems:

  • 8 for RO; 7 for SRO-I; 2 or 3 for SRO-USystem / JPM TitleType Code*SafetyFunctionS1 API-RPI Comparison014 A1.02 (RO 3.2 / SRO 3.6)

RO N/S 1S2 Throttle HPI following ESAS Actuation013 A4.01 (RO 4.5 / SRO 4.8)RO / SRO-U / SRO-IA/M/EN/L/S 2S3 Manually Control RCS Pressure with a PressurizerSpray Valve Failure010 A3.02 (RO 3.6 / SRO 3.5)RO / SRO-I A/D/S 3S4 Shutdown RCP P-32A at Power003 A2.02 (RO 3.7 / SRO 3.9)RO / SRO-IA/D/E/S 4PS5 Pump the Quench Tank007 A1.01 (RO 2.9 / SRO 3.1)RO / SRO-I D/S 5S6 Transfer Buses From Unit Aux Transformer to a StartupTransformer062 A4.07 (RO 3.1 / SRO 3.1)RO / SRO-I A/N/S 6S7 Remove Channel of RPS from Manual Bypass012 A4.03 (RO 3.6 / SRO 3.6)RO / SRO-U / SRO-I D/S 7S8 Shift ICW Pumps008 A4.01 (RO 3.3 / SRO 3.1)RO / SRO-I D/S 8 ES-301Control Room/In-Plant Systems OutlineForm ES-301-2In-Plant Systems

  • (3 for RO); (3 for SRO-I); (3 or 2 for SRO-U)P1 Purge the Main Generator During EmergencyConditions (A1JPM-RO-GEN02)055 EA1.04 (RO 3.5 / SRO 3.9)RO / SRO-U / SRO-IA/M/E/L 8P2 Respond to Control Rod Drive Stator High Temperature(A1JPM-RO-CRD04)001 A2.01 (RO 3.1 / SRO 3.7)RO / SRO-U / SRO-I D/E 1P3 Align T-16A (Treated Waste Monitoring Tank) forRecirc / Sample068 A2.02 (RO 2.7 / SRO 2.8)RO / SRO-U / SRO-I A/N/R 9*All RO and SRO-I control room (and in-plant) systems must be different and serve different safetyfunctions; all five SRO-U systems must serve different safety functions; in-plant systems and functionsmay overlap those tested in the control room.* Type CodesCriteria for RO / SRO-I / SRO-UA)lternate path(C)ontrol room(D)irect from bank(E)mergency or abnormal in-plant(EN)gineered safety feature(L)ow-Power / Shutdown(N)ew or (M)odified from bank including 1(A)(P)revious 2 exams(R)CA(S)imulator 4-6(6) / 4-6(6) / 2-3 (3) 8(8)/ 7(7)/ 2-3(2) 9(6)/ 8 (6) / 4 (2) 1(3)/ 1(3)/ 1 (2)1 (1) / 1 (1) / 1 (1) (control room system) 1(2) / 1(2) / 1(2) 2(5) / 2(4) / 1 (3) 3(0)/ 3(0)/ 2 (0)(randomly selected) 1(1) / 1(1) / 1 (1)

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S1 Page 1 of 10JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #5 3Date: 8/4/2016 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (S1)System/Duty Area:Rod Position Indication System (RPIS)Task:Perform Absolute And Relative Position Indication Comparison JTA#ANO1-RO-CRD-SURV-13KA Value RO 3.2SRO 3.6KA Reference

0 14-A1.02Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location:Inside CR XOutside CRBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate

):Plant Sit e:Simulator:PerformLab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment:Plant SiteSimulatorLabTesting Method:PerformSimulateApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:

1 5MinutesReference(s): OP-1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE SUPPLEMENT 1 (REV. 5 1)Examinee's Name:

ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time

  • SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) andis current with that revision.

Page 2 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 100% power.No control rod motion expected for the duration of the testTASK STANDARD:The applicant completed Section 3.0 of 1105.009 Supplement 1, and properly verified operability of API andRPI.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:OP-1105.009 CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDURE SUPPLEMENT 1 (REV. 51)INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to perform "ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE POSITION INDCIATIONCOMPARISON" per Supplement 1 of OP-1105.009 using the plant computer.Suggested simulator setup:100% power steady state with no expected rod motion (IC 278)Verify PI Panel selected to ABSOL, especially during reset in between JPMs.Verify PI Panel meters are not stuck following each reset Page 3 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to perform "ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE POSITION INDCIATIONCOMPARISON" per Supplement 1 of OP-1105.009 using the plant computer.(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)2.1.1. Using the Plant Computer, obtain anAPI/RPI printout by performing "ObtainingAPI/RPI Printout" section of OP-1105.009POSITIVE CUE:API/RPI printout obtained per OP-1105.009.(Informational Use)Applicant may referenceOP-1105.009 Section 19.0 ormay perform from memory thefollowing steps to obtain aprintout of both the API andRPI reports for comparison.___________EXAMINER NOTE

There are two different ways to obtain the printout for this JPM. The hot key function(Method 2) is simpler and provides a better print out for the comparison. The following steps describe bothmethods and either one can be performed without referencing the procedure.FYI - EC60523 isNOT installed.METHOD 1 (Plant Computer)19.1.1. IF desired to use the NASP function,THEN perform the following:A. Note position of PI Panel POSITIONSELECT switch: ABSOL or REL.B. On PMS, select NAS.C. On PMS, select N4.D. Depress "F4"E. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).F. Depress "Enter" to print.G. Depress "Enter" to select local printer.H. Obtain printout.

I.Verify the following on printout: Correct time Correct dateJ. Mark printout with appropriate position:ABSOL or REL.K. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switchto opposite position: REL or ABSOL.L. Depress "F4"M. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).N. Depress "Enter" to print.Applicant obtains printout forcurrently selected REL andABSOL.___________

Page 4 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AO. Depress "Enter" to select local printer.P. Obtain printout.Q. Mark printout with appropriate position:REL or ABSOL.R. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switchin ABSOL.POSITIVE CUE:Printout obtained for the currently selectedREL or ABSOL.(Continued)Applicant obtains printout forcurrently selected REL andABSOL.___________METHOD 2 (Hot Key)19.1.2. IF desired to use function hot key, THENperform the following:A. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switchin ABSOL.B. Depress the API/RPI labeled hot key.C. Depress "ENTER" to select each defaultvalue.D. Enter PI Panel POSITION SELECT switchposition.E. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switchto REL.F. Select "YES".G. Select F3 to print.H. Obtain printout.

I.Verify the following on printout: Correct time Correct dateJ. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switchin ABSOL.POSITIVE CUE:Printout obtained for the currently selectedREL or ABSOL.Applicant obtains printout forcurrently selected REL andABSOL.___________EXAMINER NOTE: The applicant should return to Supplement 1 Page 5 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)2.1.2 Compare RPI printout with RPI PI meterindications and determine if > 4%difference exists for any control rod.POSITIVE CUE:REL selected on the PI panel and verifies allRPI printout readings are within 4% of RPI PImeter indications.Applicant selects REL on thePI panel and verifies all RPIprintout readings are within 4%of RPI PI meter indications.___________(C)2.1.3 Perform API comparison as follows:A. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECTswitch to ABSOL.B. Compare API printout with API PImeter indications and determine if> 4% difference exists for anycontrol rod.POSITIVE CUE:ABSOL selected on the PI panel and verifiesall API printout readings are within 4% of APIPI meter indications.Applicant selects ABSOL onthe PI panel and verifies allAPI printout readings arewithin 4% of API PI meterindications.___________

Page 6 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)2.1.4 Compare API and RPI computer printoutand determine if 2% difference existsbetween individual API and RPI rodpositions.A. Record results of RPI comparison,API comparison, and API/RPIcomparison in Section 3.0.POSITIVE CUE:API and RPI computer printouts are within 2%of each other for all rods.Applicant compares API andRPI computer printout anddetermine if >2% differenceexists between individual APIand RPI rod positions.___________(C)2.2 Compare API for each control rod to theassociated Group Average by using plantcomputer or PI meter indication anddetermine if 3% difference exists.2.2.1 Record results in Section 3.0.POSITIVE CUE:All API and Group Averages are within 3% ofeach other.Recorded results of RPI comparison, APIcomparison, and API/RPI comparison inSection 3.0Applicant compared API foreach control rod to theassociated Group Average byusing plant computer or PImeter indication and determineif >3% difference exists andrecorded results of RPIcomparison, API comparison,and API/RPI comparison inSection 3.0___________EXAMINER NOTE: This next step is N/A2.3 IF neither the plant computer nor SPDS isavailable, THEN use PI Panel indication todetermine if4% difference between APIand RPI exists for any control rod.2.3.1 Record results in Section 3.0.EXAMINER CUE:Plant Computer is available.Applicant will N/A this step___________

Page 7 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)2.4. Check each safety rod fully withdrawn byone of the following: 100% indication lamp on PI Panel is lit. >98.5% withdrawn by available API.2.4.1 Record results in Section 3.0.POSITIVE CUE:All 100% indication lamps lit on PI Panel forsafety rods.Recorded results of Safety Rods fullywithdrawn in Section 3.0Applicant verified either 100%indication lamp on PI Panel islit OR >98.5% withdrawn byavailable API and recordedresults in Section 3.0.___________2.5. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch toABSOL.POSITIVE CUE:ABSOL selected on the PI panel.Applicant selects ABSOL onthe PI panel.___________2.6. Test PI Panel lamps.2.6.1. Record results of PI Panel light test inSection 3.0.POSITIVE CUE:All PI panel lights lit during testing andresults recorded in Section 3.0Applicant tests all lamps on thePI panel and recorded resultsof PI Panel light test in Section3.0.___________

Page 8 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)2.7 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 withinthe sequence and overlap limits specified in theCOLR.2.7.1 Record resultsPOSITIVE CUE:All Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within thesequence and overlap limits specified in theCOLR and results recorded in Section 3.0Applicant verified allRegulating Groups 5, 6, and 7within the sequence andoverlap limits specified in theCOLR and recorded results ofRegulating Groups 5, 6, and 7within the sequence andoverlap limits specified in theCOLR. in Section 3.0___________(C)2.8 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 meetthe insertion limits specified in the COLR.2.8.1 Record results in Section 3.0POSITIVE CUE:All Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within theinsertion limits specified in the COLR andresults recorded in Section 3.0.Applicant verified allRegulating Groups 5, 6, and 7meet the insertion limitsspecified in the COLR andrecorded results of RegulatingGroups 5, 6, and 7 within theinsertion limits specified in theCOLR in Section 3.0.___________

Page 9 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)2.9 Verify APSRs within acceptable limitsspecified in the COLR.2.9.1 Record results in Section 3.0POSITIVE CUE:All APSRs within acceptable limits specifiedin the COLR and recorded in Section 3.0Applicant verified all APSRswithin acceptable limitsspecified in the COLR andrecorded results of APSRsbeing within acceptable limitsspecified in the COLR inSection 3.0.___________2.10 If a known rod inoperability condition exists,THEN document in Section 3.0.EXAMINER CUE:No other known conditions exist.Applicant will place a checkmark in Section 3.0 indicatingno other known conditions exist.___________Applicant will sign and date for performingSection 3.0POSITIVE CUE:Section 3.0 properly filled out, signed anddated.Applicant signed and dated forperforming Section 3.0___________EXAMINER NOTE: If asked inform the applicant that the CRS will complete Section 4.0 JPM is complete.END Page 10 of 10JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD07INITIAL CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 100% power and 250 EFPD.No control rod motion expected for the duration of the testINITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to perform:"ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE POSITION INDCIATION COMPARISON" perSupplement 1 of OP-1105.009 using the plant computer.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:117 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 1 of 7 ABSOLUTE AND RELATIVE POSITION INDICATION COMPARISON This test demonstrates operability of control rod drive system absolute and relative rod position indication, verifies that safety rods are fully withdrawn, and verifies that all rods are within 6.5% of their group average. This test satisfies SR 3.1.4.1, SR 3.1.5.1, SR 3.1.6.1, SR 3.1.7.1 , SR 3.2.1.1 , SR 3.2.1.2 and SR 3.2.2.1.1.0 INITIAL CONDITIONS 1.1 Control rod drive system is energized.

1.2 At least one of the following satisfied:

Plant conditions are such that no control rod motion is expected for the duration of the test.

Diamond Panel is in MANUAL.2.0 TEST METHOD CAUTION The Plant Computer program for API/RPI comparison has default values for deviation limits. It is permissible for the operator to adjust the limits; however, the limits shall be equal to or less than the limits specified in this surveillance.

NOTE If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs prior to completing printout to PI meter comparisons, new printouts should be obtained.If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs while obtaining API and RPI printouts, new printouts should be obtained.

Plant Computer compares API to RPI, and both API and RPI to the Group Avg. Deviations greater than the limits are flagged with ">>>>>". Bad signals are flagged as "B" and their deviations are flagged "****".

Asymmetric rods, >6.5% are flagged "!!!!!" and the value will not be used in the Group Avg.

A rod is considered inoperable if it can not be located with API, RPI or IN/OUT-LIMIT lights. Refer to TS 3.1.7.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:118 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 2 of 7 NOTE Completion of step 2.1 or 2.3 satisfies shiftly rod checks per SR 3.1.4.1, SR 3.1.6.1, and SR 3.1.7.1.

2.1 IF either the plant computer or SPDS is available, THEN perform API/RPI comparison as follows.

OTHERWISE N/A this section.

2.1.1 Obtain an API/RPI printout from either the plant computer or SPDS by performing "Obtaining API/RPI Printout" section of this procedure.

2.1.2 Compare RPI printout with RPI PI meter indications and determine if > 4% difference exists for any control rod.

2.1.3 Perform API comparison as follows:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.A. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to ABSOL.B. Compare API printout with API PI meter indications and determine if > 4% difference exists for any control rod.2.1.4 Compare API and RPI computer printout and determine if 2% difference exists between individual API and RPI rod positions.A. Record results of RPI comparison, API comparison, and API/RPI comparison in Section 3.0.

NOTE Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003) has direction for Control rod misalignments >5%.

2.2 Compare API for each control rod to the associated Group Average by using plant computer or PI meter indication and determine if 3% difference exists.

2.2.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:119 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 3 of 7 NOTE Printouts are not needed for records.

If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

2.3 IF neither the plant computer nor SPDS is available, THEN use PI Panel indication to determine if 4% difference between API and RPI exists for any control rod.

2.3.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly safety rod checks per SR 3.1.5.1.

2.4 Check each safety rod fully withdrawn by one of the following:

100% indication lamp on PI Panel is lit.

98.5% withdrawn by available API.

2.4.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

2.5 Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

2.6 Test PI Panel lamps.

2.6.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly verification of regulating groups within sequence and overlap limits per SR 3.2.1.1.

2.7 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 within the sequence and overlap limits specified in the COLR.

2.7.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:120 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 4 of 7 NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly verification of regulating groups meeting insertion limits per SR 3.2.1.2.

2.8 Verify Regulating Groups 5, 6, and 7 meet the insertion limits specified in the COLR.

2.8.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

NOTE Completion of the next step satisfies shiftly verification of APSRs within acceptable limits per SR 3.2.2.1.

2.9 Verify APSRs within acceptable limits specified in the COLR.2.9.1 Record results in Section 3.0.

2.10 IF a known rod inoperability condition exists, THEN document in Section 3.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:121 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 5 of 73.0 ACCEPTANCE CRITERIA Test Quantity Measured Values Limiting Range For Operability Is Data Within Limiting Range?(Circle YES, NO or N/A)

RPI printout to PI Comparison

() if 4%difference ( ) 4% difference YES N/A (1) NO API printout to PI Comparison

() if 4%difference ( ) 4% difference YES N/A (1) NO API to RPI printout Comparison

() if 2%difference ( ) 2% difference YES N/A (1) NO API to Group Average Comparison

() if < 3%difference ( )< 3% difference YES NO API to RPI Meter Comparison

() if 4%difference ( ) 4% difference YES N/A (2) NO Safety Rod status () if ALL fully withdrawn ( )ALL fully withdrawn YES NO PI Panel Lamp Test () if ALL Lamps light ( )N/A N/A Regulating Group alignment () if Reg Groups within sequence and overlap limits in COLR ( )Reg Groups within sequence and overlap limits in COLR YES NO Regulating Group insertion () if Reg Groups meet Insertion limits in COLR ( )Reg Groups Groups meet Insertion limits in COLR YES NO APSR position

() if APSRs are positioned per COLR ( )APSRs are positioned per COLR YES NO Other known inoperability condition () if NO known conditions exist ( )No known condition YES NO Note 1 - Data Within Limiting Range will be N/A only if Plant Computer or SPDS is unavailable.

Note 2 - Data Within Limiting Range will be N/A if Plant Computer or SPDS is available.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:122 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 6 of 7 3.1 IF "NO" is circled in table above, THEN take one of the following actions:

3.1.1 IF any safety rod is NOT fully withdrawn, THEN refer to TS 3.1.5.

3.1.2 IF the condition has been previously identified, THEN verify the condition and the corrective action taken are documented in section 4.0.

3.1.3 IF the condition has NOT been previously identified, THEN perform the following:A. Correct the condition per the applicable step below, if possible:

IF rod is misaligned, THEN realign using Attachment C, "Adjusting Control Rod/APSR Position For Improved Alignment" of this procedure for misalignments <5% OR Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003) if 5%.IF RPI is misaligned or a rod is realigned per step A above, THEN correct RPI position indication per "Relative Position Indication Adjustment" section of this procedure.

IF other unsatisfactory condition is discovered, THEN initiate corrective action.B. Record both the condition and the corrective action taken in section 4.0.

3.1.4 IF any rod can NOT be located with API, RPI, or IN/OUT LIMIT light, THEN immediately notify CRS/SM and initiate a Condition Report. Reference TS 3.1.7.

3.1.5 IF all lamps did NOT illuminate during PI Panel Lamp Test, THEN initiate corrective action.

Performed By ___________________________ Date ______________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:123 of 137CHANGE: 051 SUPPLEMENT 1 Page 7 of 74.0 SUPERVISOR REVIEW AND ANALYSIS (circle one) 4.1 Have the "Acceptance Criteria" in section 3.0 been satisfied? YES NO 4.2 IF answer to 4.1 is "NO", THEN describe the action taken below.

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

____________________________________________________________________

4.3 Has this equipment been proven operable per the Acceptance Criteria?.............................................................YES NO 4.4 IF this surveillance found a condition that has NOT been previously identified, THEN verify a copy of this surveillance is forwarded to Reactor and System Engineers.

SUPERVISOR _____________________________________ DATE ___________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:92 of 137CHANGE: 05119.0 Obtaining API/RPI Printouts (Informational use)

CAUTION The Plant Computer program for API/RPI comparison has default values for deviation limits. It is permissible for the operator to adjust the limits; however, the limits shall be equal to or less than the limits specified in this surveillance.

NOTE If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs prior to completing printout to PI meter comparisons, new printouts should be obtained.If Plant Computer or SPDS is used and Control rod motion occurs while obtaining API and RPI printouts, new printouts should be obtained.

Plant Computer compares API to RPI, and both API and RPI to the Group Avg. Deviations greater than the limits are flagged with ">>>>>". Bad signals are flagged as "B" and their deviations are flagged "****".

Asymmetric rods, >6.5% are flagged "!!!!!" and the value will not be used in the Group Avg.

A rod is considered inoperable if it can not be located with API, RPI or IN/OUT-LIMIT lights. Refer to TS 3.1.7.

19.1 IF desired to use plant computer, THEN perform one of the following:

19.1.1 IF desired to use the NASP function, THEN perform the following:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.A. Note position of PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch:

ABSOL or REL.B. On PMS, select NAS.C. On PMS, select N4.D. Depress "F4"E. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).F. Depress "Enter" to print.G. Depress "Enter" to select local printer.H. Obtain printout.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:93 of 137CHANGE: 051I. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct dateJ. Mark printout with appropriate position:

ABSOL or REL.K. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to opposite position: REL or ABSOL.L. Depress "F4"M. Depress 1 (CRD Position Report).N. Depress "Enter" to print.O. Depress "Enter" to select local printer.P. Obtain printout.Q. Mark printout with appropriate position: REL or ABSOL.R. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:94 of 137CHANGE: 051 19.1.2 IF desired to use function hot key, THEN perform the following:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.A. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.B. Depress the API/RPI labeled hot key.C. Depress "ENTER" to select each default value.D. Enter PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch position.E. Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to REL.F. Select "YES".G. Select F3 to print.H. Obtain printout.I. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct dateJ. Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.009PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CRD SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:95 of 137CHANGE: 051 19.2 IF SPDS report desired, THEN perform the following:

NOTE If EC60523 is installed, then PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch is mounted on back of C74 in Computer Room.

19.2.1 Note position of PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch:

ABSOL or REL.

19.2.2 Open a tabular trend.

19.2.3 Search for "Z1*".

19.2.4 Depress the CONTROL key.

19.2.5 Select each of the control rods.

19.2.6 Click "SELECT".

19.2.7 Print tabular trend.A. Mark the report with appropriate position: ABSOL or REL.B. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct date 19.2.8 Place PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch to opposite position:

REL or ABSOL.

19.2.9 Print tabular trend.A. Mark the report with appropriate position: REL or ABSOL.B. Verify the following on printout:

Correct time Correct date 19.2.10 Verify PI Panel POSITION SELECT switch in ABSOL.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S2 Page 1 of 6JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #9Date:8/4/2016 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ESAS1 (S2)System/Duty Area:ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEMTask:Verify Proper ESAS Actuation (and Perform ESAS Operation After Actuation)

JTA#ANO1-RO-ESAS-NORM-5KA Value RO 4.5SRO 4.8 KA Reference013 A4.01Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location: Inside CR:

XOutside CR:Both:Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate ):Plant Site:Simulator:Perform Lab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment: Simulator :Plant Site:

Lab:Testing Method: Simulate:Perform:Approximate Completion Time In Minutes:7 MinutesReference(s): 1202.012, RT-10, Verify proper ESAS actuation (Revision 16)Examinee's Name:ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time*SignedDate:*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee)and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ESAS1THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:K11-F6, ESAS Partial Trip is in alarm and ESAS is imminent on low RCS pressure.Reactor Coolant Pumps have been tripped due to LOSM.CV-1206 (RCP Seal INJ Block) is open in OVRD.TASK STANDARD:HPI Pump P-36C must be securedLPI Pump P-34B must be securedHPI Block valve CV-1278 throttled back so that its flow is within ~20 gpm of the next highest HPI flow.This is an alternate success path JPM.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:1202.012, RT-10, Verify proper ESAS actuation.SUGGESTED SIMULATOR SETUP:Use any at power IC.IC 284Align P-36C as the ES Pump and P-36A as OP HPI Pump.IMF CV063 (C Makeup/HPI Pump Trip P-36C).IMF CV1408 (CV-1408 fails to open on ESAS CH 2 and 4)Place CV-1206 in override and verify open.IMF RC462 2.5 (RCS leak downstream of MU45A) (RCS leak causes ESAS to actuate on low RCS pressure.CV-1278 will have to be throttled back to within 20 gpm of the next highest HPI flow).Trip all RCPs.Verify that CV-1278 should be throttled per RT10.Snapshot can now be made.Revision 6 Note:Added failure of CV-1408 to make the JPM have more than one critical step.Updated for procedure revision.

Page 3 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ESAS1INITIATING CUE: The SM/CRS directs you to perform RT-10 (Verify proper ESAS actuation).

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A1. Verify BWST Outlets open:CV-1407CV-1408POSITIVE / NEGATIVE CUE:CV-1407 has red light ON, green light OFF.(Open)CV-1408 had green light ON, red light OFF.(Closed)On panel C16 recognized CV-1408 closed. On panel C18verified CV-1407 open.____________EXAMINER CUE

Tellthe applicant hehas permission to override andstopcomponents.

(Note - P-36C will trip in ~30 seconds so this communication must occur promptly)Alternate Path #1Begins here.

C A.IFBWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 orCV-1408) fails to open,THEN override AND stop associatedHPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps untilfailed valve is opened:POSITIVE CUE:MAN switch backlit (White) on for HPI and LPI PumpsHPI and LPI pumps in override and stopped.On panel C16Placed HPI Pump (P-36C) inoverride.Stopped HPI Pump (P-36C).Placed LPI Pump (P-34B) inoverride.Stopped LPI Pump (P-34B).RB Spray Pump (P-35B) doesnot have an actuation signaland is therefore N/A____________Alternate Path #1Ends here.2. Verify service water to DG1 and DG2 coolersopen:CV-3806CV-3807POSITIVE CUE:Red lights ON, green lights OFF for CV-3806and CV-3807.On panel C19, verified servicewater to DG1 and DG2 coolersopen, CV-3806 and CV-3807.____________EXAMINER NOTE: Step 3 of RT10 is N/A due to RCPs off.3. IF any RCP is running, THEN perform thefollowing:POSITIVE CUE:All RCPs are off.N/A, all RCPs were secureddue to LOSM.____________

Page 4 of 6 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER NOTE: ES Channels 5 and 6 may actuate during the verificationof Step 4,in which case theapplicant may re-perform previous steps.4. Verify proper ESAS channels tripped.POSITIVE CUE:Channels 1, 2, 3 and 4 are tripped.Verified that ESAS Channels1-4 are tripped by observingthat annunciators K11-A2 (HPIChannel 1), K11-A3 (HPIChannel 2), K11-B2 (LPIChannel 3) and K11-B3 (LPIChannel 4) in alarm or byobserving appropriatecomponents have repositionedon C16 and C18.____________5. Perform the following:A. Verify each component properlyactuated on C16 and C18, except thoseoverridden in previous steps.B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.1. IF any of the following conditions exist: A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4) B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5) A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4) B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4) A RB SPRAY FLOW HI/LO(K11-C4) B RB SPRAY FLOW HI/LO(K11-C5)POSITIVE CUE:All ES components on C16 and C18 are intheir proper position except P-34B and P-36C.On panels C16/18, verifiedeach component in its properES position except that P-36Cand P-34B are off.____________EXAMINER NOTE: The only ES flows that are in service at this time will be HPI flow from the A HPI pumpP-36A. RCS pressure is too high for LPI flow and RB Spray has not actuated. LPI flow low alarm cannot becorrected by ACA at current RCS pressure. HPI Low Flow for P-36C cannot be corrected due to the pumpbeing secured in earlier step.

Page 5 of 6 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER CUE: Acknowledge that the applicant has ask permission to override and throttle closed onCV-1278Alternate Path #2Begins here.(C)5.C.If only one train of HPI is availableAND RCS press is > 600 psig, THENthrottle HPI Block valve with the highestflow to within 20 gpm of the next highestflow.POSITIVE CUE:MAN switch backlit (White).All HPI flows from P-36A are within 20 gpm ofeach other.On panel C18, depressedMAN pushbutton associatedwith CV-1278. Throttled HPIblock valve CV-1278 back sothat its flow is within ~20 gpmof the next highest flowindicated on FIRS-1209 (onC18) or on SPDS HPI P-36ADiagnostic screen.____________Alternate Path #2Ends here.EXAMINER CUE: Notify applicant that the JPM is complete after he balances flow per the standardabove.NOTES:_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________END Page 6 of 6INITIAL CONDITIONS:K11-F6, ESAS Partial Trip is in alarm and ESAS is imminent on low RCS pressure.Reactor Coolant Pumps have been tripped due to LOSM.CV-1206 (RCP Seal INJ Block) is open in OVRD.INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS directs you to perform RT10, Verify proper ESASactuation.

1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 31 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 1 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATIONNOTEObtain Shift Manager/CRS permission prior to overriding ES.1. Verify BWST T3 Outlets open: CV-1407 CV-1408 A.IFBWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) fails to open,THEN override AND stop associated HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failed valve isopened:CV-1407CV-1408P34AP34BP36A/BP36C/BP35AP35B2. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open: CV-3806 CV-3807 1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 32 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 2 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION3. IF any RCP is running,THEN perform the following:

A.IF ES Channel 5 or 6 has actuated,THEN perform the following:

1)IF SCM is adequate,THEN trip all running RCPs due to loss of ICW: P32A P32C P32B P32D 2)IF SCM is not adequate,THEN check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCMAND perform the following:

a)IF 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN trip all RCPs: P32A P32C P32B P32D b)IF > 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN perform the following:(1) Leave currently running RCPs on.(2)IF RCS press > 150 psig,THEN notify CRS toGO TO 1202.002, "LOSS OF SUBCOOLING MARGIN"procedure.(3) Restore RCP services per RT-8 while continuing.

B.IF neither ES channel 5 nor 6 has actuated,THEN dispatch an operator to performService Water And Auxiliary Cooling System(1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW Following ES Actuation" while continuing.

1)WHEN ICW Cooler SW Outlets and Bypasses are aligned per 1104.029, Exhibit B,THEN override AND open one Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply(CV-3811 or CV-3820).

1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 33 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 3 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION4. Verify proper ESAS Channels tripped:ConditionChannels ActuatedRCS press 1550 psig1,2,3,4RB press 18.7 psia1,2,3,4,5,6RB press 44.7 psia7,8,9,105. Perform the following:A. Verify each component properly actuated on C16 and C18,except those overridden inprevious steps.B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.NOTE During ESAS actuation, low LPI flow is expected until RCS depressurizes below LPI pump shutoff head. During large break LOCAs, high LPI flow can be experienced. Flow must be throttled to ensure ECCSflows are maintained within assumptions of calculations.

1.IF any of the following conditions exist: A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4) B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5) A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4) B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B5) A RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C4) B RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C5)THEN use Annunciator K11 Corrective Action (1203.012J) to clear unexpected alarms.

C.IF only one train of HPI is availableANDRCS press is > 600 psig,THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 34 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 4 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION6. On C10, perform the following: Verify DGs operating within normal limits: DG 1 DG 2 4100 to 4200 V 4100 to 4200 V 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 2750 KW 2750 KW Verify the following breakers open: A3-A4 Crossties: A-310 A-410 B5-B6 Crossties: B-513 B-613 Unit AUX feeds to A1 and A2: A-112 A-212 Verify the following breakers closed: A3 Feeds to B5: A-301 B-512 A4 Feeds to B6: A-401 B-6127. On C09, perform the following:A. Check AUX Cooling Water header depressurized.

B.IF proper EFW actuation and control has not already been verified,THEN verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 35 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 5 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION8. On C19, perform the following:A. Verify LPI (Decay Heat) Room Cooler running in each Decay Heat Room:P34A RoomP34B RoomVUC1A or BVUC1C or D B.IF RB Spray has actuated,THEN verify SW to RB Spray P35A and P35B LO CLRs open: CV-3804 CV-38059. IF all RCPs are offANDRCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) is closed,THEN place RCP Seal Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE: SV-1271 SV-1273 SV-1270 SV-127210. IF leakage into the RB is indicated,THEN verify RB cooling maximized:A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running: VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1DB. Verify RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves open: CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815C. Verify key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers unlatched: SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 36 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 6 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION11. Initiate RB H 2 sampling using Containment Hydrogen Control (1104.031), Exhibit A.12. Verify each component properly actuated on C26.13. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26: Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814) Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816) Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)14. Verify the following High Point Vents closed:

A Loop B LoopReactorVesselPressurizer SV-1081 SV-1082 SV-1083 SV-1084 SV-1091 SV-1092 SV-1093 SV-1094 SV-1071 SV-1072 SV-1073 SV-1074 SV-1077 SV-107915. IF AUX Lube Oil pump for running HPI pump fails to stop after 20 second time delay,THEN within one hour of ESAS actuation dispatch an operator to stop AUX Lube Oil pumplocally at breaker while continuing:

P64A P64B P64CB5721B5722/B6515B651416. Place running Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pump (P34A/P34B) hand switches inNORMAL-AFTER-START to enable DECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP (K09-A7) alarm: P34A P34B17. Monitor ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM alarms on K11.

1202.012REPETITIVE TASKSCHANGE016PAGE 37 of 1001202.012RT-10 Rev 3-1-13Page 7 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION18. IF any of the following components/systems are in service:

Condensate PumpsCondenser Vacuum PumpsWaterbox Vacuum PumpsSeal Oil SystemControl Room ChillersTHEN coordinate with CRS/SM to secure components and/or systems, as time permits.19. Coordinate with CRS/SM to re-verify component actuation with another operator.

END Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S3 Page 1 of 7JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #6Date:8/4/2016 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02 (S3)System/Duty Area:Pressurizer Pressure Control SystemTask:Respond to Pressurizer Spray Valve FailureJTA#ANO1-RO-AOP-OFFNORM-115, ANO1-SRO-AOP-OFFNORM-114KA Value RO 3.9SRO 3.9KA Reference

010 A2.02Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location:Inside CR XOutside CRBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform o rSimulate):Plant Site:Simulator:PerformLab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment:Plant SiteSimulatorLabTesting Method:PerformSimulateApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:

10MinutesReference(s):1103.005 PZR Operation (Section 8.2, Rev 45), 1203.015 PZR Systems Failure (Section 6, Rev 21)Examinee's Name:

ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time

  • SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) andis current with that revision.

Page 2 of 7JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: The plant is at steady state power operations with no load transients anticipated. Chemistry reports a Pressurizer Boron sample 60 ppm higher than RCS Boron (this has beenconfirmed with a backup sample). An SRO has verified that the full reactivity effect of the equalization will be a boration of 5 ppm. The RCS has been diluted to achieve ~275% rod index. You are responsible for panel C04 and related annunciators.TASK STANDARD:Performed the following in accordance with the applicable procedures without causing a Reactor Trip. Pressurizer boron equalization started per 1103.005 CV-1009 (Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve) closed per 1203.015TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:1103.005 Section 8.2 and 1203.015 Section 6This JPM is an Alternate Success Path JPM.SIMULATOR SETUP:100% power with rod index at ~275%. (IC 280)Close RC4 Pressurizer spray minimum flow.When CV-1008 is cracked open, insert command to fail Pressurizer Spray Valve CV-1008 to full open.

Page 3 of 7JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02INITIATING CUE:The CRS/SM directs you to equalize Pressurizer and RCS boron concentrations per 1103.005 PressurizerOperation beginning at step 8.2.6.

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)8.2.6 Place Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008)in manual and open slightly while maintainingtarget pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig.POSITIVE CUE:CV-1008 is in manual and throttled open.On panel C04, placedHS-1003 in Manual positionand placed CV-1008 inthrottled open position.___________8.2.7 To maximize PZR recirc flow and minimizeRCS pressure fluctuations, perform thefollowing:A. Operate PZR heaters in MANUALas needed.B. Maintain below applicable 480V buscurrent limits.POSITIVE CUE:PZR heater banks are in manual and 480Vbus currents within limitsPlaced some PZR heaters inmanual (SAT if examineeplaces any of the heaters inmanual).___________EXAMINERNOTE:Fail CV-1008 100% open (wait untilStep 8.2.7 hasbeen done.)BOOTH:Insert malfunction to fail CV

-1008 full open.ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS HERE (C)8.2.8 Throttle spray flow to hold steadypressure while maintaining targetpressure band 2130 to 2180 psig.FAULTED CUE:RCS pressure is dropping and CV-1008 is full open.Monitored RCS pressure,noticed RCS pressuredropping and/or PressurizerSpray Valve CV-1008 fullopen.___________

Page 4 of 7JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02INITIATING CUE:

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A8.2.9 IF any upset occurs while equalizingboron, THEN GO TO step 8.2.13.POSITIVE CUE:Applicant transitions to Step 8.2.13.Applicant transitions to Step8.2.13___________8.2.13 WHEN boron differential is 50ppm, OR an upset occurs whileequalizing, THEN verify controls inAUTO, or ON as follows: Pressurizer Spray Control AUTO Bank 1 Proportional Heaters AUTO Bank 2 Proportional Heaters AUTO Bank 4 Heaters AUTO Bank 3 Heaters AUTO Bank 5 Heaters AUTO Group 5 Heaters ONA. IF an upset occurred that exceeded TechSpec 3.4.1 minimum steady state RCSpressure limits, THEN initiate a conditionreport.NEGATIVE CUE:CV-1008 will not close (red light ON, greenlight OFF).Pressurizer heaters are in automaticMay attempt to closePressurizer Spray ValveCV-1008.Place CV-1008 to AUTO tosee if valve will close.Return pressurizer heaters to AUTO.___________

Page 5 of 7JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02INITIATING CUE:

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER NOTE:Expect RCS Pressure Lo alarm.The following steps are from the ACA for K09

-C1.1. Confirm alarm by comparing RC pressureindications on C04. RC Pressure Narrow Range Loop Arecorder (PR-1023) RC Pressure Narrow Range Loop Brecorder (PR-1038) RC Pressure Wide Range Loop Brecorder (PI-1041) RC Pressure Wide Range Loop Bindicator (PR-1042)POSITIVE CUE:RCS Pressure is less than 2055 psig andloweringApplicant verifies alarm is validby checking RCS pressureless than 2055 psig___________2. Refer to COLR Figures for RC pressure limits.POSITIVE CUE:CRS acknowledges need to reference COLR Figures.Applicant informs CRS of needto reference COLR Figures oractually refers to the COLR.___________3. IF RC pressure is confirmed low, THENperform the following:A. Verify all pressurizer heaters on.B. Verify Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008)closed.C. Verify ERV (PSV-1000) closed.D. Refer to Pressurizer Systems Failure(1203.015).POSITIVE CUE:All appropriate heaters are energizedCV-1008 is OPENPSV-1000 is closedRefers to 1203.015Applicant refers to PressurizerSystems Failure OP-1203.015and / or takes appropriateactions from the AOP.___________EXAMINER NOTE:The applicant may not reference the ACA, but proceed directly to the 1203.015 AOP, ormay take prudent action and close the Spray Isolation Valve prior to referencing either procedure.

Page 6 of 7JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02INITIATING CUE:

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINERE NOTE:Applicant will transition to 1203.015,Pressurizer System Failures, Section 6

.Step 1 attempts to close the Pressurizer Spray Valve CV-1008 in manual, which was already attemptedpreviously. (Step 1.A is below)EXAMINER CUE:If asked the CRS does NOT desire to torque CV

-1009 closed.

C A.IF CV-1008 will not close,THEN closePressurizer Spray Isolation Valve(CV-1009).

1)IF CRS/SM desires,THEN overrideCV-1009 torque switch by holding thehandswitch in the desired position.POSITIVE CUE:CV-1009 is closed (green light indication ON,red light OFF). Pressure is recoveringNEGATIVE CUE:RCS pressure is 2000 psig and lowering.On panel C04, closedPressurizer Spray IsolationValve CV-1009.___________ALTERNATE PATH ENDS HEREEND Page 7 of 7 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-PZR02 INITIAL CONDITIONS:The plant is at steady state power operations with no loadtransients anticipated.Chemistry reports a Pressurizer Boron sample 60 ppm higherthan RCS Boron (this has been confirmed with a backup sample).An SRO has verified that the full reactivity effect of theequalization will be a boration of 5 ppm.The RCS has been diluted to achieve ~275% rod index.Reactivity Management Brief has been completed per COPD-030.You are responsible for panel C04 and related annunciators.

INITIATING CUE:The CRS/SM directs you to equalize Pressurizer and RCS boronconcentrations per 1103.005 Pressurizer Operation beginning atstep 8.2.6.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:15 of 61CHANGE: 045 CAUTION The following section has been determined to have a Reactivity Addition Potential (RAP) and this activity is classified as a Risk Level R2.8.0 Normal Operation NOTE ERV and code safety leakage may be detected by pressurizer relief valve monitoring system (See Pressurizer Relief Valve Monitoring System (1105.013)) or by observing the following downstream temperature elements:

Valve Element SPDS Point PSV-1000 TE-1025 T1025 PSV-1001 TE-1026 T1026 PSV-1002 TE-1027 T1027 8.1 Observe that pressurizer heaters cycle at proper setpoints as listed in the "Setpoints" section of this procedure.

R A P PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:16 of 61CHANGE: 045 NOTE From 220" PZR level, assuming boron will be completely equalized, RCS concentration change is estimated by dividing the difference between PZR and RCS concentrations by a factor of 12. Examples: (PZR conc - RCS conc) / 12 = RCS concentration change

( 700 - 640 ) / 12 = 5 causing a 5 ppm boration

( 300 - 324 ) / 12 = -2 causing a 2 ppm dilution For a given spray flow, the greater the difference between PZR and RCS boron, the greater the rate of change in reactivity effects.

During steady state power operations, it is desirable to equalize boron before 50 ppm difference is reached in order to lessen reactivity effects of the evolution.

8.2 WHEN PZR water space sampling indicates a difference of >50 ppm boron concentration between reactor coolant and PZR, OR when directed by the CRS/SM AND the following conditions are present:

Unit at stable conditions No load transients anticipated, THEN equalize concentrations as follows:

8.2.1 Using formula above, estimate full reactivity effect from boron equalization: (circle one) boration / dilution of ________ ppmA. Obtain SRO review of calculation.

8.2.2 IF equalization will cause a boration, THEN consider diluting the RCS to obtain a rod index near the lower end of the CRD operating band prior to continuing.

8.2.3 IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT been conducted, THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief per COPD-030 with an SRO.

8.2.4 IF equalization will cause a dilution, THEN verify power 99.75%.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:17 of 61CHANGE: 045 NOTE The Tech Spec 3.4.1 minimum steady state RCS pressure limits are as follows (Ref. COLR):

4-RCP minimum limit: 2082.2 psig 3-RCP minimum limit: 2120.4 psig in the 1-pump loop 2081.2 psig in the 2-pump loop COLR assumes these indications from PMS are used (or their equivalent):

Loop A Loop B P1021, P1023 P1038, P1039 8.2.5 Setup PMS trend for the following points if available:

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop A (P1021)

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop A (P1023)

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop B (P1038)

Reactor Coolant Pressure Loop B (P1039)A. Setup a programmable alarm on at least one of the above points.

8.2.6 Place Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) in manual and open slightly while maintaining target pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig.

8.2.7 To maximize PZR recirc flow and minimize RCS pressure fluctuations, perform the following:

A. Operate PZR heaters in MANUAL as needed.

B.Maintain below applicable 480V bus current limits.

8.2.8 Throttle spray flow to hold steady pressure while maintaining target pressure band 2130 to 2180 psig.

8.2.9 IF any upset occurs while equalizing boron, THEN GO TO step 8.2.13.

8.2.10 Monitor RCS pressure closely.

8.2.11 Verify PZR heaters remaining in AUTO cycle on and off as necessary to control RCS pressure.

8.2.12 Request chemist sample PZR boron periodically per Reactor Coolant System Sampling (1607.001).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:18 of 61CHANGE: 045 8.2.13 WHEN boron differential is 50 ppm, OR an upset occurs while equalizing, THEN verify controls in AUTO, or ON as follows:

Pressurizer Spray Control AUTO Bank 1 Proportional Heaters AUTO Bank 2 Proportional Heaters AUTO Bank 4 Heaters AUTO Bank 3 Heaters AUTO Bank 5 Heaters AUTO Group 5 Heaters ONA. IF an upset occurred that exceeded Tech Spec 3.4.1 minimum steady state RCS pressure limits, THEN initiate a condition report.

9.0 Depressurization

9.1 For RCS cooldown to 280°F: 9.1.1 IF RC pumps are in service, THEN refer to Plant Shutdown and Cooldown (1102.010).

9.1.2 IF RC pumps are off, THEN refer to Natural Circulation Cooldown (1203.013).

9.2 For decay heat operation 280°F to Mode 5, use PZR auxiliary spray (CV-1416) as necessary to reduce RCS pressure per Decay Heat Removal Operating Procedure (1104.004).

9.3 To collapse PZR steam bubble, refer to one of the following procedures:

Decay Heat Removal Operating procedure (1104.004), "Maintaining RCS Pressure with N 2 While Collapsing the Pressurizer Steam Bubble" section.Draining and N 2 Blanketing the RCS (1103.011), "Collapsing the Pressurizer Steam Bubble" section.

Draining and N 2 Blanketing the RCS (1103.011), Attachment G"Scripted RCS Drain from Bubble in Pressurizer to Cold Legs Drained" (this section assumes RCS Alternate Purification is in service).9.4 Refer to Draining and N 2 Blanketing the RCS (1103.011) to de-energize and danger tag pressurizer heaters when draining the pressurizer.

1203.015PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURECHANGE021 PAGE 15 of 25SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE ENTRY CONDITIONSOne or more of the following: CV-1008 closed when it should be open.

- Normal operation:Opens - 2205 psigCloses - 2155 psig

- Power >80% and MFP trip:Opens - 2080 psigCloses - 2030 psig CV-1008 open when it should be closed. Abnormal change in RC pressure. RCS pressure transmitter failure which is selected for RCS pressure control.

1203.015PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURECHANGE021 PAGE 16 of 25SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE INSTRUCTIONS1. IF Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is failed open,THEN place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch (HS-1003) in MAN AND attempt to closeCV-1008 (modulating valve).

A.IF CV-1008 will not close,THEN close Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009).

1)IF CRS/SM desires,THEN override CV-1009 torque switch by holding the handswitch in the desired position.

2)IF CV-1009 will not closeAND if time permits,THEN perform the following:a. Dispatch an operator to Pressurizer Spray Block CV-1009 (B5534).b. Attempt to close CV-1009 using local handswitch on breaker.B. Verify Pressurizer heaters return RCS pressure to normal.CAUTIONPressurizer spray shall not be used if the temperature difference between the Pressurizer andthe spray fluid is >430°F (TRM 3.4.3). Closing CV-1009 isolates the CV-1008 bypass sprayflow.C.IF necessary,THEN cycle Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009) open and closed tocontrol RCS pressure and spray line temperature..

D.IF both CV-1008 and CV-1009 fail to closeAND RCS pressure is dropping,THEN perform the following:1) Verify all PZR heaters ON.2) Immediately begin reducing load to 40% at 10%/min per Rapid Plant Shutdown(1203.045).(continued) 1203.015PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURECHANGE021 PAGE 17 of 25SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE 3)IF 4 RCPs are runningAND BOTH of the following conditions are met: Load is reduced to675 MWe (75% load) Reactor power is 75%,THEN perform the following:a) Start one of the following: "C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C) "C" Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)b) Place the pump not started in Pull-to-Lock: "C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C) "C" Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)c) Start both of the following: "C" RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C) "C" Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C)d) Stop "C" RCP (P-32C).

e)WHEN zero speed is indicated,THEN verify the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK: P-63C P-80C P-81C P-82C(continued) 1203.015PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURECHANGE021 PAGE 18 of 25SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURENOTEIn Modes 1 and 2, operation with only one RCP in each loop causes entry into TS 3.4.4Condition A.

4)IF 3 RCPs runningAND all of the following conditions are met: Load is reduced to360 MWe (40% load) Reactor power is 55%, "C" and "D" RCPs in-serviceTHEN perform the following:a) Start one of the following: "C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C) "C" Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)b) Place the pump not started in Pull-to-Lock: "C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C) "C" Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)c) Start both of the following: "C" RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C) "C" Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C)d) Stop "C" RCP (P-32C).

e)WHEN zero speed is indicated,THEN verify the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK: P-63C P-80C P-81C P-82Cf) Enter TS 3.4.4 Condition A.(continued) 1203.015PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURECHANGE021 PAGE 19 of 25SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE 5)IF 3 RCPs running,AND "D" RCP is secured,THEN perform the following:a) Trip Reactor.b) Secure P-32C as follows:1) Start one of the following: "C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C) "C" Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)2) Place the pump not started in Pull-to-Lock: "C" RCP HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C) "C" Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)3) Start both of the following: "C" RCP Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C) "C" Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C)4) Stop "C" RCP (P-32C).

5)WHEN zero speed is indicated,THEN verify the following pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK: P-63C P-80C P-81C P-82Cc) PerformReactor Trip (1202.001) while continuing with this procedure.d) Enter TS 3.4.5 Condition A.

6)WHEN conditions permit a Reactor Building entry,THEN attempt to manually close either CV-1008 or CV-1009.E. Contact Senior Manager, Operations.(continued) 1203.015PRESSURIZER SYSTEMS FAILURECHANGE021 PAGE 20 of 25SECTION 6 -- PRESSURIZER SPRAY VALVE (CV-1008) FAILURE2. IF Pressurizer Spray Valve (CV-1008) is failed closed,THEN perform the following:A. Hold the plant at steady state conditions.

B.IF CV-1008 is energized,THEN place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode switch (HS-1003) in MAN AND attempt to cycleCV-1008 (modulating valve) open and closed.C. Write a Condition Report to evaluate continued operation of the plant with inoperable SprayValve.D. Contact Senior Manager, Operations AND consider one or both of the following:

1)IF CV-1008 will not open,THEN commence a shutdown per Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016)and Plant Shutdown and Cooldown (1102.010).a. During shutdown, perform the following: To prevent lifting of relief valves, reduce power slowly. Regulate RCS pressure by manual control of Pressurizer heaters.

2)WHEN conditions permit a reactor building entry,THEN perform the following:a. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation Valve (CV-1009) from C04.b. Attempt to manually open CV-1008 in reactor building.CAUTIONPressurizer spray shall not be used if the temperature difference between the Pressurizer andthe spray fluid is >430°F (TRM 3.4.3). Closing CV-1009 isolates the CV-1008 bypass sprayflow.c.IF CV-1008 can be opened,THEN cycle CV-1009 open and closed to control RCS pressure and spray linetemperature.3. IF an RCS pressure transmitter which is selected for control has failed or is failing,THEN GO TO Annunciator K07 Corrective Action (1203.012F), SASS Mismatch (K07-B4).4. Refer to "RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNB Surveillance Limits" of the ANO1 COLR(TS 3.4.1).

END Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S4 Page 1 of 8JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #5Date: 8/4/2016 JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 (S4)System/Duty Area:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP SYSTEMTask:SHUTDOWN RCP P-32A AT POWERJTA#ANO1-RO-RCP-NORM-3KA Value RO 3.7SRO 3.9KA Reference

003 A2.02Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location:Inside CR XOutside CRBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate

):Plant Site:Simulator:PerformLab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment:Plant SiteSimulatorLabTesting Method:PerformSimulateApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:

5MinutesReference(s): OP-1103.006 Rev. 44 and OP

-1203.031 Rev. 26Examinee's Name: ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Tim e*SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) andis current with that revision.

Page 2 of 8JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 59% power.Reactivity Management Brief was conducted prior to the down power.It is not desired to have predictive maintenance install backup indication of RCP zero speed.TASK STANDARD:The Applicant secured P-32A RCP in accordance with OP-1103.006 Section 10.0, recognized reverse pumprotation, and tripped the reactor and all other running RCPs.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:OP-1103.006, REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATION, Rev. 44, Section 10.0OP-1203.031, REACTOR COOLANT PUMP AND MOTOR EMERGENCY, Rev. 26, Section 6This JPM is an Alternate Success Path JPM.INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to secure P-32A RCP per OP-1103.006 Section 10.0 starting at Step10.5.Suggested simulator setup:59% power (IC 280)Malfunction - IMF RC466 - Reverse Rotation for P-32AOverride - DO HS1022_B;false (Prevents zero speed lamp for P-32A from coming on)15 seconds after pump stop insert the following for vibrations:IOR-DO K08B6 True - RCP VIB HI alarmIOR-DORCPA_R01 True - RCP VIB HI red lightRevision 2 notes: Updated for procedure revisions.

Page 3 of 8JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to secure P-32A RCP per OP-1103.006 Section 10.0 starting at Step10.5.(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER CUE: If asked inform applicant that Step 10.3 is NOT desired, i.e. predictive maintenance will notbe asked to install backup indication of RCP zero speed prior to RCP stop.10.5.1 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump(P-32A), THEN perform the following:A. Start one of the following: HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A) Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A) Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON and Green light OFF for selectedpump to start.Pump not started in PULL-TO-LOCK.Applicant will start either HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A) Emergency HP Oil LiftPump (P-80A)Applicant will place other pumpin PULL-TO-LOCK. HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A) Emergency HP Oil LiftPump (P-80A)___________EXAMINER NOTE: Applicant will verify lube oil pumps started correctly by checking flow switches on plantcomputer.B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82A).POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON and Green light OFF for P-82AApplicant started BackupBackstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82A).___________C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop LubeOil Pump (P-81A).POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON and Green light OFF for P-81AApplicant verifies BackstopLube Oil Pump (P-81A)running.___________

Page 4 of 8JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (c)D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A).POSITIVE CUE:Green light ON and Red light OFF for P-32AApplicant stops P-32A ReactorCoolant Pump.___________E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stopthe remaining RCP within 2 minutesPOSITIVE CUE:P-32A is the only pump to be stopped, theother three are running.Not Applicable.___________ Steps 10.5.2 through 10.5.4 are not applicableEXAMINER NOTE: Applicant may begin monitoring for reverse rotation at this point and if identified mayproceed as directed by AOP 1203.031 which would have him trip the reactor and stop all RCPs OR he maycontinue with the normal operating procedure which will accomplish these same steps. The following JPMsteps assume he stays in OP-1103.006.If he transitions to the AOP, Step 6 will not be checked.10.6 Perform the following during RCP coastdown.10.6.1 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A)stopped, THEN verify the following pumpsremain on: EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

OREmergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A) Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81A)POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON and Green light OFF for the twopumps previously started.Green light ON and Red light OFF for thepump in PULL-TO-LOCKApplicant verified appropriatepumps running. HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)OREmergency HP Oil LiftPump (P-80A) Backstop Lube OilPump (P-81A)___________

Page 5 of 8JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A (C)10.7.1 Perform the following to check no reverserotation when the shaft stops: IF associated RCS loop flow is no longerdropping, THEN consider the shaftstopped. Plant computer reverse rotation alarmremains clear.

o RCP P32A REVERSE ROTATION(FS6510)NEGATIVE CUE:RCS loop flow is no longer dropping BUTplant computer reverse rotation is in alarm.RCP P32A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510).Applicant recognizes that plantcomputer reverse rotation is inalarm. RCP P32A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)___________EXAMINER NOTE: Step below is the same in both OP-1203.031 Section 6, RCP Reverse Rotation andOP-1103.006 Step 10.8.Only the Reactor Trip and tripping all RCPs are critical, the turbine will trip automatically and SCM willremain adequate with no operator actions.ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS HERE (C)10.8 IF reverse rotation indicated, THEN performthe following: Trip the reactor and perform immediateactions of Reactor Trip (1202.001) o Depress Reactor Trip PB, verify allrods inserted and reactor powerdropping o Depress Turbine Trip PB, checkTurbine throttle and governorvalves closed o Check adequate SCM Trip running RCP(s) Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure(1202.XXX series)POSITIVE CUE:Applicant will perform the following:Trip the reactor and perform immediateactions of Reactor Trip (1202.001) oDepress Reactor Trip PB, verify allrods inserted and reactor power dropping oDepress Turbine Trip PB, checkTurbine throttle and governor valvesclosedApplicant will perform thefollowing:Trip the reactor and performimmediate actions of ReactorTrip (1202.001) o Depress Reactor TripPB, verify all rodsinserted and reactorpower dropping o Depress Turbine TripPB, check Turbinethrottle and governorvalves closed o Check adequate SCMTrip running RCP(s)Refer to Emergency OperatingProcedure (1202.001 ReactorTrip)___________

Page 6 of 8 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A oCheck adequate SCMTrip running RCP(s) oGreen light ON and Red light OFF for all RCPs.Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure(1202.001 Reactor Trip) oApplicant may state that immediateactions are complete and that hewould continue through the ReactorTrip EOP.ALTERNATE PATH ENDS HEREEXAMINER CUE: Inform applicant JPM is complete.END Page 7 of 8The following is the guidance contained in 1203.031, Reactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency AOP.This is not part of the included handout; it is only intended as a reference for the EXAMINER. Thesesteps are included in the normal operating procedure (Step 10.8) that the applicant has already beengiven.SECTION 6RCP REVERSE ROTATIONINSTRUCTIONS1. Trip reactor AND perform immediate actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001).2. Trip running RCP(s).3. Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.XXX).END Page 8 of 8 JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-RCP04 INITIAL CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 59% power.Reactivity Management Brief was conducted prior to the down power.It is not desired to have predictive maintenance install backup indication ofRCP zero speed.

INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to secure P-32A Reactor Coolant Pump per OP-1103.006Section 10.0 starting at Step10.5.(Steps 10.1 through 10.4 have been completed as appropriate)

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:36 of 79CHANGE: 04410.0 RCP Stop 10.1 IF RCP is tripped OR emergency manual trip is required, THEN refer to Reactor Coolant Pump Trip (1203.022).

CAUTION The following section has been determined to have a Reactivity Addition Potential (RAP) and this activity is classified as a Risk Level R2.

10.2 IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT been conducted AND reactor is critical, THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief per COPD-030 with an SRO.

10.3 IF desired OR due to RCP monitoring equipment failure, THEN contact predictive maintenance to install backup indication of RCP zero speed prior to RCP stop.

{4.3.1}CAUTION Stopping or shifting RCPs or changing RCP loop configuration when RPS is reset can cause a reactor trip or an ICS runback.

Stopping the last RCP prior to bypassing EFIC will cause EFW actuation.

10.4 IF RPS is reset and NOT in Shutdown Bypass, THEN perform the following:

Maintain 1 RCP per loop.

Notify load dispatcher of any load change.

IF stopping 1 of 4 RCPs, THEN reduce power to 70% using Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045)

OR Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016).

CAUTION Operation with only 1 RCP in each loop is permitted for 18 hours2.083333e-4 days <br />0.005 hours <br />2.97619e-5 weeks <br />6.849e-6 months <br /> with the Rx Critical per TS 3.4.4 Condition A. Mode 3 is required within an additional 6 hours6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br /> per TS 3.4.4 Condition B.CRITICAL STEP IF stopping 1 of 3 RCPs, resulting in 1 pump per loop, THEN reduce power to 40% using Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045)

OR Power Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016).

R A P PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:37 of 79CHANGE: 044 CAUTION Single pump operation in excess of 2 minutes may cause pump damage due to inadequate flow through the hydrostatic bearing.

NOTE Computer alarm BACKSTOP LO FLOW will not clear until both backstop oil pumps are running with adequate flow. (not applicable for P-32B) 10.5 Perform the following to stop RCP(s):

10.5.1 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A), THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)

NOTE Flow through each Backstop Lube Oil Pump and Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump can be verified utilizing the following computer points:

P-81A (FS-6520)

P-82A (FS-6525)B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82A).C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81A).D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A).

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:38 of 79CHANGE: 044 10.5.2 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C), THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

NOTE Flow through each Backstop Lube Oil Pump and Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump can be verified utilizing the following computer points:

P-81C (FS-6522)

P-82C (FS-6527)B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82C).C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C).D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C).

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:39 of 79CHANGE: 044 10.5.3 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32D), THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63D)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80D)1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63D)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80D)

NOTE Flow through each Backstop Lube Oil Pump and Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump can be verified utilizing the following computer points:

P-81D (FS-6523)

P-82D (FS-6528)B. Start Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-82D).C. IF NOT running, THEN start Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81D).D. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32D).

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.E. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:40 of 79CHANGE: 044 10.5.4 IF stopping Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B), THEN perform the following:

CAUTION Simultaneous operation of the normal and Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63 and P-80) is undesirable. Reduced oil pressure and cavitation can occur.A. Start ONE of the following:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63B)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80B)1. Place pump NOT started in PULL-TO-LOCK:

HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63B)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80B)

NOTE Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) has a mechanical anti-reverse rotation device that is extremely noisy during coast down.B. Stop Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B).C. IF only one RCP remains running, THEN stop the remaining RCP within 2 minutes.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:41 of 79CHANGE: 044 10.6 Perform the following during RCP coast down:

10.6.1 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32A) stopped, THEN verify the following pumps remain on:

EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63A)

OR Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A)

Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81A) 10.6.2 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C) stopped, THEN verify the following pumps remain on:

EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63C)

OR Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80C)

Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81C) 10.6.3 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32D) stopped, THEN verify the following pumps remain on:

EITHER HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63D)

OR Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80D)

Backstop Lube Oil Pump (P-81D) 10.6.4 IF Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) stopped, THEN verify HP Oil Lift Pump (P-63B) remains on.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:42 of 79CHANGE: 044 10.7 Perform the following to check no reverse rotation when the shaft stops: IF desired OR due to RCP monitoring equipment failure, THEN verify Predictive Maintenance contacted to install backup indication of zero speed.

IF associated RCS loop flow is no longer dropping, THEN consider the shaft stopped.

Plant computer reverse rotation alarm remains clear.(not applicable for P-32B)

RCP P32-D REVERSE ROTATION (FS6513)

RCP P32-C REVERSE ROTATION (FS6512)

RCP P32-A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

NOTE Reverse rotation is indicated by the following:

Computer alarm based on reverse lube oil flow RCP high vibration RCP motor bearing high temperatureCRITICAL STEP 10.8 IF reverse rotation indicated, THEN perform the following:

10.8.1 Trip the reactor and perform immediate actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001).

10.8.2 Trip running RCP(s).

10.8.3 Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.XXX series).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:43 of 79CHANGE: 044 CAUTION Due to Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C) oil system re-design in 1R22, all four oil pumps (P-80C, P-63C, P-81C and P-82C) must be stopped within 25 minutes of Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32C) shaft stopping to prevent reaching thrust bearing high temperature alarm at 190 F.Reactor Coolant Pump (P-32B) oil system has lift oil pumps taking suction from the oil reservoir rather than the coolers thus heating up the oil (167 F alarm) after the pump shaft has stopped and must have oil pumps secured after the shaft has stopped (CR-ANO-1-2005-3096).

10.9 WHEN shaft has stopped, THEN stop all oil pumps for the idle RCP by placing handswitches in PULL-TO-LOCK. (Backstop Lube Oil Pump not applicable to P-32B)

Emergency HP Oil Lift Pump (P-80A thru D)

HP Oil Lift Pumps (P-63A thru D)

Backstop Lube Oil Pumps (P-81A, C, and D)

Backup Backstop Lube Oil Pumps (P-82A, C, and D)10.10 While RCS is >150°F, maintain seal injection flow and ICW flow to RCP Seal Cooling Water Heat Exchangers (E-25A thru D).

10.10.1 Maintain ICW flow to RCP Motor Air Coolers.

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41A1 and E-41A2)

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41B1 and E-41B2)

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41C1 and E-41C2)

RCP Motor Air Coolers (E-41D1 and E-41D2)

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.006PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:REACTOR COOLANT PUMP OPERATIONPAGE:44 of 79CHANGE: 04410.11 IF RCP stop at power, THEN perform the following:

10.11.1 Lower the ULD HI-Load Limit 5% below runback limit.

NOTE RCP breaker status (normal or tripped) feeds NSSS Index Point which is used in the heat balance power calculation.

10.11.2 Verify Plant Computer reflects current RCP breaker status:

ZS1H11 ZS1H12 ZS1H21 ZS1H22A. IF breaker status is incorrect, THEN contact Computer Support to update Plant Computer to match current breaker status.

NOTE The Temperature Compensated Total Flow (XWRCFT) and RC Pressure (P1021, P1023, P1038, P1039) alarm limits for the Plant Computer are dependent upon RCP combination. Normally Plant Computer alarm setpoints are operator adjustable, however, these points are some of the alarm points that are blocked that are carried on Tech Spec Cross-check log (OPS-A24). Refer to Unit 1 Operations Logs (1015.003A), Attachment C for these alarm limits.

10.11.3 Request Computer Support to adjust XWRCFT and RC pressure (4 points) alarms for current RCP status.

10.11.4 Continue plant operations per Power Operation (1102.004).

1203.031REACTOR COOLANT PUMP AND MOTOR EMERGENCYCHANGE026PAGE 34 of 41SECTION 6RCP REVERSE ROTATIONENTRY CONDITIONSAssociated RCS loop flow indicates lower than expectedPlant computer reverse rotation alarm on idle RCP. (not applicable for P-32B)

- RCP P32-A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

- RCP P32-C REVERSE ROTATION (FS6512)

- RCP P32-D REVERSE ROTATION (FS6513)RCP high vibrationRCP motor bearing high temperatureLoss of zero speed indication on idle RCP (Indicated by portable instrumentation).

1203.031REACTOR COOLANT PUMP AND MOTOR EMERGENCYCHANGE026PAGE 35 of 41SECTION 6RCP REVERSE ROTATIONINSTRUCTIONS1. Trip reactor AND perform immediate actions of Reactor Trip (1202.001).2. Trip running RCP(s).3. Refer to Emergency Operating Procedure (1202.XXX).

ENDREFERENCESCR-1-92-0341 Indications of Reverse RotationCR-1-96-0580 Zero Speed Indication Failure Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S5 Page 1 of 5JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #10Date: 8/4/2016 JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 (S5)System/Duty Area:Pressurizer Relief Tank/Quench Tank System (PRTS)Task:Transfer the PRT (quench tank) contentsJTA#ANO1-RO-PZR-NORM-15KA Value RO 2.9SRO 3.1KA Reference

007 A1.01Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location:Inside CROutside CR XBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate

):Plant Site:

Simulator:PerformLab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment:Plant SiteSimulatorLabTesting Method:PerformSimulateApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:

7MinutesReference(s): OP-1103.005 Rev. 4 5, PRESSURIZER OPERATION, Section 13.0Examinee's Name:

ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comment s:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time

  • SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) andis current with that revision.

Page 2 of 5JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:The plant is at steady state operations. (IC 281)The Clean Liquid Radwaste system is aligned to receive Quench Tank contents with the Vacuum Degasifierbypassed.TASK STANDARD:Quench Tank level lowered to ~5110 gallons without causing the low level alarm.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:OP-1103.005 Rev. 45, PRESSURIZER OPERATION, Section 13.0.Revision 8 Note: Updated for procedure revision.Revision 9 Note: Deleted high level condition to allow for a meaningful stopping point with possible failurecriteria. If the applicant does not stop the transfer and causes a low level alarm, then they have failed the JPM.

Page 3 of 5JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to transfer water from the Quench Tank to the clean liquid Radwaste system in accordance withOP-1103.005 starting at Step 13.5 to approximately 5110 gallons. The ATC will fill in and calculate the QT Fillrate log.(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER CUE

IF NEEDED,Acknowledge the applicant if he discusses the potential need to add N2 during the transfer. (Step 13.1)Inform applicant that the Clean Liquid Radwaste System alignment has been verified aligned to receive wastewater per OP-1104.020. (Step 13.2)Inform applicant that the vacuum degasifier is bypassed per OP-1104.016. (Step 13.4)13.5 Verify Vacuum Degasifier Outlet (HS-4614)in CWRTS position.POSITIVE CUE:HS-4614 is in CWRTS positionApplicant verified VacuumDegasifier Outlet (HS-4614) inCWRTS position.___________EXAMINER CUE
Inform applicant that the ATC will record stop data on theQuench TankFillrate Log (OPS-A11)13.6 Record Stop Data on Quench Tank Fill rateLog(OPS-A11)POSITIVE CUE:Data entered on OPS-A11.

N/A___________(C)13.7 Open both Quench Tank Outlet Isolations: Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053) Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON and Green light OFF for:Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)Applicant Opened both: Quench Tank T42Drain (CV-1053) Quench Tank T42Drain (CV-1052)___________(C)13.8 Place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump(P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to START.POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON, Green light OFF for P-44.Applicant starts P-44, QuenchTank T42 Transfer Pump.___________

Page 4 of 5JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER NOTE: Per the initial conditions sampling is not desired; Steps 13.9 is N/A. N2 overpressurehas been maintained, so gas sample is not required; Step 13.10 is N/A. Low Level Alarm Setpoint is <5071gallons.(C)13.11 WHEN either of the following criteria is met, Quench Tank volume is lowered todesired volume, >5100 gallons Quench Tank pressure drops to 1 psigTHEN place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump(P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to STOP.POSITIVE CUE:Red light OFF, Green light ON.Applicant stops P-44, QuenchTank T42 Transfer Pump.___________(C)13.12 Close the following valves: Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052) Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)POSITIVE CUE:Green light ON and Red light OFF for:Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)Applicant Closed both: Quench Tank T42Drain (CV-1052) Quench Tank T42Drain (CV-1053)___________EXAMINER NOTE

Inform applicant JPM is complete

.END Page 5 of 5JPM ID:ANO-1-JPM-RO-QT001INITIAL CONDITIONS:The plant is at steady state operations.The Clean Liquid Radwaste system is aligned to receiveQuench Tank contents with the Vacuum Degasifier bypassedper 1104.016, to approximately 5110 gallons.Chemistry sampling is not required.INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to transfer from the Quench Tank to theClean Liquid Radwaste system in accordance withOP-1103.005 starting at Step 13.5.The ATC will fill in and calculate the QT Fill rate log.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:24 of 61CHANGE: 04513.0 Transferring from Quench Tank to Clean Liquid Radwaste System CAUTION With a steam bubble in pressurizer, Quench Tank level is maintained between 4000 and 8300 gallons to provide sufficient quench cooling volume for pressurizer transients.

Lowering Quench Tank pressure to < 1 psig indicated can cause tank collapse.13.1 Add N 2 to Quench Tank as necessary per "Adding N 2 to the Quench Tank" section to maintain pressure 1 psig while lowering level.

13.2 Verify Clean Liquid Radwaste System aligned per "System Alignment Verification" section of Conduct of Operations (1015.001) to receive waste water.

13.3 IF desired to place Vacuum Degasifier into service, THEN perform the following:

13.3.1 Verify Vacuum Degasifier aligned per "System Alignment Verification" section of Conduct of Operations (1015.001).

13.3.2 Verify Vacuum Degasifier is in service per Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016) to pump to CWRTs.

13.3.3 Notify Control Room that vacuum degasifier is ready to receive liquid.

13.4 IF desired to bypass the Vacuum Degasifier, THEN verify Vacuum Degasifier bypassed per "Vacuum Degasifier Bypass Mode Operation" section of Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016).

13.5 Verify Vacuum Degasifier Outlet (HS-4614) in CWRTS position.

13.6 Record Stop Data on Quench Tank Fillrate Log (OPS-A11).

NOTE Quench tank low level alarm setpoint is 5071 gallons.

13.7 Open both Quench Tank Outlet Isolations:

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052) 13.8 Place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump (P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to START.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:25 of 61CHANGE: 045 13.9 IF Quench Tank liquid sampling is desired, THEN perform the following:

13.9.1 Notify Chemistry.

Chemistry ______________________________________

13.9.2 Open Quench Tank Trans Pump P-44 Disch Sample Vlv (SS-31).

13.9.3 WHEN sampling is complete, THEN close Quench Tank Trans Pump P-44 Disch Sample Vlv (SS-31).NOTE Quench Tank gas sample is typically performed if N 2 overpressure is not being maintained during normal operation. This is due to the potential for explosive mixtures in the gas space.13.10 IF Quench Tank N 2 overpressure is NOT being maintained during normal operation, THEN perform Quench Tank gas sampling as follows:

13.10.1 Open the following valves:

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1845)

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1054) 13.10.2 Align H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel to sample the Quench Tank per Hydrogen-Oxygen Analyzer System (1104.010).A. IF H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel (C119) is desired, THEN align H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel (C119) to sample the Quench Tank.B. IF H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel (C119A) is desired, THEN perform the following:1. Open Quench Tank to Sample Isolation (SS-578).2. Select H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel (C119A) to sample HEADER.13.10.3 WHEN sampling is complete, THEN perform the following:A. Align H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel C119 or C119A as desired per Hydrogen-Oxygen Analyzer System (1104.010).1. IF H 2/O 2 Analyzer Panel (C119A) was selected, THEN close Quench Tank to Sample Isolation (SS-578).B. Close the following valves:

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1845)

Quench Tank T42 Sample (CV-1054)

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1103.005PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:PRESSURIZER OPERATIONPAGE:26 of 61CHANGE: 045 NOTE Quench tank low level alarm setpoint is 5071 gallons.13.11 WHEN either of the following criterion is met, Quench Tank volume is lowered to desired volume, > 5100 gallons Quench Tank pressure drops to 1 psig THEN place Quench Tank T42 Transfer Pump (P-44) handswitch (HS-1051) to STOP.13.12 Close the following valves:

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1052)

Quench Tank T42 Drain (CV-1053)13.13 Record Start Data on Quench Tank Fillrate Log OPS-A11.13.14 IF Vacuum Degasifier is in-service for degasification, THEN secure per "Securing Vacuum Degasifier" section of Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016).13.15 Calculate Quench Tank fill rate using Quench Tank Fillrate Log OPS-A11.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S6 Page 1 of 9JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #2Date: 8/4/2016 JPM IDA1JPM-RO-ED032 (S6)System/Duty Area:ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTIONTask:Perform Transferring Buses From Unit Aux Transformer to a Startup TransformerJTA#ANO1-RO-ELECD-NORM-27KA Value RO 3.1SRO 3.1KA Reference 062A4.07Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location: Inside CR:

XOutside CR:Both:Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate):Plant Site:Simulator:PerformLab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment: Simulator

Plant Site:LabTesting Method: Simulate:Perform:Approximate Completion Time In Minutes:

1 0MinutesReference(s): OP-1107.001, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONS, Rev. 110Examinee's Name:

ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time

  • Signed:Date:*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) and iscurrent with that revision.

Page 2 of 9JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ED009THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Plant is <50% power during a shutdown in preparation for 1R26.TASK STANDARD:All 4160 kV and 6900 kV buses powered from SU 1 Transformer only.This is an Alternate Success Path JPM.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:OP-1107.001, ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATION Step 8.0.SIMULATOR SETUP:Recall an IC with power <50%. (IC 281)

Page 3 of 9JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ED032INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS directs you to transfer plant auxiliaries per step 8.0 of OP-1107.001, ELECTRICAL SYSTEMOPERATIONS.

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER NOTE: Acknowledge applicant's understanding of elevated risk and if questioned, insist that theycontinue.EXAMINER CUE: If asked, inform the applicant that the Auto Transformer is powered from a 500 Kv sourceand the SU1 Automatic Voltage Regulator is In-service.8.1 Perform the following:8.1.1 Check SU1Transformer is consideredoperable.8.1.2 IF time permits, THEN establish flashprotection boundary at affected breakers.POSITIVE CUE: SU1 is >22 Kv and B0125 to SU1 is closed.Flash boundary established.From Initial Conditions,Applicant given that SU1 isoperable and flash boundaryestablished.___________EXAMINER NOTE

CAUTION-High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if bothfeeder breakersremain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allowhigh circulating currents to develop.

Page 4 of 9 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A C C C8.2 IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux toSU1, THEN perform the following:8.2.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A1 (A-113) NOT in Local.8.2.2 Place A-113 Synchronize switch toON.8.2.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.8.2.4 Close A-113 AND allow controlswitch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.8.2.5 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to OFF.8.2.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A1(A-112) open.A. IF A-112 is NOT open, THEN trip A-112.1. IF A-112 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-113.2. Initiate Condition Report8.2.7 IF A-112 opened automatically, THENplace A-112 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.POSITIVE CUE:Amber LOCAL light OFF for A-113.Synchroscope at 12 o'clock.Red light ON, Green light OFF for A-113.Green light ON, Red light OFF for A-112.A-112 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.Applicant transferred A1 fromUnit Aux to SU1.___________

Page 5 of 9JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ED032 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A C C C8.3 IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux toSU1, THEN perform the following:8.3.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A2 (A-213) NOT in Local.8.3.2 Place A-213 Synchronize switch toON.8.3.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.8.3.4 Close A-213 AND allow controlswitch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.8.3.5 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to OFF.8.3.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A2(A-212) open.A. IF A-212 is NOT open, THEN trip A-212.1. IF A-212 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-213.2. Initiate Condition Report8.3.7 IF A-212 opened automatically, THENplace A-212 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.POSITIVE CUE:Amber LOCAL light OFF for A-213.Synchroscope at 12 o'clock.Red light ON, Green light OFF for A-213.Green light ON, Red light OFF for A-212.A-212 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.Applicant transferred A2 fromUnit Aux to SU1.___________

Page 6 of 9JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ED032 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER NOTE: During the transfer of the H1 bus H-14 will not open automatically but will open manuallywhen the applicant takes the HS to NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS HERE C C C C8.4 IF desired to transfer H1 from Unit Aux toSU1, THEN perform the following:8.4.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H1 (H-15) NOT in Local.8.4.2 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to ON.8.4.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.8.4.4 Close H-15 AND allow control switchto return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSEposition.8.4.5 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to OFF.8.4.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H1(H-14) open.A. IF H-14 is NOT open, THEN trip H-14.1. IF H-14 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-15.2. Initiate Condition Report8.4.7 IF H-14 opened automatically, THENplace H-14 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.POSITIVE CUE:Amber LOCAL light OFF for H-15.Synchroscope at 12 o'clock.Red light ON, Green light OFF for H-15.Green light ON, Red light OFF for H-14.H-14 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.Condition Report will be written by anothercrew member.Applicant transferred H1 fromUnit Aux to SU1 ANDRecognized the need tomanually open H-14.___________EXAMINER CUE: Inform applicant that another crew member will write the condition report.ALTERNATE PATHENDS HERE Page 7 of 9JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ED032 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A C C C8.5 IF desired to transfer H2 from Unit Aux toSU1, THEN perform the following:8.5.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H2 (H-25) NOT in Local.8.5.2 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to ON.8.5.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.8.5.4 Close H-25 AND allow control switchto return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSEposition.8.5.5 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to OFF.8.5.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H2(H-24) open.A. IF H-24 is NOT open, THEN trip H-24.1. IF H-24 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-25.2. Initiate Condition Report8.5.7 IF H-24 opened automatically, THENplace H-24 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.POSITIVE CUE:Amber LOCAL light OFF for H-25.Synchroscope at 12 o'clock.Red light ON, Green light OFF for H-25.Green light ON, Red light OFF for H-24.H-24 handswitch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.Applicant transferred H2 fromUnit Aux to SU1.___________

Page 8 of 9 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A8.6 Check the following bus voltages: 4160v buses greater than 3640v (C10). 6900v buses greater than 6010v (C10) 480v buses between 460v and 500v(SPDS E1B5/E1B6)POSITIVE CUE:4160v buses greater than 3640v (C10).6900v buses greater than 6010v (C10).480v buses between 460v and 500v (SPDSE1B5/E1B6).Applicant verified propervoltages on C10 and SPDS asappropriate.___________END Page 9 of 9JPM NUMBER:A1JPM-RO-ED032INITIAL CONDITIONS:Plant is <50% power during a shutdown in preparationfor 1R26.S/U #1 has been verified operable.Flash protection boundary has been established ataffected breakers.INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS directs you to transfer plant auxiliaries perstep 8.0 of OP-1107.001.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1107.001PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONSPAGE:20 of 392CHANGE: 110 NOTE Supplying ANO-1 from an off-site source (SU#1 and/or SU#2) will raise the risk of a grid-initiated offsite source feeder undervoltage relay actuation which will trip the offsite feeder breaker(s) to A and H buses and initiate auto-transfer of these buses to the selected offsite source (Refer to CR-ANO-2-2014-0707).8.0 Transferring Buses from Unit Aux to SU1 8.1 Perform the following:

8.1.1 Check SU1 Transformer is considered operable.

8.1.2 IF time permits, THEN establish flash protection boundary at affected breakers.{4.3.4}CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.2 IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.2.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A1 (A-113) NOT in Local.

8.2.2 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.2.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.2.4 Close A-113 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.2.5 Place A-113 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.2.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A1 (A-112) open.CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}A. IF A-112 is NOT open, THEN trip A-112.1. IF A-112 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-113.2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.2.7 IF A-112 opened automatically, THEN place A-112 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1107.001PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONSPAGE:21 of 392CHANGE: 110{4.3.4}CAUTION High cir culating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.3 IF desired to transfer A2 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.3.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A2 (A-213) NOT in Local.

8.3.2 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.3.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.3.4 Close A-213 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.3.5 Place A-213 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.3.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A2 (A-212) open.CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}A. IF A-212 is NOT open, THEN trip A-212.1. IF A-212 will NOT trip, THEN trip A-213.2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.3.7 IF A-212 opened automatically, THEN place A-212 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1107.001PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONSPAGE:22 of 392CHANGE: 110{4.3.4}CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.4 IF desired to transfer H1 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.4.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H1 (H-15) NOT in Local.

8.4.2 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.4.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.4.4 Close H-15 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.4.5 Place H-15 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.4.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H1 (H-14) open.CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}A. IF H-14 is NOT open, THEN trip H-14.1. IF H-14 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-15.2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.4.7 IF H-14 opened automatically, THEN place H-14 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1107.001PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ELECTRICAL SYSTEM OPERATIONSPAGE:23 of 392CHANGE: 110{4.3.4}CAUTION High circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remain closed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remain closed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.5 IF desired to transfer H2 from Unit Aux to SU1, THEN perform the following:

8.5.1 Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H2 (H-25) NOT in Local.

8.5.2 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.5.3 Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.5.4 Close H-25 AND allow control switch to return to NORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.5.5 Place H-25 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.5.6 Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H2 (H-24) open.CRITICAL STEP

{4.3.4}A. IF H-24 is NOT open, THEN trip H-24.1. IF H-24 will NOT trip, THEN trip H-25.2. Initiate Condition Report.

8.5.7 IF H-24 opened automatically, THEN place H-24 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

8.6 Check the following bus voltages:

4160V buses greater than 3640V (C10) 6900V buses greater than 6010V (C10) 480V buses between 460V and 500V (SPDS E1B5/E1B6) 8.6.1 IF necessary, THEN adjust per "Startup Transformer Voltage Regulator Operation" section of this procedure.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S7 Page 1 of 8JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUNIT: ______

1_______ REV # ______

6________DATE: ___8/4/2016____________________JPM NUMBER:_A1JPM-RO-RPS02 (S7)

______________SYSTEM/DUTY AREA:_REACTOR PROTECTION SYSTEM

________________________________________TASK:_REMOVE A CHANNEL OF RPS FROM MANUAL BYPASS___________________________________

JTA#:_ANO1-RO-RPS-NORM-6

__________________KA VALUE RO:___3.6____ SRO:__3.6_____ KA

REFERENCE:

__012 A4.03_________________APPROVED FOR ADMINISTRATION TO: RO:____

X___ SRO:___

X ___TASK LOCATION: INSIDE CR:____

X____ OUTSIDE CR:_________ BOTH:________SUGGESTED TESTING ENVIRONMENT AND METHOD (PERFORM OR SIMULATE):PLANT SITE:_______________ SIMULATOR:___PERFORM_______ LAB:__________________POSITION EVALUATED: RO:__________SRO:___________ACTUAL TESTING ENVIRONMENT: SIMULATOR:__________ PLANT SITE:__________ LAB:________TESTING METHOD: SIMULATE:_________ PERFORM:___________APPROXIMATE COMPLETION TIME IN MINUTES:___ 10 MINUTES

______________________________REFERENCE(S):__1105.001 REV. 28

______________________________________

______________________________________________________________________EXAMINEE'S NAME:________________________________ Logon ID _______________________EVALUATOR'S NAME:__________________________________________________________________THE EXAMINEE'S PERFORMANCE WAS EVALUATED AGAINST THE STANDARDSCONTAINED IN THIS JPM AND IS DETERMINED TO BE:SATISFACTORY:________________UNSATISFACTORY:_________________PERFORMANCE CHECKLIST COMMENTS:

___________________________________________________________________________________

___________________________________________________________________________________

_______________________________________________________________________________________________ Start Time____________ Stop Time____________ Total TimeSIGNED ________________________________ DATE: _______________________SIGNATURE INDICATES THIS JPM HAS BEEN COMPARED TO ITS APPLICABLE PROCEDURE BY AQUALIFIED INDIVIDUAL (NOT THE EXAMINEE) AND IS CURRENT WITH THAT REVISION.

Page 2 of 8JPM NUMBER:_ANO-1-JPM-RO-RPS02_THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing SheetEN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:The plant is operating at 100% power with ICS in automatic. The "A" RPS channel is in manual bypassfor maintenance. The maintenance has been completed.TASK STANDARD:The "A" RPS channel is removed from manual bypass without tripping channel during JPM.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:Manual bypass key, OP-105.001 Rev. 28, Sections 8.0 and 11.0SIMULATOR SETUP: power operations, place "A" RPS in manual bypass, select SASS NeutronFlux selector to the "Y" position. (IC 278)

Page 3 of 8JPM NUMBER:_A1JPM-RO-RPS02_INITIATING CUE:The SM/CRS directs you to remove the "A" RPS channel from manual bypass.CRITICAL ELEMENTS (C):__3__(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/ANOTE: due to the uniqueness of the design in the simulator, all channel indications are locatedon/in one RPS cabinet.11.1. Verify channel to beremoved from Manual Bypass isreset in accordance with "ResettingRPS Channels After Channel Trip"section of this procedure.Transitions to Section 8.0 toReset the channel.

____________ 8.2 Reset "A" RPS Channel asfollows:N/A - No actions taken

____________ 8.2.1 Verified all test modules are inOPERATE with the On Test lampson DIM.POSITIVE CUE:All test modules in OPERATE andOn Test lamps are dim.(All 7 modules)Verified all test modules inChannel A RPS are in theOPERATE position and all the ONTest lamps are DIMSource Range Test (2-1)Contact Monitor Test (3-1)Flow Test (4-1)Wide Range Temperature Test (5-5)Power Range Test (6-1)Pressure Test (3-5)Temperature Test (4-6)

____________(C)8.2.2 IF any bistables have OutputState and/or Output Memory lampson BRIGHT, THEN perform thefollowing for those bistables:-Place Output State toggle switch inreset and release.-Place Output Memory toggle switchin reset and release.POSITIVE CUE:Output State and Output Memorylamps are reset to dim.(Both bistables / Both lights)Reset any bistables with aBRIGHT Output State or OutputMemory lamp and verified thelamp went dim.High Flux (7-4)Power/Imbalance/Flow (4-4)

____________

Page 4 of 8JPM NUMBER:_A1JPM-RO-RPS02_(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A 8.2.3 Check Building Pressurecontact buffer is reset indicated bythe following lamps OFF:-BLDG. High Press Trip Input Statelamp- BLDG. High Press Trip ResetInput State lampPOSITIVE CUE:Both Building Pressure contactbuffer Input State lamps are off.Checked BLDG High Press TripState and BLDG High Press TripReset Input State lamps are OFF.

____________(C)8.2.4 Place Reactor Trip ModuleSubsystem Trip toggle switch inreset and release to reset ChannelA Reactor Trip Module.POSITIVE CUE:"A" Channel Reactor Trip Moduleis reset.Reset Reactor Trip ModuleSubsystem Trip by placing toggleswitch in the reset position.

____________ 8.2.5 Check Subsystem No. 1lamps on dim for the following:-Channel A Reactor Trip module-Channel A Cabinet IndicatingPanels-Channel B Reactor Trip module-Channel B Cabinet IndicatingPanels-Channel C Reactor Trip module-Channel C Cabinet IndicatingPanels-Channel D Reactor Trip module-Channel D Cabinet IndicatingPanelsPOSITIVE CUE:Subsystem No. 1 lamps for allfour channels are all on dim.Checked Subsystem No 1 reset inCabinet A by checking theReactor Trip module and CabinetIndicating Panel and is cued thatCabinets B, C, and D matchChannel A.

____________EXAMINER CUE: Inform applicant that the other three cabinets have the same indications as "A" with theexception of the Reactor Trip Module being in bypass.

Page 5 of 8JPM NUMBER:_A1JPM-RO-RPS02_(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A (C)11.2. Turn Manual Bypass keyswitch on RX Trip module outof bypass position (rotate keyswitch counter-clockwise).POSITIVE CUE:Keyswitch is rotated counter-clockwiseOn the Reactor Trip Module in "A"RPS, turned keyswitch counter-clockwise out of bypass position.

____________11.3. Remove Manual Bypass keyfrom Rx Trip module ANDcheck the following:POSITIVE CUE:Key removed from Rx Tripmodule.Removed the Manual Bypass keyfrom the Channel A RPS Rx Tripmodule.____________11.3.1 Manual Bypass lamps on RxTrip module AND indicatingpanel on dim.POSITIVE CUE:Manual Bypass lamps are on dim.Checked the Manual Bypasslamps on Rx Trip module andindicating panel are on dim.

____________11.3.2Annunciator RPSCHANNEL BYPASSED(K08-D3) clear.POSITIVE CUE:K08-D3 alarm clear.Checked K08-D3 clear.

____________11.3.3Associated EFIC ChannelMaintenance Bypass light onsolid.POSITIVE CUE:EFIC Maintenance Bypass lampsare on solid.Checked EFIC Channel "A"Maintenance Bypass light onsolid.____________

Page 6 of 8JPM NUMBER:_A1JPM-RO-RPS02_ (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A11.4. Return Manual Bypass keyto the Shift ManagerPOSITIVE CUE:Key has been returned to theShift Manager.Returned key to the ShiftManager.____________EXAMINER NOTE: Verify applicant performing S8 is clear of the area before proceeding to next step.11.5. Return SASS Neutron Fluxselector switch on C03 to"SASS Enable" as follows:POSITIVE CUE:None - no action should occuruntil the following are verified.N/A - No actions taken

____________11.5.1 Compare Plant Computerpoint N1I56HI to N1I78HI.POSITIVE CUE:N1I56HI to N1I78HI have beenchecked.Compared N1I56HI to N1I78HIusing the Plant Computerindication. (May use the remotedisplay or Plant Computerterminal)____________ 11.5.2 If the difference between thecompared values is >1%,THEN place the followingstations in manual -.POSITIVE CUE:The difference is <1%.Determined the differencebetween N1I56HI to N1I78HI is

<1%.____________11.5.3 Place SASS Neutron Fluxselector switch (HS-509) in the"SASS Enable" position.POSITIVE CUE:Neutron Flux selector switch is inSASS Enable position.On C03, the SASS Neutron Fluxswitch (HS-509) is placed in theSASS Enable position.

____________

Page 7 of 8JPM NUMBER:_A1JPM-RO-RPS02_ (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UNSAT N/A11.5.4 If ICS H/A stations wereplaced in manual ...POSITIVE CUE:No ICS stations were placed inmanual.N/A - No ICS stations were placedin manual.

____________END Page 8 of 8INITIAL CONDITIONS:Plant is at 100% PowerINITIATING CUE:The plant is operating at 100% power with ICS in automatic.The "A" RPS channel is in manual bypass for maintenance.The maintenance has been completed.The SM/CRS directs you to remove Channel A RPS fromManual Bypass in accordance with OP-1105.001, NI & RPSOperating Procedure, Section 11.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.001PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:NI & RPS OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:17 of 50CHANGE: 02811.0 Removing a RPS Channel From Manual Bypass 11.1 Verify channel to be removed from Manual Bypass is reset in accordance with "Resetting RPS Channels After Channel Trip" section of this procedure.

11.2 Turn Manual Bypass key switch on RX Trip module out of bypass position (rotate key switch counter-clockwise).

11.3 Remove Manual Bypass key from Rx Trip module AND check the following:

11.3.1 Manual Bypass lamps on Rx Trip module AND indicating panel on dim.11.3.2 Annunciator RPS CHANNEL BYPASSED (K08-D3) clear.

11.3.3 Associated EFIC channel Maintenance Bypass light on solid.

11.4 Return Manual Bypass key to the Shift Manager.

11.5 Return SASS Neutron Flux selector switch on C03 to "SASS Enable" as follows: 11.5.1 Compare Plant Computer point N1I56HI to N1I78HI.A. IF Plant Computer is NOT available, THEN compare the highest of NI-5 and NI-6 to the highest of NI-7 and NI-8 on C03.

11.5.2 IF the difference between the compared values is >1%, THEN place the following stations in manual per "Transferring Major ICS Control Stations to HAND" or "Transferring Individual Stations to Manual Control" section of Integrated Control System (1105.004):

Diamond Panel Rx Demand H/A station 11.5.3 Place SASS Neutron Flux selector switch (HS-509) in the "SASS Enable" position.

11.5.4 IF ICS H/A stations were placed in manual for this step, THEN stations may be returned to auto per "Transferring Major ICS Control Stations to Auto" or "Transferring Individual Stations to Automatic" section of ICS Operating Procedure (1105.004).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1105.001PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:NI & RPS OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:10 of 50CHANGE: 0288.0 Resetting RPS Channels After Channel Trip 8.1 IF RPS channels are being reset following a Reactor Trip, THEN ensure Reactor Protection System data has been recorded in Post Transient Review (1015.037) Attachment J "Unit One Post Transient Data Summary" prior to reset of any RPS components.

8.2 Reset "A" RPS channel as follows:

8.2.1 Check all Test modules are in OPERATE with the On Test lamps on DIM.

8.2.2 IF any bistables have Output State and/or Output Memory lamps on BRIGHT, THEN perform the following for those bistables:

Place Output State toggle switch in reset and release.

Place Output Memory toggle switch in reset and release.

8.2.3 Check Building Pressure contact buffer reset indicated by the following lamps OFF:

BLDG. High Press Trip Input State lamp BLDG. High Press Trip Reset Input State lamp 8.2.4 Place Reactor Trip Module Subsystem Trip toggle switch in reset and release to reset Channel "A" Reactor Trip Module.

8.2.5 Check Subsystem No. 1 lamps on DIM for the following:

Channel "A" Reactor Trip module Channel "A" Cabinet Indicating Panel Channel "B" Reactor Trip module Channel "B" Cabinet Indicating Panel Channel "C" Reactor Trip module Channel "C" Cabinet Indicating Panel Channel "D" Reactor Trip module Channel "D" Cabinet Indicating Panel Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam Simulator JPM S8 Page 1 of 6JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #11Date:8/4/2016 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ICW02 (S8)System/Duty Area:Intermediate Cooling WaterTask:Perform Switching of ICW Pumps (P-33A/B/C)

JTA#ANO1-RO-ICW-NORM-27KA Value RO 3.3SRO 3.1 KA

Reference:

008 A4.01Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location: Inside CR XOutside CRBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):Plant Site:Simulator:Perform Lab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment: Plant SiteSimulator X LabTesting Method: PerformSimulateApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:7 MinutesReference(s): 1104.028 ICW System Operating Procedure, (Rev 38) Section 10.1.Examinee's Name:Logon ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be: Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time*SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee)and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ICW02THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state conditions. (IC 278) The IAO reports that P-33A has high vibrations and is making an unusual noise. P-33A and P-33C ICW Pumps are presently in service. P-33B ICW pump has NOT been drained.TASK STANDARD: P-33B ICW Pump supplying Non-Nuclear ICW, ICW Pump P-33A is secured.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS: 1104.028 Section 10.1, Placing Standby ICW Pump Into Service (P-33A, B or C).SUGGESTED SIMULATOR SETUP: IC2 with P-33A and P-33C ICW Pumps in service, P-33B in standby.

Page 3 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ICW02INITIATING CUE: The CRS/SM directs you to start P-33B ICW Pump and then secure P-33A ICW Pump using1104.028 Section 10.0 starting at Step 10.1.3.

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARD N/A SAT UNSA T10.1 IF desired to start P-33B ANDsecure P-33A, AND P-33Aand P-33C are running, THENperform the following:

N/AEXAMINER NOTE: Step 10.1.1 will be N/A since P-33B has NOT been drained.

C10.1.3 Open P-33A/B SuctionCross-connect (CV-2240).POSITIVE CUE:CV-2240 red light ON, greenlight OFF.NEGATIVE CUE:CV-2240 green light ON, redlight OFF.Opened P-33A/B Suction Cross-connect (CV-2240) on panel C09._______________C10.1.4 Open P-33A/B DischargeCross-connect (CV-2238).POSITIVE CUE:CV-2238 red light ON, greenlight OFF.NEGATIVE CUE:CV-2238 green light ON, redlight OFF.Opened P-33A/B DischargeCross-connect (CV-2238) onpanel C09._______________

Page 4 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ICW02 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARD N/A SAT UNSA T10.1.5 Vent P-33B as necessary byopening ICW Pump Vent(ICW-1191)A. Close ICW Pump P-33B Vent(ICW-1191).EXAMINER CUE:IAO reports that the B ICWPump has been vented andICW-1191 is closed.Directed Outside operator to ventP-33B and then close ICW-1191._______________EXAMINER CUE: Inform Examinee that the B ICW pump has been vented; ICW-1191 is closed.

C10.1.6 Start ICW Pump P-33B.A. IF CRD cooling pumpsindicate air binding (i.e.lowering pump dischargepressure, flow oscillations orstandby pump start), THENperform "Venting CRDCooling SystemComponents", exhibit of thisprocedure.POSITIVE CUE:Red light ON, green light OFFfor P-33B.NEGATIVE CUE:Green light ON, red light OFF forP-33B.Started ICW Pump P-33B usinghandswitch on panel C09._______________EXAMINER CUE: If asked, the CRD cooling pumps do not indicate air binding locally.

Page 5 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ICW02 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARD N/A SAT UNSA TEXAMINER CUE: After P-33B has been started, inform Examinee that three minutes have elapsed (timecompression).

C10.1.7 WHEN P-33B has run atleast 3 minutes, THEN stopP-33A.POSITIVE CUE:Green light ON, red light OFFfor P-33A.NEGATIVE CUE:Red light ON, green light OFFfor P-33A.Waited ~3 minutes and thenplaced the handswitch for ICWPump P-33A in the trip/stopposition._______________10.1.8 On C09, check flow isnormal (~2000 gpm) onICW Coolers Inlet FlowNon-Nuc (FI-2218).POSITIVE CUE:Flow is ~2400 gpm on FI-2218.Checked normal ICW flow on FI-2218 on C09 for the Non-Nuclearloop._______________10.1.9 IF desired, THEN stationoperator to monitor ICWSurge Tanks for overflow.EXAMINER CUE:OAO reports that the ICWSurge Tanks are notoverflowing.Checked with OAO to verify statusof T-37A/B overflow._______________EXAMINER CUE: If asked, report as OAO that the ICW Surge Tanks are NOT overflowing.Inform the examinee that the JPM is complete.END Page 6 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-ICW02INITIAL CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 100% power steady state conditions.The IAO reports that P-33A has high vibrations and ismaking an unusual noise.P-33A and P-33C ICW Pumps are presently in service.P-33B ICW pump has NOT been drained.T-37A and T-37B have been cross-connected by the OAO.P-33B has been verified ready to start and the IAO isstanding clear.INITIATING CUE:The CRS/SM directs you to start P-33B ICW pump and thensecure P-33A ICW pump using 1104.028 Section 10.0 starting atStep 10.1.3.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.028PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ICW SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:42 of 163CHANGE: 03810.0 Placing Standby ICW Pump Into Service (P-33A, B, or C)

CAUTION When switching ICW Pump alignment, running both pumps in parallel for 3 minutes reduces the possibility of trapped air causing a system transient.

NOTE Stopping an ICW pump can cause CRD SUPPLY FILTER P HI (K08-D1) and RCP MOTOR COOLING FLOW LO (K08-E6).

The Non-Nuclear loop normally has a higher activity level than Nuclear loop. If both loops are crossconnected via the ICW Surge Tank drain line, Non-Nuclear loop process monitor activity will lower and Nuclear loop process monitor activity will rise, possibly to the alarm setpoint.

10.1 IF desired to start P-33B AND secure P-33A, AND P-33A and P-33C are running, THEN perform the following:

CAUTION During filling of P-33A ICW pump following maintenance, air entrained in the ICW system following venting was carried throughout the system resulting in air binding of ICW components. CR-ANO-1-2006-00612 Restoration of an ICW pump following maintenance with ONLY one train of CRD cooling available should be evaluated prior to starting. Air entrained in the ICW pump discharge can degrade CRD cooling flow.

Leakage between ICW loops can foul CRD Filters. When there is leakage between loops, raise monitoring of CRD Pre-filters (F-61A & B) and CRD Cooling Water Filters (F-20A & B).

Opening the ICW pump discharge cross-connect valve(s) prior to opening the suction cross-connect valve(s) can result in overflowing the Nuclear ICW Surge Tank due to pressure differences in the ICW loops.

10.1.1 IF ICW Pump P-33B has been drained, THEN perform the following:A. Verify the following valves closed:

ICW Pump P-33B Disch Isol (ICW-3B)

ICW Pump P-33B Suct Isol (ICW-1B)

ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191)

ICW Pump P-33B Disch Line Drain (ICW-1177A)

ICW Pump P-33B Suct Line Drain (ICW-1177B)B. Periodically monitor ICW expansion tank level during refill.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.028PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ICW SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:43 of 163CHANGE: 038C. Slowly open ICW Pump P-33B Suct Isol (ICW-1B).D. Throttle open ICW Pump P-33B Disch Line Drain (ICW-1177A).E. WHEN air is vented, THEN close ICW Pump P-33B Disch Line Drain (ICW-1177A).F. Open ICW Pump P-33B Disch Isol (ICW-3B).G. Vent all of the CRD Cooling system components per "Venting CRD Cooling System Components", exhibit of this procedure.

10.1.2 IF it is desired to cross-connect ICW Surge Tk T-37A and T-37B via bottom drain line, THEN perform the following:A. Install plug on the ICW surge tanks drain line.B. Open ICW Surge Tk T-37A Drn to Aux Bldg (ICW-130A).C. Open ICW Surge Tk T-37B Drn to Aux Bldg (ICW-130B).

10.1.3 Open P-33A/B Suction Crossconnect (CV-2240).

10.1.4 Open P-33A/B Discharge Crossconnect (CV-2238).

10.1.5 Vent P-33B as necessary by opening ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191).A. Close ICW Pump P-33B Vent (ICW-1191).

10.1.6 Start P-33B.A. IF CRD cooling pumps indicate air binding (i.e. lowering pump discharge pressure, flow oscillations or standby pump start), THEN perform "Venting CRD Cooling System Components", exhibit of this procedure.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.028PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:ICW SYSTEM OPERATING PROCEDUREPAGE:44 of 163CHANGE: 038 NOTE Pressure and flow instabilities from stopping P-33A in the next step can cause a CRD cooling pump (P-79A/B) to auto-start.

10.1.7 WHEN P-33B has run at least 3 minutes, THEN stop P-33A.

NOTE ICW pumps are rated for a maximum 2500 gpm flow.

Max indicated ICW Cooler Inlet Flow (FI-2219, FI-2218) is 2500 gpm.

10.1.8 On C09, check flow is normal (~2000 gpm) on ICW Coolers Inlet Flow Non-Nuc (FI-2218).

10.1.9 IF desired, THEN station operator to monitor ICW Surge Tanks for overflow.

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam In-plant JPM P1 Page 1 of 6JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #3Date:7/29/16 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-GEN02 (P1)System/Duty Area:Turbine Generator Gas SystemTask:Purging Hydrogen with C0 2 During Emergency Conditions (Station Blackout)

JTA#ANO1-RO-EOP-EMERG-36 and ANO1-SRO-EOP-EMERG-37KA Value RO 3.5SRO 3.9 KA Reference 055 EA1.04Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location: Inside CR:Outside CR:

XBoth:Suggested Testing Environment And Method (Perform or Simulate ):Plant Site:Simulate Simulator:

Lab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment: Simulator :Plant Site:

X Lab:Testing Method: Simulate:

XPerform:_______Alternate Path:

XApproximate Completion Time In Minutes:

15 MinutesReference(s): 1106.002 Generator Hydrogen SystemExaminee's Name:Logon ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be: Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time*SignedDate:*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee)and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-GEN02THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination BriefingSheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:A station blackout is in progress and it is necessary to reduce loads on the station batteries.To accomplish this, it is necessary to purge the hydrogen from the generator with C02 to securethe Seal Oil System DC pump.TASK STANDARD:Main generator was purged with 15 bottles of C02. Generator pressure is ~zero.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:1106.002 Generator Hydrogen System, Section 15.0 Purging Hydrogen with C02 During EmergencyConditions.This is an alternate path JPM Page 3 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-GEN02INITIATING CUE: The SM/CRS directs you to purge the Main Generator with 15 bottles of C02 per 1106.002Section 15.0.

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/ATRANSITION NOTE: The examinee should proceed to the Isophase bus deck on 354' elevation of theturbine building.EXAMINER NOTE: During a Blackout, generator pressure may be read on the following: Gen H 2 Cond Mon Press (PI-9003), located beside the Generator Condition Monitor (AI-9002). Main Generator Pressure (PI-8370), located inside upper door of H 2 Control Panel (M-27). Gen H 2/Fan Press on front of H 2 Control Panel (M-27).15.1.1. Verify H 2 Supply to Top of Generator valveis closed.POSITIVE CUE:

H 2-132 is closed.Operator verified H 2 Supplyto Top of Generator valve (H 2-132) is closed.________ ____C15.1.2. Open H2 Vent, Lead Box valve H 2-113.POSITIVE CUE:

H 2-113 is open.NEGATIVE CUE:

H 2 pressure is NOT lowering on any workingpressure indicator.Operator opened H 2 Vent,Lead Box valve H 2-113.________ ____C15.1.3. Open H2 Vent from Top of Generatorvalve, H 2-112.POSITIVE CUE:

H 2-112 is open. Generator pressure islowering. (PI-9002A = 0 psig)NEGATIVE CUE:

H 2 pressure is NOT lowering on any workingpressure indicator.Operator opened H 2 Ventfrom Top of Generator valve H 2-112.________ ____EXAMIN ERNOTE: To facilitate the next step inform the examinee that generator pressure is 0 psig whenthe examinee checks generator pressure.

Page 4 of 6 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/A C15.2. When generator pressure lowers to ~0psig, close H 2-113.POSITIVE CUE:

H 2-113 is closed.When generator pressure isgiven as ~0 psig, operatorclosed H 2-113.____________C15.3.1. Open CO 2 Supply Isolation to Unit 1Generator on Isophase Bus Deck (CO 2-66).POSITIVE CUE:

CO 2-66 is open.Opened CO 2 Supply Isolationto Unit 1 Generator onIsophase Bus Deck (CO 2-66).____________TRANSITION NOTE: The examinee should proceed to the generator gas house.

C15.3.2. Open PCV-8303 Inlet Isolation valve (CO 2-8311).POSITIVE CUE:

CO 2-8311 is open.Opened PCV-8303 InletIsolation valve (CO 2-8311).____________15.3.3. Verify 15 CO 2 manifold valves open.POSITIVE CUE:

15 CO 2 manifold valves are open.Verified 15 CO 2 manifoldvalves are open.____________C15.3.4. Open the 15 CO 2 Bottle Isolation Valvesassociated with the open CO 2 manifold valves.POSITIVE CUE:

15 C0 2 bottle isolation valves are open.Opened 15 CO 2 BottleIsolation Valves associatedwith the open CO 2 manifoldvalves.____________15.3.5. Adjust CO 2 Supply Pressure Regulator(PCV-8303) clockwise NOT to exceed 80 psig.Do not allow generator pressure to exceed 3psig.POSITIVE CUE:

CO 2 outlet pressure increased from 0 to ~75psig. Generator pressure is ~1 psig.NEGATIVE CUE:

CO 2 outlet pressure is 0 psig.Adjusted CO 2 SupplyPressure Regulator (PCV-8303) clockwise and did NOTexceed 80 psig. Did not allowgenerator pressure to exceed3 psig.(Must call the control room forgenerator pressure)____________

Page 5 of 6 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER CUE: When the above steps have been accomplished inform examinee that flow noise hasstopped, header pressure is 1500 psig, and PCV-8303 is frosted over.ALTERNATE PATH STARTS HERE C15.3.6. Open CO2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303Bypass (CO2-8303-3) as needed to continuepurge while maintaining <80 psig on PCV-8303 Outlet Pressure Indicator (PI-8303).POSITIVE CUE:

CO 2 outlet pressure is ~75 psig. Generatorpressure is ~2 psig.NEGATIVE CUE:

CO 2 outlet pressure is 0 psig.Adjust CO2 Supply Pressureusing Regulator Bypass (CO2-8303-3) counterclockwise anddid NOT exceed 80 psig. Didnot allow generator pressureto exceed 3 psig.____________EXAMINER CUE: When the above steps have been accomplished inform examinee that header pressure is 2psig and flow noise has stopped. (This is to indicate that the15 bottles have been added to the generator)15.3.7. When all 15 bottles have been added,notify the SM/CRS.POSITIVE CUE:All 15 bottles added and SM/CRS notified.Called SM/CRS by telephoneor radio and reported all 15bottles added to generator.____________END Page 6 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-GEN02INITIAL CONDITIONS:A station blackout is in progress and it is necessary toreduce loads on the station batteries.To accomplish this, it is necessary to purge the hydrogenfrom the generator with C02 to secure the Seal Oil System DC pump.INITIATING CUE:SM/CRS directs you to purge the Main Generator with 15 bottlesof C02 per 1106.002 Section 15.0.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1106.002PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:GENERATOR HYDROGEN SYSTEMPAGE:37 of 107CHANGE: 03615.0 Purging Hydrogen with CO 2 During Emergency Conditions 15.1 Perform the following to depressurize generator:

15.1.1 Verify H 2 Supply to Top of Generator (H 2-132) closed.

15.1.2 Open H 2 Vent, Lead Box (H 2-113).15.1.3 Open H 2 Vent from Top of Generator (H 2-112).NOTE During a blackout, generator pressure may be read on the following:

Gen H 2 Cond Mon Press (PI-9003), located beside the Generator Condition Monitor (AI-9002)

Main Generator Pressure (PI-8370), located inside upper door of H 2 Control Panel (M-27)

Gen H 2/Fan Press on front of H 2 Control Panel (M-27) 15.2 WHEN generator pressure is 0 psig, THEN close H 2 Vent, Lead Box (H 2-113).15.3 Perform the following to purge generator:

15.3.1 Open CO 2 Supply Isolation to Unit 1 Generator on Isophase Bus Deck (CO 2-66).15.3.2 Open CO 2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Inlet Isol (CO 2-8311).NOTE The alignment of 15 CO 2 cylinders at one time is based on purging the generator with 1.5 times its internal volume with CO 2.15.3.3 Verify 15 CO 2 manifold valves open.

15.3.4 Open the 15 CO 2 Bottle isolation Valves associated with the open CO 2 manifold valves.

15.3.5 Admit CO 2 to generator by adjusting CO 2 Supply Pressure Regulator (PCV-8303) clockwise NOT to exceed 80 psig.

Do NOT allow generator pressure to exceed 3 psig.

15.3.6 IF PCV-8303 freezes and stops flow, THEN open CO 2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Bypass (CO 2-8303-3)as needed to continue purge while maintaining 80 psig on PCV-8303 Outlet Pressure Indicator (PI-8304).

15.3.7 WHEN all 15 bottles have been added, THEN notify CRS/SM.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1106.002PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:GENERATOR HYDROGEN SYSTEMPAGE:38 of 107CHANGE: 036 15.4 Perform the following to align Purity Meter (AIS-8310) for CO 2: 15.4.1 Open the following valves:

Purity Meter Sample Return Isol to Top of Generator (H 2-114)Purity Meter Sample Supply Isol from Top of Generator (H 2-116)15.4.2 Close the following valves:

Purity Meter Sample Return Isol to Bottom of Generator (H 2-115)Purity Meter Sample Supply Isol from Bottom of Generator (H 2-117)15.5 Perform the following to check purity:

15.5.1 IF electrical power available to Purity Meter Blower (VSF-31), THEN read Purity Meter (AIS-8310).

15.5.2 IF Purity Meter NOT available OR as desired, THEN request Chemistry sample of generator.

Chemistry ____________________________

15.6 Continue purging generator as required to obtain 95% CO 2.15.6.1 Replace CO 2 bottles as necessary.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1106.002PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:GENERATOR HYDROGEN SYSTEMPAGE:39 of 107CHANGE: 036 15.7 WHEN CO 2 purity 95%, THEN perform the following:

15.7.1 Close H 2 Vent from Top of Generator (H 2-112).15.7.2 Close CO 2 Bottle isolations.

15.7.3 Purge low points by opening H 2 Vent, Lead Box (H 2-113) for 2 minutes.A. WHEN purge is complete, THEN close H 2 Vent, Lead Box (H 2-113).15.7.4 Close CO 2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Inlet Isol (CO 2-8311).15.7.5 Verify CO 2 Supply Regulator PCV-8303 Bypass (CO 2-8303-3)closed.15.7.6 Replace used CO 2 bottles.15.7.7 Close CO 2 Supply Isolation to Unit 1 Generator on Isophase Bus Deck (CO 2-66).

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam In-plant JPM P2 Page 1 of 5JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #14Date:8/4/16 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD04 (P2)System/Duty Area: Control Rod Drive System/Emergency and Abnormal OperationsTask: Respond to High Temperature on one or more Control Rod Drive Stators JTA#ANO1-RO-AOP-OFFNORM-394KA Value RO 3.1 SRO3.7KA

Reference:

001 A2.01Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location: Inside CROutside CR XBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate ):Plant Site:Simulate Simulator:

Lab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment: Plant Site XSimulator LabTesting Method: PerformSimulate XApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:10 MinutesReference(s):1203.003 Section 7 CRD Stator Temperature High and Exhibit A CRD Fuse LocationReferenceExaminee's Name:Logon ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be: Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time*SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee)and is current with that revision.

Page 2 of 5JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD04THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS: Group 7 Rod 2 control rod stator temperature computer alarm is in alarm with an indicated temperatureof 197°F. Reactor power is ~35% with the Reactor Demand and Diamond stations in manual. Group 7 Rod 2 has been transferred to the AUX power supply.TASK STANDARD:Group 7 Rod 2 is de-energized and the AUX Programmer is energized.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:Copy of AOP 1203.003 Section 7, Picture of inside Cabinet C72, and Exhibit 'A.'

Page 3 of 5JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD04INITIATING CUE: The CRS/SM directs you to de-energize CRD Group 7 Rod 2 and re-energize the AUXProgrammer per 1203.003, Section 7, Step 4 (perform steps 4.E through 4.I).

CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/AEXAMINER NOTE: Do not let examinee open cabinet. Use "Programmer Power Supply" picture to identifyfuses to be pulled once the proper cabinet has been identified.

CE. In computer room at the Auxiliary Power SupplyA cabinet (C72), remove the following fusesfrom the programmer control assembly tode-energize auxiliary power supply and dropaffected rod.1) 120 V ABT2) 120 V Bus 2POSITIVE CUE:Provide applicant picture of the inside ofCabinet C72 (Exhibit 1)Fuses 120 V ABT and 120 V Bus 2 removed.NEGATIVE CUE

If applicant opens west side door, he will see wiresbut no fuses.Opened C72 'A' cabinet doorand removed fuses 120 V ABTand 120 V Bus 2.(NOTE: C72 can be openedfrom either the east or westside. The east side is thecorrect side and has a placardthat lists the componentsinside.1. Programmer controlassembly2. Trip 3/Trip 4 Electronic tripindicating lights3. Electronic trip reset button4. Gate drive assemblies)____________EXAMINER NOTE: Simulate communications with control room. If required, inform examinee that the controlroom is handling the appropriate Technical Specification actions.F. Verify IN LIMIT lamp on for selected rod (Group7 Rod 2) on PI Panel (C13).EXAMINER CUE:Control Room reports Group 7 Rod 2 IN LIMITlight is lit.Called the control room andverified Group 7 Rod 2 INLIMIT lamp is lit.____________F. 1) Declare rod inoperable AND refer toapplicable TS 3.1.4, and TS 3.1.5 2)IF required to perform SR 3.2.5.1,THEN perform Power Peaking check(1103.019).EXAMINER CUE:Control Room reports referring to TS 3.1.4,3.1.5. and SR 3.2.5.1Called the control room andreported to declare rodinoperable AND refer toapplicable TS 3.1.4 and TS3.1.5.____________

Page 4 of 5JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD04 CPERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARDSAT UN SAT N/ANOTEThe CRD stator fuses are mounted in groups of three on fuse blocks, two fuse blocks per stator.G. Using Control Rod Stator Fuse LocationReference (Exhibit A) of this procedure, identifythe fuse blocks and CRD transfer cabinetassociated with the affected rod (Group 7 Rod 2).Used Exhibit A to determinecorrect fuses and location areFB17 and FB18 in C55.____________EXAMIINER NOTE: For the purpose of the JPM the examinee should discuss proper electrical safety and thegear required and the location (per Exhibit A) of the fuses which should be pulled. Warning in procedure states"Personnel should use proper electrical safety gear (face shield, rubber gloves and fuse pullers as a minimum)when removing fuses". The tools and PPE are available in the control room or from the breaker deck near theH1 and H2 busses.Do not let examinee open cabinet. Use "Fuse Block" picture to identify fuses to be pulledonce the proper cabinet has been identifiedWARNINGCRD transfer cabinet will be energized.

CH. Using proper electrical safety precautions (faceshield, rubber gloves, fuse pullers, etc.), removethe six stator fuses associated with the affected rod(Group 7 Rod 2).

(Examinee should not open cabinet. Use Exhibitto discuss where these fuses would be locatedinside the cabinet.)POSITIVE CUE:Provide applicant picture of the inside ofCabinet C55, Exhibit 2 and after he identifiesthe fuses to be pulled provide Exhibit 3FB17 and FB18 removed.NEGATIVE CUEIf applicant opens west side door, he will see thepatch cords for the CRDs but no fuses.Using proper electrical safetygear removed FB17 and FB18 in C55.(NOTE: C55 can be openedfrom either the east or westside. The east side is thecorrect side and has a placardthat lists the componentsinside.1. CRD transfer relays2. CRD output fuses3. CRDM output fuse blownindicators)____________CI. Re-install the Auxiliary Power Supplyprogrammer assembly fuses removed from C72.1) 120 V ABT2) 120 V Bus 2POSITIVE CUE:Fuses are re-installed in the Aux Programmer.(Use Exhibit 1 again)120-V ABT and 120V Bus 2fuses installed in AuxProgrammer.(Use picture again)____________END Page 5 of 5 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-CRD04INITIAL CONDITIONS:Group 7 Rod 2 control rod stator temperature computeralarm is in alarm with an indicated temperature of 197°F.Reactor power is ~35% with the Reactor Demand andDiamond stations in manual.Group 7 Rod 2 has been transferred to the AUX powersupply.INITIATING CUE:The CRS/SM directs you to de-energize CRD Group 7 Rod 2 andre-energize the AUX Programmer per 1203.003, Section 7, Step4 (perform steps 4.E through 4.I).

1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 35 of 50SECTION 7CRD STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH INSTRUCTIONS1. Verify CRD cooling source in-service while continuing with this procedure:Both CRD Cooling Pump (P-79A and P-79B) in-service, if available.Verify non-nuclear ICW temperature and flow are normal (C09).Check local CRD cooling water supply filter and pre-filterP's in ammonia pump pit.Vent CRD cooling water pumps, filters and high points on lines per "Venting CRDCooling System Components" Exhibit A of ICW System Operating Procedure (1104.028).2. Use one or the both of the following to trend CRD motor temperatures untiltemperatures stabilize:CRD Temperature trends on PDS/PMSFrom plant computer, obtain CRD Motor Temperature Reports (computer function: NAS,N4, F4, 2, Enter, Enter) at ~5 minute intervals or more often as necessary.NOTESince Group 8 rods will not drop when de-energized, manual Rx trip is only required if more than one rod inGroups 1-7 is >180°F.3. IF more than one CRD stator in Groups 1-7 exceeds 180°F,THEN trip the reactor and perform Reactor Trip (1202.001).

1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 36 of 50SECTION 7 - CRD STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH4. IF only one CRD stator temperature in Groups 1-7 exceeds 180°F due to an event which is confined to that stator alone,THEN proceed as follows:A. Perform Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045) in conjunction with this procedure.B. Reduce neutron power to <40% of 902 MWe (<360 MWe).C. Take manual control of reactor demand H/A station and Diamond panel.D. Transfer affected rod to AUX supply per "Transfer to Auxiliary Supply" section of CRDSystem Operating Procedure (1105.009).E. In computer room at the Auxiliary Power Supply A cabinet (C72), remove the following fusesfrom the programmer control assembly to de-energize auxiliary power supply and dropaffected rod.1) 120 V ABT2) 120 V Bus 2F. Verify IN LIMIT lamp on for selected rod on PI Panel (C13).1) Declare rod inoperable AND refer to applicable TS 3.1.4, and TS 3.1.5.

2)IF required to perform SR 3.2.5.1,THEN perform Power Peaking check (1103.019).NOTEThe CRD stator fuses are mounted in groups of three on fuse blocks, two fuse blocks perstator.G. Using Control Rod Stator Fuse Location Reference (Exhibit A) of this procedure, identify thefuse blocks and CRD transfer cabinet associated with affected rod.WARNINGCRD transfer cabinet will be energized.H. Using proper electrical safety precautions (face shield, rubber gloves, fuse pullers, etc.),remove the six stator fuses associated with the affected rod.(4. CONTINUED NEXT PAGE) 1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 37 of 50SECTION 7 - CRD STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH4. (Continued)

I.Re-install the Auxiliary Power Supply programmer assembly fuses removed from C72.1) 120V ABT2) 120V Bus 2J. Transfer affected rod circuitry back to its group power supply.

K.IF desired,THENreturn ICS to automatic.L. Within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> of declaring rod inoperable and once every 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br /> thereafter, verify 1.5%available shutdown margin per Reactivity Balance Calculation (1103.015), or initiate borationto restore SDM to be within COLR limit within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> (TS 3.4.1 Condition A).M. Collect the following plant computer printouts from NASP menu, "OPS Procedure 1203.003"selection: Uncorrected SPND Signals Imbalance, Tilt and Rod Index Corrected SPND SignalsN. Consult Senior Manager, Operations and Reactor Engineering personnel.O. Monitor core quadrant tilt for limits specified in COLR, and TS 3.2.4.

1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 38 of 50SECTION 7 - CRD STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH5. IF only Group 8 rod(s) are affected,THEN perform the following:A. Take manual control of reactor demand H/A station and Diamond panel.B. Transfer affected rod to AUX supply per CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009),"Transfer to Auxiliary Supply" section.C. In computer room at the Auxiliary Power Supply A cabinet (C72), remove the following fusesfrom the programmer control assembly to de-energize auxiliary power supply.1) 120 V ABT2) 120 V Bus 2D. Declare rod inoperable AND refer to TS 3.1.6.NOTEThe CRD stator fuses are mounted in groups of three on fuse blocks, two fuse blocks per stator.E. Using Control Rod Stator Fuse Location Reference (Exhibit A) of this procedure, identify thefuse blocks in CRD transfer cabinet C61 associated with affected rod(s).WARNINGCRD transfer cabinet will be energized.F. Using proper electrical safety precautions (face shield, rubber gloves, fuse pullers, etc.),remove the six stator fuses associated with the affected rod(s).(5. CONTINUED NEXT PAGE) 1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 39 of 50SECTION 7 - CRD STATOR TEMPERATURE HIGH5. (Continued)G. Re-install the Auxiliary Power Supply programmer assembly fuses removed from C72.1) 120V ABT2) 120V Bus 2H. Transfer affected rod circuitry back to Group 8 power supply.

I.IF desired,THEN return ICS to automatic.J. Collect the following plant computer printouts from NASP menu, "OPS Procedure 1203.003"selection: Uncorrected SPND Signals Imbalance, Tilt and Rod Index Corrected SPND SignalsK. Consult Senior Manager, Operations and Reactor Engineering personnel.L. Monitor core quadrant tilt for limits specified in COLR, and TS 3.2.4.

END 1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 49 of 50EXHIBIT A1203.003 Page 1 of 2CONTROL ROD STATOR FUSE LOCATION REFERENCERevised 4/11/95GROUPRODSTATOR FUSEBLOCKSFUSE BLOCKLOCATION GROUPRODSTATOR FUSEBLOCKSFUSEBLOCKLOCATION 1 1FB5 & FB6 C55 5 1 FB9 & FB10 C55 1 2FB3 & FB4 C55 5 2FB11 & FB12 C55 1 3FB5 & FB6 C54 5 3FB7 & FB8 C55 1 4FB3 & FB4 C56 5 4FB7 & FB8 C54 1 5FB5 & FB6 C59 5 5 FB9 & FB10 C56 1 6FB5 & FB6 C60 5 6FB7 & FB8 C56 1 7FB7 & FB8 C59 5 7 FB9 & FB10 C59 1 8FB3 & FB4 C58 5 8FB11 & FB12 C60 5 9 FB9 & FB10 C60 2 1FB7 & FB8 C57 510 FB11 & FB12 C59 2 2FB13 & FB14 C56 511 FB9 & FB10 C58 2 3FB5 & FB6 C56 5 12FB7 & FB8 C58 2 4FB15 & FB16 C57 2 5FB5 & FB6 C58 6 1FB15 & FB16 C55 2 6FB13 & FB14 C60 6 2FB15 & FB16 C56 2 7FB7 & FB8 C60 6 3FB13 & FB14 C54 2 8FB13 & FB14 C58 6 4FB17 & FB18 C57 6 5FB15 & FB16 C59 3 1FB13 & FB14 C55 6 6FB15 & FB16 C60 3 2 FB9 & FB10 C54 6 7FB17 & FB18 C59 3 3FB11 & FB12 C57 6 8FB15 & FB16 C58 3 4FB13 & FB14 C57 3 5FB13 & FB14 C59 7 1FB1 & FB2 C56 3 6FB11 & FB12 C54 7 2FB17 & FB18 C55 3 7FB11 & FB12 C58 7 3FB5 & FB6 C57 3 8FB11 & FB12 C56 7 4FB17 & FB18 C56 7 5FB1 & FB2 C58 4 1FB3 & FB4 C54 7 6FB17 & FB18 C60 4 2FB1 & FB2 C55 7 7FB3 & FB4 C60 4 3FB1 & FB2 C54 7 8FB17 & FB18 C58 4 4FB3 & FB4 C57 4 5FB3 & FB4 C59 8 1FB13 & FB14 C61 4 6FB1 & FB2 C60 8 2FB11 & FB12 C61 4 7FB1 & FB2 C59 8 3 FB9 & FB10 C61 4 8FB1 & FB2 C57 8 4FB7 & FB8 C61 8 5FB5 & FB6 C61 8 6FB3 & FB4 C61 8 7FB1 & FB2 C61 8 8FB15 & FB16 C61C57, FB9 & FB10 are spare CRDM fuse blocks.

1203.003CONTROL ROD DRIVE MALFUNCTION ACTIONCHANGE029PAGE 50 of 50EXHIBIT A1203.003Page 2 of 2CONTROL ROD STATOR FUSE LOCATION REFERENCERevised 4/11/95Arrangement of Fuses inCabinets C54 through C61 FB1 FB2 FB3 FB4 FB5 FB6 FB7 FB8 FB9 FB10 FB11 FB12 FB13 FB14 FB15 FB16 FB17 FB18C61 does not containFB17 and FB18C54 does not contain FB15 thru FB18

Unit 1 2016 NRC Exam In-plant JPM P3 Page 1 of 6JOB PERFORMANCE MEASUREUnit: 1Rev #3Date: 8/3/16 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-LRW02 (P3)System/Duty Area: Liquid Radwaste SystemTask: Perform Sampling TWMT (T-16A/B)JTA#ANO1-WCO-CZ-NORM-25KA Value RO 2.7SRO 2.8KA Reference

068A2.02Approved For Administration To: RO XSRO XTask Location:Inside CROutside CR XBothSuggested Testing Environment and Method (Perform or Simulate

):Plant Site:SimulateSimulator:Lab:Position Evaluated: RO:SRO:Actual Testing Environment:Plant SiteSimulatorLabTesting Method: Simulate:

XPerform:Alternate Path:

XApproximate Completion Time in Minutes:

5MinutesReference(s): OP-1104.020, CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONExaminee's Name:Logon ID:Evaluator's Name:The Examinee's performance was evaluated against the standards contained in this JPM and is determined to be:Satisfactory:Unsatisfactory:Performance Checklist Comments:Start TimeStop TimeTotal Time

  • SignedDate*Signature indicates this JPM has been compared to its applicable procedure by a qualified individual (not the examinee) andis current with that revision.

Page 2 of 6 JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-LRW02THE EXAMINER SHALL REVIEW THE FOLLOWING WITH THE EXAMINEE:The examiner shall ensure that the examinee has been briefed on the JPM Examination Briefing Sheet EN-TQ-114 Attachment 9.5 or NUREG 1021 Appendix E.JPM INITIAL TASK CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 100% power.RI-4642 is INOPERABLEP-3A, B, and C Circulating Water Pumps are running.P-3D Circulating Water Pump is idle.Average CW discharge pressure is 3.8 psigT-16A level is 85% by local indication and is no longer filling.TASK STANDARD:Applicant aligned T-16A for sample and then secured P-47A after sample was obtained.TASK PERFORMANCE AIDS:OP-1104.020 Section 18.0 Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A.This is an alternate path JPMRevision Notes: Rev. 2 made this an alternate path JPM, Rev. 1 is up to date (on 7/29/16) if a non-alternate path JPM isdesired.

Page 3 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-LRW02INITIATING CUE: CRS directs you to perform "Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A" Section 18.0 of1104.020.(C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARD SAT UN SATN/A18.1. Verify closed Treated Waste Monitor T-16AInlet (CZ-47A).POSITIVE CUE:CZ-47A chain operated in the clockwisedirection and did not move. No valve stemvisible and limit switch engaged.CZ-47A verified closed.

____________18.1.1 Install Sample Tag on Treated WasteMonitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A)EXAMINER CUE:Tag installed through the chain operator suchthat the valve cannot be operated withoutremoving the tag.Tag installed through the chainoperator such that the valvecannot be operated withoutremoving the tag.

____________18.2 Verify Suction Crossover on Treated WasteMonitor Pumps (CZ-50) closed.POSITIVE CUE:CZ-50 handwheel operated in the clockwisedirection and did not move. Valve stem is inthe "full in" position.CZ-50 Verified Closed

____________Place Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A on short path recirc as follows:18.3.1 Verify Treated Waste Discharge Valve toHeader from P-47A (CZ-55) closed.POSITIVE CUE:CZ-55 handwheel operated in the clockwisedirection and did not move. Valve stem is inthe "full in" position.CZ-55 Verified Closed.

____________

Page 4 of 6 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARD SAT UN SATN/A (C)18.3.2 Open Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16ARecirc Inlet (CZ-54A)POSITIVE CUE:CZ-54A handwheel operated in the counterclockwise direction until it stopped. Valvestem is in the "full out" position.CZ-54A Verified Open.

____________(C)18.3.3 Start Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches: HS-4627 remote handswitch on CleanLiquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112) HS-4637 local handswitchPOSITIVE CUE:Red light ON, Green light OFF for P-47A and40 psig discharge pressure indicated onPI-4627.NEGATIVE CUE:Green light ON, Red light OFF for P-47A.P-47A started

____________18.4 Complete Section 1.0, "Request", ofAttachment B1, Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Liquid Release Permit.EXAMINER CUE:Inform applicant that Section 1.0 ofAttachment B1 is filled in. (Don't need towatch them fill it in.)Applicant referred to T-16ALiquid Release Permit and wsainformed it is filled in.

____________18.5 Submit Attachment B1 to Chemistry for section 2.0, "Analysis".EXAMINER CUE:Chemistry reports sampling and neutralizingoperations are complete.Applicant should state that hewould take the Attachment B1to Chemistry.

____________

Page 5 of 6 (C)PERFORMANCE CHECKLISTSTANDARD SAT UN SATN/AEXAMINER NOTE: ALTERNATE PATH BEGINS HERE18.6 WHEN sampling and neutralizingoperations are complete,THEN perform the following:No Cue givenApplicant should proceed withnext step.

____________EXAMINER NOTE:Applicant should attemptto stop P-47A using HS

-4637 local hand switch first, which willnot work. HS-4627 on C112 will successfully stop pump. If applicant chooses to operate HS-4627 first, swapsuccess paths such that the second switch operated is the one that works.18.6.1Stop P-47A using ONE of thefollowing: HS-4627 on Clean Liquid Radwaste ControlPanel (C112) HS-4637 local handswitchNEGATIVE CUE:When applicant describes stopping P-47Ainform him that,Red light ON, Green light OFF for P-47A and40 psig discharge pressure indicated onPI-4627.P-47A handswitch taken to thestop position. When herealizes that the pump failed tostop proceed to the otherhandswitch.

____________(C)18.6.1Stop P-47A using ONE of thefollowing: HS-4627 on Clean Liquid Radwaste ControlPanel (C112) HS-4637 local handswitchPOSITIVE CUE:Red light OFF, Green light ON for P-47A andno flow indicated on FI-4626 or 0 psigindicated on PI-4627.P-47A handswitch taken to thestop position. When herealizes that the pump failed tostop proceed to the otherhandswitch.

____________EXAMINER CU E:Inform applicant JPM Complete.END Page 6 of 6JPM ID:A1JPM-RO-LRW02 INITIAL CONDITIONS:Unit 1 is at 100% power.RI-4642 is INOPERABLEP-3A, B, and C Circulating Water Pumps are running.P-3D Circulating Water Pump is idle.Average CW discharge pressure is 3.8 psigT-16A level is 85% by local indication and is no longer filling.

INITIATING CUE:CRS directs you to:Perform "Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A" Section 18.0 of1104.020.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:40 of 236CHANGE: 05918.0 Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16ACRITICAL STEP 18.1 Verify closed Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).

18.1.1 Install Sample Tag on Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).18.2 Verify Suction Crossover on Treated Waste Monitor Pumps (CZ-50) closed.18.3 Place Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A on short path recirc as follows: 18.3.1 Verify Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47A (CZ-55A) closed.

18.3.2 Open Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A).18.3.3 Start Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch 18.4 Complete Section 1.0, "Request", of Attachment B1, Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Liquid Release Permit.

18.5 Submit Attachment B1 to Chemistry for section 2.0, "Analysis".

Chemist________________________

18.6 WHEN sampling and neutralizing operations are complete, THEN perform the following:

18.6.1 Stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch 18.6.2 Close Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:191 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 1 of 12 TREATED WASTE MONITOR TANK T-16A LIQUID RELEASE PERMIT PERMIT #____________________(Assigned by Chemistry)

______________

Date1.0 REQUEST (Operations) 1.1 Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) taken out of service and placed on recirc for sampling and release:

Date __________ Time _________.

NOTE Sample Tag contains information to remind personnel that tank is isolated for chemistry sample.

1.2 Verify Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A) closed.

1.2.1 Verify Sample Tag installed on handwheel OR chain operator.

1.3 Initial Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) level _________________%.

1.3.1 Circle indication used:

Local Remote 1.4 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is available, THEN perform the following:

1.4.1 Check Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) operability status by performing one of the following:A. IF monitor count rate is 1000 cpm, THEN perform the following:1. Verify no Liquid Release in progress using Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642).2. Select "Check Source" on Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor AND check that the monitor responds to check source with a count rate rise >100 cpm.B. IF monitor count rate >1000 cpm, THEN check that count rate is <4.22E6 cpm.

1.4.2 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is operable, THEN record Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) background counts AND continue. ___________ cpmA. Record Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) initial setpoint: ________________ cpm PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:192 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 2 of 12 1.4.3 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable, THEN notify Chemistry AND continue.

1.5 Record the following:

Number of Circ Water Pumps running ____

Circ Water pump Disch Press _______ psig 1.6 Submitted to Chemistry for Analysis, Section 2.0:

Date _______________ Time _____________

Section 1.0 Performed By ____________________________________________2.0 ANALYSIS (Chemistry) 2.1 Sample Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) for release analysis using Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A/B) (1607.009).

Date/Time___________/__________

2.2 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable as identified in either "Request", or "Verification of Pre-Release Requirements" sections of this permit, THEN obtain independent sample of tank contents for analysis.

Date/Time___________/__________

Chemistry______________________

2.3 Record selected tank pH ____________.

2.4 Review gamma spectroscopy report and Tritium analysis.

2.5 IF release is radioactive AND release desired, THEN generate Preliminary Release Report.

2.6 Check sample results indicate that release of total tank contents will not violate ANO radioactive effluent discharge limit.

2.7 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable as identified in either "Request", or"Verification of Pre-Release Requirements" section of this permit, THEN perform independent analysis of computer data input.

Date/Time___________/__________

Chemistry______________________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:193 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 3 of 12 2.8 IF pH is NOT between 6.0 and 9.0, THEN perform the following:

2.8.1 Adjust per Sampling Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A/B) (1607.009).

2.8.2 Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) post-neutralization pH ______.

2.8.3 IF pH is NOT between 6.0 and 9.0, THEN re-perform adjustment and analysis sequence until pH is between 6.0 and 9.0.

2.9 Preliminary Release Report and/or Permit returned to Control Room.

Performed by________________________ Date/Time___________/__________3.0 Verification of Pre-Release Requirements (Operations)

NOTE If adjustments are made to Circ Water flow, then the release permit calculations are inaccurate and the release must be terminated.

3.1 Check Circ Water flow/configuration recorded in initial release submittal data is still valid.

3.2 Verify appropriate signatures on the Open EMS Liquid Permit Pre-Release Data Report.

3.3 Obtain CRS/SM approval to proceed with release.

CRS/SM ___________________________________

3.4 Provide a copy of the Monitor Setpoints section from Open EMS Liquid Permit Pre-Release Data Report to Control Room Operators.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:194 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 4 of 12 3.5 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is operable AND available, THEN verify proper operation of radiation monitor and interlocks as follows (ODCM S2.1.1.4):

3.5.1 Check Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) available by one of the following methods:

IF monitor count rate is 1000 cpm, THEN select CHECK SOURCE on Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) and check that the monitor responds to check source with a count rate rise >100 cpm.

IF monitor count rate >1000 cpm, THEN check that count rate is <4.22E6.

3.5.2 Verify the following valves closed:

FWMT Disch to CW Flumes (DZ-25)

LZ Drain Pump P-45 Discharge to Flume (LZ-5)

Treated Waste Discharge to Circ Water Flume (CZ-58) 3.5.3 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 handswitch (HS-4642) to OPEN.

3.5.4 Verify CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) in Manual.3.5.5 Fully open Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) by turning CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) Manual Adjust knob clockwise.

3.5.6 Lower Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) alarm setpoint until HIGH RAD alarm actuates.

3.5.7 Check that Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) indicating lights show CV-4642 tripped closed.

3.5.8 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 handswitch (HS-4642) to CLOSED position.A. Turn CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642)

Manual Adjust knob fully counter-clockwise to the closed position.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:195 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 5 of 12 3.5.9 Adjust Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint to the value listed in the Monitor Setpoints section of Liquid Permit Pre-Release Data Report for total Circ Water flow. (Round setpoint down for conservatism).

3.5.10 Verify a Licensed Operator, other than individual who initially set Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint, has independently verified that Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint is correct for total circ water flow.

3.5.11 Reset Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) HIGH RAD alarm by taking HS to ALARM RESET and releasing.

3.6 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable, THEN verify requirements specified in "Analysis" section of this permit for Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) inoperable OR unavailable have been performed.

Section 3.0 Performed By ____________________________________________

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:196 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 6 of 124.0 Release (Operations)

CAUTION Unauthorized discharge to Lake Dardanelle via the flume shall be avoided.

4.1 Verify Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) closed.

4.2 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) stopped.

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)HS-4637 local handswitch NOTE Sample Tag contains information to remind personnel that tank is isolated for chemistry sample.

4.3 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A) closed AND Sample Tag installed.

4.3.1 IF Sample Tag is missing OR has been removed since tank was last sampled, THEN perform the following:A. Terminate this release.B. Install Sample Tag on Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).C. Submit new release permit to Chemistry.

4.4 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Outlet (CZ-48A) open.

4.5 Verify Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) in-service by performing the following:

4.5.1 Verify the following valves open:

LRW Disch Filter F-560 Inlet (CZ-74)

LRW Disch Filter F-560 Outlet (CZ-77) 4.5.2 Verify LRW Disch Filter F-560 Bypass (CZ-83) closed.

4.6 Verify Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47B (CZ-55B) closed.4.7 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Tank T-16A Recirc Inlet (CZ-54A) closed.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:197 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 7 of 12 4.8 Open Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47A (CZ-55A).

4.9 Open Treated Waste Discharge to Circ Water Flume (CZ-58).

4.10 Verify Treated Waste Monitor Pump Discharge to Clean Waste Tanks (CZ-57) closed.

4.11 Verify Unit 1/Unit 2 Liquid Radwaste Manifold Isol (CZ-87) closed.

4.12 Verify Suction Crossover on Treated Waste Monitor Pumps (CZ-50) closed.4.13 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) is inoperable OR unavailable, THEN perform the following (ODCM L2.1.1 A):

4.13.1 Verify FWMT Disch to CW Flumes (DZ-25) closed.

4.13.2 Verify LZ Drain Pump P-45 Discharge to Flume (LZ-5) closed.

4.13.3 Person qualified as Waste Control Operator, independently verify release path valve alignment prior to release (ODCM L2.1.1 A.2.2.3).

Verified by ______________________

4.14 Notify Control Room of intent to begin release.

4.15 Commence Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release as follows:

4.15.1 Start Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitch 4.15.2 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) handswitch to OPEN.CAUTION Use of flow rate greater than allowable by the release permit may violate ODCM limits for release and may be NRC reportable.

NOTE Allowable Release Flow Rate is listed in the "Max Waste (GPM)" column of the Preliminary Report.

4.15.3 Note Max Flow rate from Preliminary Report (______gpm).

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:198 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 8 of 12 4.15.4 Open/throttle open Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) by turning CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) Manual Adjust knob clockwise to commence release, while NOT exceeding Max Flow rate entered in step 4.15.3.

4.16 WHEN release has started, THEN perform the following:

4.16.1 Perform one of the following:

IF Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642) is operable, THEN Control Room personnel shall observe Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642) AND verify release flow rate is allowable release flow rate for total circ water flow.(Ref. ODCM S2.1.1.1)

IF Discharge Flow to Flume (FI-4642) is inoperable, THEN release may continue provided:

Estimate flow rate at least once every four hours during release.

Refer to ODCM L2.1.1 B.

Document occurrence with a Condition Report.

NOTE If a Plant Computer tabular Log (DUMP) is used instead of Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830), then the tabular log shall contain at least points R4642, R3618 and be set at 5 minute intervals and cover the duration of the release.

4.16.2 IF Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830) is available, THEN verify the following data recorded on Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830).

OTHERWISE verify Plant Computer tabular log is activated and record data on it.A. Release start time ________ Date ________B. Release permit number ________________C. Name and number of tank being released: "Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A)"

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:199 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 9 of 12 4.16.3 Notify RP technician that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release has started and Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) should be periodically monitored for rad levels.4.16.4 Notify Chemistry that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release has started.

CAUTION Pumping radioactive liquid tanks empty can cause sediment in bottom of tank to be deposited in discharge piping. This can produce higher radiation areas in the vicinity of the discharge piping than previously existed.

4.17 Check Treated Waste Monitor Tanks (T-16A/B) levels AND verify only Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) is being released.

NOTE Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) inlet press should not exceed 25 psig.

4.17.1 Monitor Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) during release for a rise in inlet pressure.

4.17.2 IF LRW Disch Filter F-560 Inlet Press (PI-4606)

>25 psig, THEN perform the following:A. Stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitchB. Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) handswitch to Close.C. Perform "Backflushing the Liquid Radwaste Discharge Filter (F-560)" section of this procedure.D. WHEN backflush is complete, THEN recommence release at step 4.15 of this attachment.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:200 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 10 of 12 NOTE OP-1203.007 "Liquid Waste Discharge Line High Radiation" directs the re-establishing of the liquid release if process monitor trips due to a confirmed instantaneous spike.

4.17.3 IF Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) trips due to an instantaneous spike, THEN perform the following:A. Stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) using one of the following handswitches:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112)

HS-4637 local handswitchB. Verify Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) reset.C. Notify Control Room of intent to recommence release.D. Recommence release by returning to step 4.15.

4.18 WHEN release is complete, THEN perform the following:

4.18.1 Perform one of the following to verify Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A) stopped:

HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112) in normal-after-stop Local indication pump stopped at HS-4637 4.18.2 Verify discharge flow zero gpm.4.18.3 Notify RP technician that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release is complete AND that Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) should be surveyed for rad levels to determine the need to back flush Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560).

4.18.4 Back flush Liquid Radwaste Disch Filter (F-560) as necessary per Radiation Protection survey.

4.19 Notify control room that Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) release is complete.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:201 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 11 of 12 4.20 IF Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830) is available, THEN record the following data on Process Radiation Monitoring Effluent Recorder (RR-4830).

OTHERWISE record on Plant Computer tabular logsheets.

Release stop time __________ Date _________

Release permit number _____________

4.21 Flush clean waste to discharge flume piping as follows:

4.21.1 Verify Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 open.

4.21.2 Close Treated Waste Discharge Valve to Header from P-47A (CZ-55A)4.21.3 Close Treated Waste Discharge to Circ Water Flume (CZ-58).

4.21.4 Align demineralized water to discharge piping by opening Condensate Flush Disch Hdr (CS-256).

4.21.5 WHEN piping flushed 4-5 minutes, THEN close Condensate Flush to Disch Header (CS-256).

4.22 Place Liquid Waste Dump to Flume CV-4642 handswitch (HS-4642) to CLOSE.4.22.1 Check Liquid Waste Dump to Flume (CV-4642) indicating lights show valve closed.

4.23 Verify CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) in manual.

4.24 Turn CZ Disch to Flume Flow Controller (FIC-4642) Manual Adjust knob fully counter-clockwise to the CLOSED position.

4.25 IF HS-4637 used to stop Treated Waste Monitor Pump (P-47A), THEN verify HS-4627 remote handswitch on Clean Liquid Radwaste Control Panel (C112) in normal-after-stop.

4.26 Record final Treated Waste Monitor Tank (T-16A) level ________%

4.27 Remove Sample Tag from Treated Waste Monitor T-16A Inlet (CZ-47A).

4.28 Inform control room that Liquid Radwaste Process Monitor (RI-4642) setpoint may be returned to the value listed in step 1.4.2.

PROC./WORK PLAN NO.1104.020PROCEDURE/WORK PLAN TITLE:CLEAN WASTE SYSTEM OPERATIONPAGE:202 of 236CHANGE: 059 ATTACHMENT B1 Page 12 of 12 4.29 Return release permit with all attachments to CRS/SM.

Performed by __________________________________ Date _____________

Reviewed by CRS/SM ____________________________ Date _____________

4.30 Return the following to Chemistry:

This attachment Release permit Tabular logsheets, if used.

1Appendix DScenario Outline Form ES-D-1Facility: __ANO-1_________Scenario No.:_____

1_______Op-Test No.: __2016-1_Examiners:___________________________Operators: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Initial Conditions: _5% power .

_Turnover: ____5% power, Place "A" MFW Pump in service and raise power to 10%.___________

_P-3D Circulating Water Pump OOS for maintenance_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Event No.PositionEventType*EventDescription 1BOP NPlace A MFW Pump in service 2ATC RRaise power to 10%

3ATCSRO I TSPressurizer levelfails high. (LT

-1001)4BOPSRO I TSInadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation 5BOP CLoss of 480 V Load Center B3 with a failure of C

-5B to auto start 6ATC CContinuous Control Rod Motion 7 MPressurizer steam space leak 8ATC I CTFailure of ES Channels 1 and 2 to automatically actuate 9ATC C CTRPS fails to trip andALLRX trip pushbuttons fail.

10BOP CTTrip all RCPs within 2 minutes of a LOSM*(N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical TaskTarget Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d)Actual Attributes1.Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 22.Abnormal events (2-4) 43.Major transients (1-2) 14.EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 25.EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 16.EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 3 2NARRATIVE:Scenario starts with plant power at <5%. During turnover the ATC will be directed to maintainreactor power between 4 - 5% while the BOP places the A MFW Pump into service. This willbe completed with no malfunctions.After the MFW Pump is placed into service and power is raised to MODE 1,LT-1001 - Pressurizer Level Transmitter will fail high causing two alarms (Hi Level and Hi HILevel) and results in the RCS Makeup Valve being demanded closed due to the false high level.The ATC / BOP will determine which transmitter has failed and the ATC will select a good signalfor pressurizer level control. The CRS will also enter T.S. 3.3.15 Condition A (PAM) for thefailed transmitter.Next, an inadvertent actuation of ESAS Digital Channel 7 will occur, which results in anautomatic start of P-35A, Reactor Building Spray Pump, (after 35 seconds) and the opening of the Reactor Building Spray Isolation Valve CV-2401. The spray pump will be running with no suction source aligned if not overridden within the 35 second delay time. The BOP will overrideP-35A and stop the pump (if running) and override and close CV-2401. The CRS will enter T.S.3.3.7 and possibly T.S. 3.6.5 if the spray pump ran without a suction source and the crew determines that possible damage to the pump occurred.Next, a loss of the Non-Vital 480V Load Center (B3) will occur with a failure of C-5B, CondenserVacuum Pump to automatically start. C-5B can be started manually from the control room. TheAOP for loss of load center will have the crew check several components powered off theredundant load center in service. The only component that will not be running is C-5B.During the power escalation to <10%, after entering MODE 1, a fault will occur that causes acontinuous control rod motion. The CRS will enter OP-1203.003, Control Rod Drive MalfunctionActions, Section 9 for Continuous Control Rod Motion. The ATC will stop the failure by placing the diamond panel in the required configuration in accordance with the AOP. The actions maybe performed prior to referencing the procedure.The major event occurs next and is a Pressurizer Steam Space Leak that results in a LOSMand an ESAS actuation. The size of the leak will result in pressure stabilizing around 1200 psig.During the ESAS actuation Channel 2 (HPI) will fail to actuate. Both trains of HPI are requiredto regain adequate SCM for the given leak size. Therefore manual actuation of ES Channels 1and 2 is a critical task. Additionally, RPS is failed and will not result in an automatic reactor trip,the backup pushbuttons are also failed so the ATC will manually insert control rods and dispatchan AO to manually open both of the CRD AC Power Supply Breakers in order to complete areactor trip, this is also a critical task.Critical TasksCT-24Complete a Rx Trip on a failure of RPS - Dispatch outside operator to trip CRDBreakers within 1 minute of exceeding an RPS Automatic Trip Setpoint. (1800 psig)CT-2Initiate HPI on a loss of Subcooling margin - Complete the manual actuation of ESASChannels 1 or 2 prior to RCS press <1550 psig.CT-1Trip all RCPs on a loss of Subcooling margin - Manually Trip all RCPs within 2minutes of LOSM following the reactor trip and not before reactor is tripped.

3LOSM - The definition of Loss of Subcooling Margin is dependent on RCS Pressure as can beseen in the table below(This guidance is also in procedure OP-1203.013 - EOP Figures, Figure 1, Saturation andAdequate SCM):RCSPressureAdequateSCM>1000 psig>30 o F350 to 1000 psig>50 o F<350 psig>70 o F 4List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 1At Time OnEventActionDescription00:00:00NoneInsert malfunction RP246REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE1 FAILS00:00:00NoneInsert malfunction RP247REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE2 FAILS00:00:00NoneInsert malfunction RP248REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE3 FAILS00:00:00NoneInsert malfunction RP249REACTOR TRIP RELAY KE4 FAILS00:00:00NoneInsert override DI_PB0140 toFALSECRD POWER BRKR TRIP,PB-014000:00:00NoneInsert override DI_PB0141 toFALSECRD POWER SUPPLY BREAKER TRIP00:00:00NoneInsert override DI_ICC0020 to FALSEREACTOR TRIP,PB00:00:00NoneInsert malfunction ES259ESAS CHANNEL 1 FAILS TOACTUATE00:00:00NoneInsert malfunction ES260ESAS CHANNEL 2 FAILS TOACTUATE00:00:00NoneInsert override DI_HS3637SP to TRUESTOP,VAC PUMPS,C5B,HS-363700:00:00NoneInsert remote A210OP to DOWNA210OP RACK DOWN A210 P3BCW PUMPMODE 11Insert malfunction RD269UNCONTROLLED RODWITHDRAWLNone2Insert malfunction TR049 to 320.00000 in 60PZR LT1001 FAIL 0-320 IN H2ONone3Insert malfunction ES257FALSE ACTUATION OF ESASCHANNEL 7None4Insert malfunction ED191LOSS OF 480 V BUS B3None5Insert malfunction RC045 to0.10000 in 180PZR STEAM SPACE LEAK 0-1 SQ.

IN.None6Insert remote TRPCRDBKRA to TRIPCRDACBKRA CRD AC BREKAER FROM RPS ANone6Insert remote TRPCRDBKRB toTRIPCRDACBKRB CRD AC BREKAER FROM RPS BNone7Delete override DI_HS3637SP toTRUESTOP,VAC PUMPS,C5B,HS-3637None8Delete malfunction ES257FALSE ACTUATION OF ESAS CHANNEL 7NoneNoneOPEN EVENT FILE FOR C5BOVERRIDE 5Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 1Event 11. 1106.016, Condensate, Feedwater, and Steam System Operation, Section 15.02. 1102.002, Plant Startup, Attachment EEvent 21. 1102.002, Plant Startup, Section 17.0Event 31. 1203.012H, ACA for K09-B3 and K09-D3

2. 1203.015, Pressurizer System Failures, Section 43. T.S. 3.3.15Event 41. 1203.012J, ACA for K11-D22. 1203.053, Inadvertent ESAS Actuation, Attachment 73. T.S. 3.3.7
4. T.S. 3.6.5 (Possible depending on situation)Event 51. 1203.012B, ACA for K02-C82. 1203.046, Loss of LoadcenterEvent 61. 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction, Section 9Event 71. 1202.001, Reactor Trip
2. 1202.002, Loss of Subcooling Margin3. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-54. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-105. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-186. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-14 6Appendix DRequired Operator ActionsForm ES-D-2Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directedin OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%.

_TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=0BOPPlace A MFW Pump into service starting at Step 15.3NOTEPlant Computer points P2832, P2834 (for P-1A), P2833 andP2835 (for P-1B) have sufficient upper range and arepreferred discharge pressure points to monitor.BOP15.3 To verify MFWP is supplying feedwater, raisedesired MFWP speed until associatedStartup Control Valves or Low LoadControl Valves start to close: Startup Valve Loop A (CV-2623) Low Load Valve Loop A (CV-2622) Startup Valve Loop B (CV-2673) Low Load Valve Loop B (CV-2672)BOP15.4 Stop Aux Feedwater Pump (P-75).EXAMINER NOTE:Only onechannel of RPS is fully modeled

.BOP15.5 Reset RPS trips per "Anticipatory Reactor Trip System(ARTS) Reset" Attachment E of Plant Startup (1102.002)for the first MFWP.EXAMINER NOTE:The following steps are from ATTACHMENT E,ANTICIPATORY REACTOR TRIP SYSTEM (ARTS) RESETBOP1.0 WHEN first Main Feedwater Pump is placedinto service, THEN perform the following toreset RPS ARTS trip:CAUTIONDepressing TRIP switch will trip the channel even iffeed pump trip function is bypassed.EXAMINER NOTE:The following steps calls for concurrent verification, theexaminer can simulate being that additional verifier.

7Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directedin OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%.

_TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorBOP1.1 In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41) perform the following:1.1.1 Obtain SRO/RO ConcurrentVerification of steps in thissubsection.1.1.2 Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" oncontact buffer lower module for the started Main Feedwater Pump.1.1.3 Verify two red lights on contact buffer changestate (top comes ON, bottom goes OFF).1.1.4 Verify white light "MFWP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED"(for the started MFWP) goes DIM.EXAMINER CU E:Only one channel of RPS is fully modeled, inform theapplicant that the other 3 channels will be completed by the IA BoothOperator.ATC2.0 Perform independent verification of ARTS reset for firstMain Feedwater Pump placed into service as follows:2.1In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41), verify:2.1.1Contact buffer for the started MainFeedwater pump has top red lightON.2.1.2White light "MFWP A" ("B")"TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.EXAMINER NOTE:Only one channel of RPS is fully modeled, inform theapplicant that the other 3 channels will be completed by the IA BoothOperator.The following steps are from OP-1106.016CRS15.6 Close Aux FW Pump Recirc to E-11A (FW-1).BOOTH:IAO Reports that FW

-1 is closed.

8Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Place A MFW Pump in service per OP-1106.016 , Section 15.0 as directedin OP-1102.002, Section 17.0. While maintaining reactor power between 4 - 5%.

_TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorATC / BOP15.7 As plant power is raised, verify feedwater responds asfollows:15.7.1 WHEN feedwater flow >2000 gpm, THEN verifyassociated Feed Pump Recirc Valve closed: P-1A Feed Pump Recirc Valve(CV-2874) P-1B Feed Pump Recirc Valve(CV-2876)BOP15.8 Adjust MFWP speed to maintain70 psid across lowest FWBlock Valve.BOPDirects FieldOperator15.9 IF MFWP P-1A was placed into service, THENperform the following: -BOOTH:IAO Acknowledgesdirection to perform Step 15.9, 15.10 and 15.11of 1106.016.EXAMINER NOTE

This concludes the normal event of placing the MFWPump into serviceProceed to next event 9Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

2__Event

Description:

Begin Reactivity Event, raise reactor power to 10% at < or = 0.5% per minute.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=20NOTEReactor demand H/A station output follows actual neutron powerwhen CRD station is in MANUAL.ATC17.18 WHEN a MFP is in service, THEN beginreactor power escalation to ~7%.EXAMINER NOTE:Steps 17.19 and 17.20 are field operations preparing for turbine startupand have already been completed.BOOTH:IAO Reports Steps 17.19 and 17.20 complete if asked.NOTEDuring plant startup, RCS Lithium out of spec hours begin toaccumulate 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br /> after entry into Mode 1, or upon reachingequilibrium xenon, whichever occurs firstCRS17.21 WHEN reactor power >5% (Mode 1),THEN perform the following:17.21.1 Make a station log entry of enteringMode 1.17.21.2 Make station log entry that RCSLithium required to be in its control bandwithin next 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />, or upon reachingequilibrium xenon (enter time required).17.21.3 Make shift turnover sheet entry oftime and date that Lithium requiredto be in spec.17.21.4 IF desired, THEN Diamond Panelmay be placed in AUTO.BOOTH:Chemistry acknowledges that MODE 1 has been entered and the 72hour time limit has started.NOTEThe following indicates RPS trip is armed for loss of MFWPs.ATC17.22 Verify following annunciators clear at ~9% Rxpower: TRIP ON LOSS OF MFP BYPASSED(K08-F4) REACTOR TRIP ON LOSS OFFEEDWATER BYPASS/TROUBLE(K15-B1)EXAMINER NOTE:After entering MODE 1 go tothe next event.

10Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___Pressurizer Level Transmitter LT-1001 Fails HighTimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=25ATCCRSPressurizer Level Fails HighOP-1203.015 PRESSURIZER SYSTEM FAILURESECTION 4N/A 1.IFall Pressurizer level indication is lost,THEN GO TO "Loss of All Pressurizer Level Indication"section of this procedure.ATC / BOP 2.IFone level indicator differs from the rest,THEN assume that indicator invalid AND GO TO step 5.NOTESPDS calculates temperature-compensated level for thefollowing points:* PZR Level Red Channel (LPZR1R)* PZR Level GRN Channel (LPZR1G)Normally, these points contain values calculated by LPZR1R-Tand LPZR1G-T. If either PZR temperature element (T1001 orT1002) fails, the corresponding temperature compensated levelwill be calculated by the RCS pressure to Tsat correlation(SPDS points LPZR1R-P and LPZR1G-P).ATC 5.WHENvalidity of transmitters and indicators isdetermined,THEN select valid Pressurizer level transmitter usingHS-1002. (NNI-Y)CRS 6.IFinvalid instrument indication is >16" from other levelindications,THEN instrument is inoperable. Refer to Post AccidentMonitoring (PAM) Instrumentation (TS 3.3.15).EXAMINER NOTE:CRS will enterTS 3.3.15Condition Aabove, but not TS 3.4.1 belowATC 7.Verify Pressurizer Heater Proportional Control (PIC

-1004)in AUTO.CRS 8.Refer to "RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNBSurveillance Limits" of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).END OF PRESSURIZER LEVEL FAILUREAdvance to next event at lead instructor discretion.

11Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

4__Event

Description:

____Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation .________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=35CRSReference ACA 1203.012J for K11-D2EXAMINER NOTE:CRS may go directly to the AOP for spurious actuation of the channel.P-35A has a 35 second time delay before it will start, so the operator actions may be takenbefore the pump is running.N/A1. IF due to ES actuation, ... N/AN/A2. IF desired to clear alarm, - N/AN/A3. IF due to testing, - N/A .CRS4. IF due to a spurious actuation, THEN GO TO InadvertentESAS Actuation (1203.053).Reference AOP 1203.053, Inadvertent ESAS ActuationCRS / ATC 1.Check the following:RCS pressure remains > 1590 psigRB pressure remains < 18.7 psiaCRS 2.Check multiple ES digital channels have actuated.CRS 2.IFa single channel has actuated,THENGO TO attachment for channel tripped.Recovery From Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 ActuationCAUTIONES-actuated components overridden in other than ES position willprevent fulfillment of the associated ES function if actual trip signalis present.BOP 1.Override and stop RB Spray pump (P35A).BOOTH:If asked to investigate, there is nothing obviously wrong with P

-35A.

12Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

4__Event

Description:

____Inadvertent ES Digital Channel 7 Actuation .________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorBOP 2.Override RB SprayBlock valve (CV

-2401).BOP 3.Place RB Spray Block CV

-2401 handswitch (HS

-2401) toCLOSE (modulating valve, hold control switch in CLOSEuntil valve torques closed).CRS 4.Review the following Tech Specs for applicabilityconsidering plant mode, component previouslyoverridden, and known failure condition:TS 3.3.7 (ESAS Actuation Logic)TS 3.3.15 (PAM Instrumentation - RB PressTransmitters)TS 3.6.3 (RB Isolation Valves)TS 3.6.5 (RB Spray & Cooling)EXAMINER NOTE:CRS should enterTS 3.3.7 Condition Aand possiblyTS 3.6.5Condition A depending on if the pump ran or not and if the crew chooses to rack downthe breaker for the pump. TS 3.3.15 should not be entered since there is no indicationthat RB Pressure is failed. Once CV-2401 is closed, TS 3.6.3 is satisfied. The CRSmay enterTS 3.6.3Condition A during the time the valve was open but may not sincethe pump was running with intermittent flow, this would be a good follow-up discussionwith the CRS.Proceed to the next event at the discretion of the lead examinerafter the T.S. call ismade.N/A 5.WHENcause of actuation has been determined andcorrected - N/AN/A 6.Check MAN ES lights- N/ACRS Directs 7.Write a condition report and reference TS 3.6.5 (RB Spray& Cooling) due to operation of P35A without a suction source.CRS Directs 8.Write a condition report to evaluate Reactor Buildingequipment based on potential of wetting of components in Reactor Building.

13Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

5__Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B CondenserVacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=45LOSS OF 480 V LOAD CENTER B3 with a failure of C-5B to autostartBOP / CRSReference ACA for K02-C8, NON-ES BUS LOSS OF VOLTAGE(OP-1203.012B)Crew1.0 OPERATOR ACTIONS1.Determine which non-ES bus is in alarm:bus B3CRS2. Refer to Loss of Loadcenter (1203.046).BOP3. Check associated feeder breaker closed (see table below):Bus 4160V Supply 480V Supply Alternate 480VSupplyB3 A1 Feed to X3 X3 Feed to B3 B3 - B4 Crosstie A-103 B312 B432A. IF the associated feeder breaker is open,THEN refer to Electrical System Operation (1107.001),"Reclosing Tripped Bus or MCC Feeder Breakers"section.BOOTH:Report that there is a strong electrical odor in the area, no signs of smoke or fire.N/A -Report fromfield will besuch that the crewdoes NOTre-energizebus4. IF cause of fault has been determined to NOT be on 480Vbus AND normal supply is NOT available,THEN re-energize bus from alternate supply per "480V LoadCenter Feeder Breaker Operations" section of ElectricalSystem Operation (1107.001).CRSReference Loss of Loadcenter AOP (Section for B3)(OP-1203.046)EXAMINER NOTE:The standby vacuum pump (C-5B)will need to be manually started bythe BOP.BOP3.3 Loss of Loadcenter B33.3.1 Verify Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5B) running.BOP3.3.2 Verify EH Oil Pump (P-14B) running.OAO3.3.3 Verify Isophase Bus Cooling Fan (C-8B) running.BOOTH:Report thatC

-8B is runningATC3.3.4 Verify Instrument Air Compressor (C-28B) running.

14Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

5__Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B CondenserVacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorCAUTIONFailure to open "B" Main Phase Xfmr Normal Cooling GroupSupply breaker from B3222B (8-5) prior to closing the cross-tiebreakers will cross-tie B3 to B4, and can result in damage toboth buses.BOP / CRSDirects OAO3.3.5 Dispatch an operator (with a ladder) to verify MainTransformer cooling supplies from B4 as follows:Perform the following for Main Phase Xfmr (X-01B):1. Open breaker 8-5.2. Close both of the following breakers(ladder required): 8-7 8-8NOTEWhen completed EC12923 places Main Phase TransformersX-01C and X-01S in service.BOP / CRSDirects OAO Perform one of the following: IF EC12923 has been implemented,THEN verify Main Phase Xfmrs (X-01Cand X-01S) on B4 supply (cooling fansrunning).IF EC12923 has NOT been implemented,THEN verify Main Phase Xfmrs (X-01Aand X-01C) on B4 supply (cooling fans running).BOOTH:Reports that the requested breakers for Step 3.3.5 above have been opened /closed as appropriate.N/A3.3.6 IF in the BLEED position, - N/ABOP3.3.7 Verify Gland Steam Cond Exhauster (C-1B) running.BOP3.3.8 Verify Air Side Seal Oil Backup Pump (P-25) running.EXAMINER NOTE: The following NOTE has been modified to only include the componentthat requires operator action 15Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

5__Event

Description:

____Loss of Non-Vital 480V Load Center B3 with a failure of C-5B CondenserVacuum Pump to automatically start__________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTEFollowing is a list of major components supplied by loadcenterB3 either directly or via MCC:Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5A)EXAMINER NOTE: Crew should identify that C

-5B failed to start automatically.BOP3.3.9 Refer to list above and Attachment D of ElectricalSystem Operations (1107.001) to determine anyadditional components such as ventilation systemsthat may require actions.BOOTH:Acknowledge anydirections given based on Step 3.3.9, and report no issuesfound.CRS3.3.10 Determine cause of loss of loadcenter and restorepower from normal or alternate power source per theappropriate sections of Electrical System Operations(1107.001).EXAMINER NOTE: Report from the field will be such that the crew will NOT re

-energize B3.END OF LOSS OF 480V LOADCENTERAdvance to next event at lead instructor discretion.

16Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

Continuous Control Rod Motion. .TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=55CRSReference ACA 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Actions,Section 9 - Continuous Control Rod Motion.ATC 1.Verify the following:Reactor demand H/A station in MANUAL.Diamond panel in MANUAL.

A.IF rod motion stops,THENGO TO ICS Abnormal Operation (1203.001).N/A 2.IFSY lamp is energizing and de

-energizing (indicatingcontrol rod or group motion),THEN set SPEED SELECTOR switch to RUN.

A.IF control rod motion stops,THEN contact I&C and System Engineering forassistance.EXAMINER NOTE:The next stepwill stop rod motionby generating conflicting controlsignals for the CRD System, however the outward motion demand will remain andtherefore the audible alarm will continue.ATC 3.IFcontrol rod motion continues,THEN perform the following:A. Verify diamond panel in MANUAL.B. Set GROUP-AUXIL switch to AUXIL.C. Set SPEED SELECTOR switch to JOG.D. Place manual command switch in the INSERT for ~3seconds AND return manual command to neutral.N/A 4.IFcontrol rod motion continuesTHEN perform the following:A. Trip reactor.

B. Perform Reactor Trip (1202.001).END OF EVENT 17 Op-Test No.:_____Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

7__Event

Description:

__ Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor tripdue to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton and the backup pushbuttons are failed so theATC will be required to dispatch an outside operator to complete the reactor trip. ES Channels1 and 2 are also failed and will require manual actuation in order to establish HPI which willallow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorT=60PRESSURIZER STEAM SPACE LEAKEXAMINER NOTE: The size of the leak will result in exceeding Reactor Trip criteria with afailure of RPS and a failure of the Rx Trip Pushbuttons.Critical Task met if communications to the outside operator to trip the local CRD breakeroccurs within 1 minute of exceeding RPS setpoint of 1800 psig.ATCCritical TaskAttempt to manually trip reactor prior to or within one minute ofbeing <1800 psigCRSEnter Reactor Trip EOP (OP-1202.001)ATC 1.Depress Reactor Trip PB.A. Verify all rods insertedANDreactor power dropping.EXAMINERNOTE:The following are the contingency steps for tripping the reactor andmust be performed within 1 minute of exceeding the RPS trip setpoint of 1800 psig.ATC CT 1)IFreactor fails to trip,THEN depress CRD Power Supply Breaker Trip PBs onC03: A-501 B-631 a)IF either A-501 or B-631 fails to trip,THEN manually insert rods at C03.b) Dispatch an operator to open both CRD AC PowerSupply breakers.BOOTH:Insert trigger to open CRD AC breakers1 minuteafter directed by the controlroom.N/A 2)IFmore than one rod fails to fully insert ORreactor power is not dropping,THEN perform Emergency Boration (RT-12).Crew 3)Do notcontinue until the reactor is shutdown.

18 Op-Test No.:_____Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

7__Event

Description:

__ Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor tripdue to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton and the backup pushbuttons are failed so theATC will be required to dispatch an outside operator to complete the reactor trip. ES Channels1 and 2 are also failed and will require manual actuation in order to establish HPI which willallow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorN/ATurbine noton line.2. Depress Turbine trip PB.A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.Crew 3.Check adequate SCM.CRSReport Immediate Actions CompleteCRS 4.Perform the following: Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency ActionLevel Classification (1903.010). Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating stepsATC5. Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) demand adjusted to zero.BOP6. Open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operatingHPI pump.ATC7. IF Emergency Boration is not in progress,THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint to 100".EXAMINER NOTE: Leak is large enough to cause ESAS Channels 1

-4 to actuate and resultin a LOSM. Channels 1 and 2 are failed and requires manual actuation by the ATC.This is a critical task.CRSEnter LOSM EOP (OP-1202.002) 19 Op-Test No.:_____Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

7__Event

Description:

__ Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor tripdue to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton and the backup pushbuttons are failed so theATC will be required to dispatch an outside operator to complete the reactor trip. ES Channels1 and 2 are also failed and will require manual actuation in order to establish HPI which willallow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE: The CRS may enter the ESAS EOP (OP

-1202.010) however pressurewill stabilize greater than 150 psig and therefore the LOSM EOP will contain themitigating actions for this scenario. If the ESAS EOP is entered this is not a failure,the ESAS EOP will direct transitioning to LOSM once the crew determines pressure isstable and greater than 150 psig.

CT By manually actuating ES Channels 1 or 2 the ATC will have satisfied the step toInitiate full HPI (RT-3) even though RT-3 is not being used as guidance. Failure toactuate both would be a point deduction but not a CT failure.

CT Manually trip all RCPs within 2 minutes of LOSM following the reactor trip and notbefore the reactor is tripped.BOPBOPATC / BOPATCCRS 1.Check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCM ANDperform the following:

A.IF 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN trip all RCPs: P32A P32B P32C P32DB. Initiate full HPI (RT-3).

1)IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).C. Verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).D. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floatingsteps.ATC 2.IFa feed source other than MFW is available,THEN trip both MFW pumps:A Main Feed PumpB Main Feed PumpATC 3.Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.ATC CTActuate Channels 1 and 2 of ESAS before RCS pressure dropsbelow 1550 psig.BOP3. Verify proper ESAS actuation (RT-10). (Step 3 contingency action)ATC4. Check RCS press 150 psig.

20 Op-Test No.:_____Scenario No.: _

1___Event No.: __

7__Event

Description:

__ Pressurizer Steam Space leak results in the need for a manual reactor tripdue to RPS being failed. The Rx Trip pushbutton and the backup pushbuttons are failed so theATC will be required to dispatch an outside operator to complete the reactor trip. ES Channels1 and 2 are also failed and will require manual actuation in order to establish HPI which willallow the crew to regain SCM._______________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorN/A5. IF RCS T-cold is < 540F and dropping - N/AATC 6.Isolate Pressurizer Spray Line as follows:A. Place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode in MANANDverify Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) closed (modulatingvalve).B. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).ATC 7.IFboth of the following conditions exist:HPI cooling is not in progressERV was not opened by procedure to intentionallydepressurize the RCSTHEN verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000)closed.BOP8.Check Nuclear Loop ICW process monitor alarm clear.N/A 9.IFCET temps are superheated- N/AATC10.Check SG tube integrity (RT

-18).ATC11.IFSCM is adequate,THEN control RCS press low within limits of Figure 3(RT-14).EXAMINER NOTE: Once the critical tasks are completed and pressure is being controlled,the simulator will be frozen at the direction of the lead examiner.FREEZE AT THE DISCRETION OF THE LEAD EVALUATOR 21SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKSANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input fromOperations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The followingpages come from that document.At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1exam.

22CT-24Shutdown Reactor - ATWSCT based on: Reactivity control to provide adequate shutdown marginTBD DescriptionOperator must recognize and react to any of the reactor trip parameters that exceeds its limitbut does not cause a reactor trip.TBD ConditionsFailure of reactor trip either by automatic and/or manual push button commands.Associated GEOG Bases:

23ANO Version(s)(1) The reactor should be manually tripped within 1 minute of the loss of the XX bus (Loss of 2RCPs > 55%).(2) Reactor tripped prior to 1700# RCS pressure and within 1 minute.(3) The reactor should be tripped within 1 minute after condenser vacuum reaches 24.5 inchesor the turbine trips (with the reactor above 43% power).(4) The reactor should be tripped within 1 minute after the turbine trips (with the reactor above43% power).(5) The reactor should be manually tripped within 60 seconds of the turbine trip (the Turbineshould be tripped at 14 mils vibration, RPS will not auto trip the reactor, the Reactor Trip Pushbutton is failed.)(6) The reactor should be tripped within 1 minute of the loss of the 2nd MFW pump.(7) The reactor trip pushbutton shall be depressed within one minute of P-32B RCP breakeropening. (No RCPs running in the B RCS loop).SES usedJustification for ANO:(1) IAW OP-1015.050, Time Critical Operator Actions, operators are required to trip the reactorwithin 1 minute if RPS fails and the main reactor trip pushbutton fails. In these scenarios, the main reactor trip pushbutton is not failed although RPS is, so the TCOA criterion of 1minute provides adequate time for the crew to recognize the condition and trip the plant asrequired.(2) RPS is failed and will not cause a reactor trip at 1800# due to the lowering RCS pressurecaused by the RCS leak. The criterion to have the reactor tripped prior to 1700# provides adequate time for the crew to diagnose the RPS failure and to shut down the reactor as required. The 1 minute criterion is described in (1) above.(3) See justification in (1) above.

(4) See justification in (1) above.

(5) See justification in (1) above.

(6) See justification in (1) above.(7) See justification in (1) above.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria, the applicant will perform all contingency actions to includedispatching the Auxiliary Operator to open the AC CRD Power Supply Breakers. The communication to the AO must be performed not to exceed 1 minute after exceeding the RPS Trip Setpoint of 1800 psig.

24CT-2Initiate HPICT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water massTBD DescriptionInitiate full HPI anytime SCM is lost to provide maximum core heat removal.Provide subcooled water for 1 0 to 2 0 heat transfer.TBD also addresses balancing HPI flow.TBD ConditionsSCM lostAssociated GEOG Bases:ANO Version(s)(1) Actions to initiate HPI should be started before SCM becomes inadequate at <30°F.(2) HPI should be initiated before subcooling margin reaches <25°F or RCS pressure becomes<1550 psig.(3) ESAS Ch. 1 should be actuated before RT-10 reported complete IAW Transient Conduct ofOperations.

25SES usedJustification for ANO:(1)Action to initiate HPI is necessary to provide makeup for the RCS inventory that is being lostto the secondary system (SGTR). Initiating HPI prior to the LSCM prevents unnecessarychallenges to the controlled shutdown, cooldown, and isolation of the affected SG.(2)Initiation of HPI with a PZR steam space leak is necessary to maintain RCS pressure andinventory that will be lost via the leak. Since ES Channels 1 and 2 are failed (auto actuationwill not occur), 1550# RCS Pressure provides adequate time for the ATC to recognize the failure and to manually actuate the failed channels. 25F SCM also provides adequate timefor the crew to recognize the need for HPI and to initiate it appropriately.(3)Initiation of the failed Channel 1 of ESAS is accomplished to provide redundancy for HPIinjection and maintain a greater margin to core uncovery. The TBD shows that one HPIpump is all that is required for adequate core cooling, however, this results in a smallermargin to core uncovery.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (2) is applicable. Both Channels 1 or 2 should be actuatedprior to RCS press <1550 psig.

26CT-1Trip all RCPs(Rule 1.0)CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water massTBD DescriptionTrip all RCPs immediately, no later than 1 or 2 minTBD ConditionsAnytime adequate SCM is lost Associated GEOG BASES:ANO Version(s)The RCPs should be tripped within two minutes of a Loss of Adequate Subcooling Margin.*TCOA per OP-1015.050*Justification for ANOAs described in the TBD.As noted above, this is a Time Critical Operator Action per OP-1015.050.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria RCPs should be tripped within 2 minutes of LOSM followingthe reactor trip. Since the reactor cannot be tripped from within the control room, the RCPs should not be tripped before the reactor is tripped.

27ATTACHMENT EPage 1 of 7ANTICIPATORY REACTOR TRIP SYSTEM (ARTS) RESET1.0WHEN first Main Feedwater Pump is placed into service,THEN perform the following to reset RPS ARTS trip:_______/____Date/TimeCAUTIONDepressing TRIP switch will trip the channel even if feed pump trip function is bypassed.1.1In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41) perform the following:1.1.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps in thissubsection.1.1.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lower modulefor the started Main Feedwater Pump.1.1.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comes ON,bottom goes OFF).1.1.4Verify white light "MFWP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MFWP)goes DIM.1.2In RPS Channel B Cabinet (C42) perform the following:1.2.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps in thissubsection.1.2.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lower modulefor the started Main Feedwater Pump.1.2.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comes ON,bottom goes OFF).1.2.4Verify white light "MFWP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MFWP)goes DIM.1.3In RPS Channel C Cabinet (C43) perform the following:1.3.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps in thissubsection.1.3.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lower modulefor the started Main Feedwater Pump.1.3.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comes ON,bottom goes OFF).1.3.4Verify white light "MFWP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MFWP)goes DIM.

28ATTACHMENT EPage 2 of 71.4In RPS Channel D Cabinet (C44) perform the following:1.4.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps inthis subsection.1.4.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for the started Main Feedwater Pump.1.4.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comesON, bottom goes OFF).1.4.4Verify white light "MFWP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the startedMFWP) goes DIM.NOTEIndependent Verification is performed by a different operator than the one that reset the ARTStrip.2.0 Perform independent verification of ARTS reset for first Main Feedwater Pump placedinto service as follows:2.1In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41), verify:2.1.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.2.1.2White light "MFWP A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.2.2In RPS Channel B Cabinet (C42), verify:2.2.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.2.2.2White light "MFWP A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.2.3In RPS Channel C Cabinet (C43), verify:2.3.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.2.3.2White light "MFWP A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.

29ATTACHMENT EPage 3 of 72.4In RPS Channel D Cabinet (C44), verify:2.4.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.2.4.2White light "MFWP A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.3.0 WHEN Main Turbine startup is complete,AND generator is ready to be loaded,THEN perform the following to reset RPS ARTS trip: _____/_____Date/TimeCAUTIONDepressing TRIP switch will trip the channel even if turbine trip is bypassed.3.1Perform the following to reset RPS trips in RPS Chnl A Cabinet (C41):3.1.1Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for main turbine.3.1.2Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comesON, bottom goes OFF).3.1.3Verify white light "turbine tripped" goes DIM.3.2Perform the following to reset RPS trip in RPS Chnl B Cabinet (C42):3.2.1Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for main turbine.3.2.2Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comesON, bottom goes OFF).3.2.3Verify white light "turbine tripped" goes DIM.3.3Perform the following to reset RPS trip in RPS Chnl C Cabinet (C43):3.3.1Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for main turbine.3.3.2Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comesON, bottom goes OFF).3.3.3Verify white light "turbine tripped" goes DIM.

30ATTACHMENT EPage 4 of 73.4Perform the following to reset RPS trip in RPS Chnl D Cabinet (C44):3.4.1Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for main turbine.3.4.2Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comesON, bottom goes OFF).3.4.3Verify white light "turbine tripped" goes DIM.NOTEIndependent verification is performed by a different operator than the one that reset the ARTStrip.4.0 Perform independent verification of ARTS reset for Main Turbine as follows:4.1In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41) verify:4.1.1Contact buffer for main turbine has top red light on.4.1.2White light "turbine tripped" is DIM.4.2In RPS Channel B Cabinet (C42) verify:4.2.1Contact buffer for main turbine has top red light on.4.2.2White light "turbine tripped" is DIM.4.3In RPS Channel C Cabinet (C43) verify:4.3.1Contact buffer for main turbine has top red light on.4.3.2White light "turbine tripped" is DIM.4.4In RPS Channel D Cabinet (C44) verify:4.4.1Contact buffer for main turbine has top red light on.4.4.2White light "turbine tripped" is DIM.

31ATTACHMENT EPage 5 of 75.0 IF second Main Feedwater Pump is in-service,THEN perform the following to reset RPS ARTS trip: ______/______Date/TimeCAUTIONDepressing TRIP switch will trip the channel even if feed pump trip function is bypassed.5.1In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41) perform the following:5.1.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps inthis subsection.5.1.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for the started Main Feedwater Pump.5.1.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state(top comes ON, bottom goes OFF).5.1.4Verify white light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED"(for the started MFP) goes DIM.5.2In RPS Channel B Cabinet (C42) perform the following:5.2.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps inthis subsection.5.2.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for the started Main Feedwater Pump.5.2.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state(top comes ON, bottom goes OFF).5.2.4Verify white light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED"(for the started MFP) goes DIM.5.3In RPS Channel C Cabinet (C43) perform the following:5.3.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps inthis subsection.5.3.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for the started Main Feedwater Pump.5.3.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state (top comesON, bottom goes OFF).5.3.4Verify white light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the startedMFP) goes DIM.

32ATTACHMENT EPage 6 of 75.4In RPS Channel D Cabinet (C44) perform the following:5.4.1Obtain SRO/RO Concurrent Verification of steps inthis subsection.5.4.2Depress "test" switch labeled "RESET" on contact buffer lowermodule for the started Main Feedwater Pump5.4.3Verify two red lights on contact buffer change state(top comes ON, bottom goes OFF).5.4.4Verify white light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED"(for the started MFP) goes DIM.NOTEIndependent verification is performed by a different operator than the one that reset the ARTStrip.6.0 Perform independent verification of ARTS reset for second Main Feedwater Pumpplaced into service as follows:6.1In RPS Channel A Cabinet (C41) verify:6.1.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.6.1.2White light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.6.2In RPS Channel B Cabinet (C42) verify:6.2.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.6.2.2White light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.

33ATTACHMENT EPage 7 of 76.3In RPS Channel C Cabinet (C43) verify:6.3.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.6.3.2White light "MFP A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater pump) is DIM.6.4In RPS Channel D Cabinet (C44) verify:6.4.1Contact buffer for the started Main Feedwater pump has top redlight ON.6.4.2White light "MFP" "A" ("B") "TRIPPED" (for the started MainFeedwater Pump) is DIM.

34 35Page 1 of 5EMERGENCY BORATIONIf an unexpected delay occurs in implementation of Step 1, then promptly initiate Emergency Boration using HPI per step 2.1. IF Boric Acid pump (P39A or P39B) and Batch Controller are available,THEN perform the following:

A.IF both OP and STBY HPI Pumps are off ORLetdown is isolated,THEN GO TO step 2.B. Set Batch Controller for maximum batch size as follows:1) Depress lower DISPLAY.2) Depress TOTAL.

3) Depress TOTAL RESET.4) Depress BATCH SET.5) Depress 9, six times.6) Depress ENTER.7) Depress lower DISPLAY.C. Verify Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251) closed.D. Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).E. Verify both Makeup Filters in service: F3A F3BF. Record initial BAAT (T-6) level ____________ in.

G. Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE) 36Page 2 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION1. (Continued)H. Start Batch Controller by depressing RUN key.I. Adjust Batch Controller Flow CNTRL VLV (CV-1249) to 100% open as follows:1) Depress VALVE SET.

2) Depress numbers: 1, 0, 0.3) Depress ENTER.4) Depress lower DISPLAY.5) Depress RATE.

J.IF Batch Controller output rate < 5 gpm,THEN perform the following:1) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s): P39A P39B2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).3) Stop Batch Controller by depressing STOP key.

4)GO TO step 2.K. Adjust Pressurizer Level Control Setpoint to 220".L. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

M.WHEN PZR level is 100",THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and componentlimitations.(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE) 37Page 3 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION1. (Continued)N. Perform the following as necessary to maintain Makeup Tank level 55 to 86":1) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).2) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s): P39A P39B3) Place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

4)WHEN Makeup Tank level is lowered to desired level,THEN perform the following:a) Return 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) to LETDOWN.b) Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).c) Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).O. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book.PPM2) Calculate batch add required using Plant Computer ORSoluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.3,"Feed Volume For Batch Boration or Dilution".gal3) Use 1103.004, Attachment D, "Volume of BAAT Vs. Depth of Liquid"to determine desired final BAAT level.

"(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE) 38Page 4 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION1. (Continued)

P.WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added perstep 1.O.ORas determined by Reactor Engineering,THEN perform the following:1) Stop Boric Acid pump(s): P39A P39B2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).3) Verify Makeup Tank level 55 to 86".

4) Close BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408).5) Adjust Letdown flow to desired rate.

39Page 5 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION2. IF HPI will be used for emergency boration,THEN perform the following:A. Initiate HPI per RT-2.B. Verify HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) associated with running HPI pumpopen.C.IF Letdown is in service,THEN place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

D.WHEN PZR level is 100",THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and componentlimitations.E. Maintain PZR level 200 to 220" as follows:1) Verify both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Throttle HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) as necessary.F. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book.PPM2) Calculate final BWST level for required boron addition using PlantComputer ORSoluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.6,"Continuous Feed and Bleed from BWST".ft G.WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added perstep 2.F.ORas determined by Reactor Engineering,THEN perform the following:1) Operate HPI as directed by CRS.2) Adjust Letdown flow as directed by CRS.

40RT-5Page 1 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL1. Verify EFW actuation indicated on C09:Train A:Train B: Bus 1 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 2NOTETable 1 contains EFW fill rate and level bands for various plant conditions.2. Verify at least one EFW pump (P7A or P7B) running with flow to SG(s) throughapplicableEFW CNTRL valve(s).SG ASG BCV-2645P7ACV-2647CV-2646P7BCV-26483. IF SCM is not adequate,THEN perform the following:A. Select Reflux Boiling setpoint for the following: Train A Train BNOTETable 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.B. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain SG levels 370 to 410".

41(3. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)Page 2 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL3. (Continued) 1)IF both SGs are available,THEN verify SG level rising and tracking EFIC setpoint until 370 to 410" isestablished.

a)IF EFW flow is less than adequate,THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND to maintain 340 gpm toapplicable SG until level is 370 to 410".

b)IF EFW flow is excessiveAND> 340 gpm to either SG,THEN throttle EFW to applicable SG in HAND to limit SGdepressurization.

Do not throttle below 340 gpm on either SG until SG level is 370 to 410".

2)IF only one SG is available,THEN feed available SG in HAND at 570 gpm until SG level is 370 to 410".

3)IF EFW is being controlled in HANDANDSG press drops below 720 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling, THEN continue feeding at required minimum rateAND perform the following:a) Bypass MSLI by momentarily placing SG Bypass toggle switch on eachEFIC cabinet Initiate module in BYPASS. C37-3 C37-4 C37-1 C37-2b) Place applicable EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:SG ASG BCV-2645P7ACV-2647CV-2646P7BCV-2648c) Place applicable EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL.SG ASG BCV-2627P7ACV-2620 42CV-2670P7BCV-2626Page 3 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL4. IF SCM is adequate,THEN perform the following:CAUTIONExcessive EFW flow can result in loss of SCM due to RCS shrinkage.NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow. Expect CETs to rise until natural circ conditions are established. If EFW flow control is in HAND,additional flow may not be necessary to prevent rising CETs until natural circ conditions areestablished.A. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain applicable SG levelband per Table 1.

1)IF EFW flow is less than adequate OREFW flow is excessive,THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND as necessary to ensure thefollowing: Maintain sufficient EFW flow to prevent rise in CET temp. Maintain continuous EFW flow until applicable level band is reached. Maintain sufficient EFW flow to ensure SG level is either stable OR rising until applicable level band is reached.5. IF all RCPs are off,THEN check primary to secondary heat transfer in progress indicated by all of thefollowing: T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2) T-hot tracking CET temps T-hot/T-coldT stable or dropping6. Monitor EMERGENCY FEEDWATER and EFIC alarms on K12.

43Page 4 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROLTable 1EFIC Automatic Level Control SetpointsConditionLevel BandAutomatic Fill RateAny RCP running20 to 40"No fill rate limitAll RCPs off and Natural Circ selected300 to 340"2 to 8"/minAll RCPs off and Reflux Boiling selected370 to 410"2 to 8"/minTable 2Examples of Less Than Adequate EFW Flow Indications SG level < 20" and no EFW flow indicated All RCPs off and SG level not tracking EFIC calculated setpoint All RCPs off and EFIC level setpoint not trending toward applicable level bandExamples of Excessive EFW Flow Indications SG press drops 100 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling SCM approaching minimum adequate due to EFW flow induced overcooling EFW CNTRL valve open with associated SG level > applicable setpoint level bandEND 44RT-10Page 1 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATIONNOTEObtain Shift Manager/CRS permission prior to overriding ES.1. Verify BWST T3 Outlets open: CV-1407 CV-1408 A.IFBWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) fails to open,THEN overrideAND stop associated HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failedvalve is opened:CV-1407CV-1408P34AP34BP36A/BP36C/BP35AP35B2. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open: CV-3806 CV-3807 45Page 2 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION3. IF any RCP is running,THEN perform the following:

A.IF ES Channel 5 or 6 has actuated,THEN perform the following:

1)IF SCM is adequate,THEN trip all running RCPs due to loss of ICW: P32A P32C P32B P32D 2)IF SCM is not adequate,THEN check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCMAND perform the following:

a)IF 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN trip all RCPs: P32A P32C P32B P32D b)IF > 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN perform the following:(1) Leave currently running RCPs on.

(2)IF RCS press > 150 psig,THEN notify CRS toGO TO 1202.002, "LOSS OF SUBCOOLINGMARGIN"procedure.(3) Restore RCP services per RT-8 while continuing.

B.IF neither ES channel 5 nor 6 has actuated,THEN dispatch an operator to performService Water And Auxiliary Cooling System(1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW Following ES Actuation" whilecontinuing.

1)WHEN ICW Cooler SW Outlets and Bypasses are aligned per 1104.029,Exhibit B,THEN overrideAND open one Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply(CV-3811 or CV-3820).

46Page 3 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION4. Verify proper ESAS Channels tripped:ConditionChannels ActuatedRCS press 1550 psig1,2,3,4RB press 18.7 psia1,2,3,4,5,6RB press 44.7 psia7,8,9,105. Perform the following:A. Verify each component properly actuated on C16 and C18,except those overriddenin previous steps.B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.NOTE During ESAS actuation, low LPI flow is expected until RCS depressurizes below LPI pump shutoff head. During large break LOCAs, high LPI flow can be experienced. Flow must be throttled to ensure ECCSflows are maintained within assumptions of calculations.

1.IF any of the following conditions exist: A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4) B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5) A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4) B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B5) A RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C4) B RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C5)THEN use Annunciator K11 Corrective Action (1203.012J) to clear unexpectedalarms.C.IF only one train of HPI is availableANDRCS press is > 600 psig,THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the nexthighest flow.

47Page 4 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION6. On C10, perform the following: Verify DGs operating within normal limits: DG 1 DG 2 4100 to 4200 V 4100 to 4200 V 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 2750 KW 2750 KW Verify the following breakers open: A3-A4 Crossties: A-310 A-410 B5-B6 Crossties: B-513 B-613 Unit AUX feeds to A1 and A2: A-112 A-212 Verify the following breakers closed: A3 Feeds to B5: A-301 B-512 A4 Feeds to B6: A-401 B-6127. On C09, perform the following:A. Check AUX Cooling Water header depressurized.

B.IF proper EFW actuation and control has not already been verified,THEN verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

48Page 5 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION8. On C19, perform the following:A. Verify LPI (Decay Heat) Room Cooler running in each Decay Heat Room:P34A RoomP34B RoomVUC1A or BVUC1C or D B.IF RB Spray has actuated,THEN verify SW to RB Spray P35A and P35B LO CLRs open: CV-3804 CV-38059. IF all RCPs are offANDRCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) is closed,THEN place RCP Seal Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE: SV-1271 SV-1273 SV-1270 SV-127210. IF leakage into the RB is indicated,THEN verify RB cooling maximized:A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running: VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1DB. Verify RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves open: CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815C. Verify key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers unlatched: SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 49Page 6 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION11. Initiate RB H 2 sampling using Containment Hydrogen Control (1104.031), Exhibit A.12. Verify each component properly actuated on C26.13. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26: Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814) Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816) Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)14. Verify the following High Point Vents closed:A LoopB LoopReactorVesselPressurizer SV-1081 SV-1082 SV-1083 SV-1084 SV-1091 SV-1092 SV-1093 SV-1094 SV-1071 SV-1072 SV-1073 SV-1074 SV-1077 SV-107915. IF AUX Lube Oil pump for running HPI pump fails to stop after 20 second time delay,THEN within one hour of ESAS actuation dispatch an operator to stop AUX Lube Oilpump locally at breaker while continuing:P64AP64BP64CB5721B5722/B6515B651416. Place running Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pump (P34A/P34B) handswitches in NORMAL-AFTER-START to enable DECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP (K09-A7)alarm: P34A P34B17. Monitor ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM alarms on K11.

50Page 7 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION18. IF any of the following components/systems are in service:Condensate PumpsCondenser Vacuum PumpsWaterbox Vacuum PumpsSeal Oil SystemControl Room ChillersTHEN coordinate with CRS/SM to secure components and/or systems, as timepermits.19. Coordinate with CRS/SM to re-verify component actuation with another operator.END 51RT-14Page 1 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESSNOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred: HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control. When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply. PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists,THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig,THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.3. IF PZR steam space leak exists,THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.

B.IF SCM is adequate,THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Throttle HPI.C. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdownper RT-13.D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

52Page 2 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. IF RCS press is high,THEN limit press using one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Check adequate SCMAND any of the following conditions met: HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13013) Throttle HPI.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D.IF PZR AUX Spray is in service,THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.F. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdownper RT-13.G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE) 53Page 3 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. (Continued)

H.IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),THEN perform the following:1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):P36AP36BP36CP64AP64BP64C2) Stop desired HPI pump(s): P36A P36B P36C3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:P36A/BP36B/C CV-1219 CV-1220 CV-1278 CV-1279 CV-1227 CV-1228 CV-1284 CV-12855. IF RCS press is low,THEN raise press using one or more of the following:A. Raise makeup flow.B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.D. Reduce Letdown flow.

E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE) 54Page 4 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS5. (CONTINUED)CAUTIONIf HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPIcooling is no longer required.F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation(CV-1000) closed.CAUTIONWith RCS solid, 1F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.6. IF PZR is solid,THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature. Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS pressNOTEAdjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flow on-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate andcooldown rate.7. IF normal makeup is in service ANDHPI is in service, THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintainnormal makeup flow on-scale.END Page 1 of 57Appendix DScenario OutlineForm ES-D-1Facility: __ANO-1_________Scenario No.:_____

3_______Op-Test No.: __

2016___Examiners:___________________________Operators: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Initial Conditions: _35% power.___Turnover: ____35% power, P-34A Surveillance in progress and ready for pump start

______________Pleasant Hill Line OOS, Breakers B5122 and B5148 Open to isolate the line.

_____________________________________________________________________________________EventNo.PositionEventType*EventDescription 1 BOP CRS N TSPerform P-34A Surveillance, P-34A PumpTrip 2 ATC CRS CTRMERV leaking 3 BOP C CV-4018Temperature Control ValveFailsclosed 4 BOP ATC IMain Turbine Controlling header pressure fails high 5 ATC CRCS leak requiring a down power.

6 All M RCS LOCAresulting in Rx trip and pressure dropping below 150psig.7 BOPC / CT CV-1400 fails to open automatically.

8 ATCC /CTES Channels 5 and 6 fail to actuate 9 BOP CTTrip all RCPs within 2 minutes of a LOSM*(N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical TaskTarget Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d)Actual Attributes 1.Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2 2.Abnormal events (2-4) 4 3.Major transients (1-2) 1 4.EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 1 5.EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1 6.EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 3 Page 2 of 57NARRATIVEThis scenario starts with plant power at 35%. During turnover the BOP is directed to complete aDecay Heat Pump (P-34A) surveillance already in progress. After starting the Decay HeatPump and establishing the required flowrate P-34A pump will trip. The crew will declare P-34AINOPERABLE and the CRS will enter T.S. 3.5.2 Condition A (ECCS).Next, the Pressurizer ERV will start leaking which will require the ATC to recognize that theRCS pressure is below the ERV setpoint and close the isolation valve, the CRS will enter T.S.3.4.2 Condition A for the RCS Vent Path. (PRA)Next the temperature control valve for the Main Generator Hydrogen Coolers will fail, causingHydrogen pressure and temperature to rise. The BOP will take TIC-4018 to manual and opento restore normal temperature.Next the main turbine controlling header pressure instrument will fail resulting in the MainTurbine failing to control header pressure. The BOP will take manual control of the MainTurbine and the ATC will place the SG/Rx in hand and close the TBVs which responded to thefailed high pressure transmitter. The crew will determine the good header pressure signal andselect it for control. The Main Turbine, SG/Rx and TBVs will be returned to automatic.Next, an RCS leak will begin to develop and continue to degrade. Initial response will require adownpower to take the unit off line in accordance with Excess RCS Leakage and Rapid PlantShutdown AOPs. (PRA)The RCS leak will degrade to the point resulting in an automatic reactor trip with RCS pressurestabilizing below 150 psig which will result in a LOSM (PRA) and a transition to the ESAS EOP.CV-1400, (B LPI Isolation valve) will fail to open on ES Channel 4 actuation, a critical task willbe for the BOP to identify the failure and manually open CV-1400 to provide the only availableLPI flow. The RCS leak will also cause Reactor Building pressure to exceed the setpoint for ESChannels 5 and 6, these channels will fail to actuate and the ATC will have a critical task ofmanually actuating these channels in order to provide Reactor Building Isolation.PRA / IPE explanation:Key Operator actions include isolating the ERV when failed open and securing RCPs.Key equipment for potential risk increase includes ERV and LPI.Initiating events include a LOCA.Critical TasksCT Initiate LPI, the failure of CV-1400 to open coupled with the loss of P-34A results in NOLPI being available. The action of opening CV-1400 prior to completing RT-10 is the criteria foracceptable performance.CT Maintain RB Radiation Boundary, the failure of ES Channels 5 OR 6 to actuate must beidentified and corrected prior to exceeding the next ESAS actuation setpoint of 44 psig RBPressure, in order to meet the criteria for acceptable performanceCT Trip all RCPs,RCPs should be tripped within 2 minutes of LOSM following the reactor trip.

Page 3 of 57Appendix DRequired Operator ActionsForm ES-D-2Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low PressureInjection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOPPerform remainder of OP-1104.0014 Supplement 1NOTEWhen a P-34 is started, there is a pressure spike from the P-34discharge that is sensed in the RB Spray system. This raisedpressure can become trapped behind the RB Spray Pumpsuction check valve. It can take several hours after the P-34 isstopped to dissipate back to static pressure.

BOP2.23 Perform the following: Record LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) idle suctionpressure from LPI P-34A Suction Pressure (SPDSP1407) or local gauge in Table 2. Make plant announcement for start of LPI/DecayHeat Pump (P-34A).NOTEBeing prepared to time the stroke of CV-3840 is essential forproper data gathering.

BOP2.24 While timing the open stroke of LPI/Decay HeatPump Brg Clr E-50A Inlet (CV-3840) onC18, place LPI/Decay Heat Pump P-34Ahandswitch (HS-1417) to START.2.24.1 Verify LPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) pump start.2.24.2 Record stroke time in Table 6.2.25 IF BWST Suction piping exceeded 75 psig - n/a CAUTIONDecay Heat pump minimum continuous flow is 80 gpm.

Page 4 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low PressureInjection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorN/A2.26 IF sections of the Decay Heat system piping were drainedAND can NOT be vented - N/A BOP2.27 Adjust DHR Cooler E-35A Outlet (CV-1428) to raiseLPI/Decay Heat Pump (P-34A) discharge flow to3000-3030 gpm.

BOP2.28 Normal flow indication verifies stroking of thefollowing check valves: BWST Out Check to P-34A and P-35A (BW-4A) "A" DH Pump P-34A Disch Check (DH-2A)2.28.1 Record results in Table 6.

BOP2.29 Check LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler start indication on C19.2.29.1 Record results in Table 2.2.29.2 IF LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A)OR LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1B)breaker is open,THEN N/A steps 2.30 and 2.31.

Page 5 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low PressureInjection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP2.30 Place LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) handswitchon C19 to OFFAND check the following:2.30.1 LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) stops.2.30.2 After ~ 15 sec time delay: LPI ROOM COOLER TROUBLE(K11-C8) alarms. LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1B)start indication on C19.2.30.3 Record results in Table 2.2.31 Place LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) handswitchon C19 to AUTO.2.31.1 Check LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1A) starts.2.31.2 Check LPI/Decay Heat Room Cooler (VUC-1B)stops.2.31.3 Check K11-C8 clears.EXAMINER NOTE: Insert malfunction for P-34A at the lead examiner's discretion.

BOP2.32 Verify DHR Clr Service Water E-35A Inlet (CV-3822) open.

BOP2.33 Record highest "A" RB Spray Pump Suction Headerpressure indicated using P2426 AND/OR P2429:___________ psigNOTESPDS point F1401 is the SPDS point to be recorded. SPDSpoint F1401S (P-34A smoothed SPDS flow) can help determinewhen F1401 is near average for data collection in the followingstep.BOP2.34 Verify at least three minutes of stable operation.

Page 6 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Perform remainder of OP-1104.004 Supplement 1 - Low PressureInjection / Decay Heat Pump P-34A & Components Quarterly Test starting with Step 2.23.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP2.35 Gather data as follows:2.35.1 Gather necessary pump data and recordmeasured values in the appropriate spacesprovided in Table 3.2.35.2 Commence taking vibrometer readings per datasheet of this supplement.END OF SURVEILLANCEAdvance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion Page 7 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___P-34A Trip during Surveillance Testing .TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOPReference ACA per OP-1203.012H for K09-E8 forDH PUMP/MTR TEMP HICAUTION Maximum allowable motor bearing temperature is 190°F. Maximum allowable pump bearing temperature is 179°F. Maximum allowable motor winding temperature is 311°F.1. Determine which pump is in alarm by checking ReactorCoolant and Decay Heat Pumps Bearing Temperaturesrecorder (TR-6500) or Reactor Coolant, Makeup andDecay Heat Pumps Motor Winding Temperaturesrecorder (TR-6501) on C13.

N/A2. IF operating in non-ES mode, -N/A3. IF operating in ES modeAND both LPI loops (A and B) are in operation,THEN shut down the affected LPI Pump (P-34A)A. Determine cause of high temperature.4. Refer to TS 3.5.2.EXAMINER NOTE:Proceed to nextpagewhen P-34A trips.

Page 8 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___P-34A Trip during Surveillance Testing .TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorP-34A Decay Heat Pump trips during surveillance testing BOPReference ACA per OP-1203.012H for K09-A7 forDECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP N/A1. IF operating in normal DH mode ... N/A CRS2. IF operating at powerAND pump tripped during pump test,THEN verify the opposite train LPI operable.A. Enter TS 3.5.2 Condition A.B. IF train is NOT restored to operable status within 72hours, THEN place the plant in Mode 3 within 6 hour6.944444e-5 days <br />0.00167 hours <br />9.920635e-6 weeks <br />2.283e-6 months <br />sand cooldown the RCS to350F within 12 hours1.388889e-4 days <br />0.00333 hours <br />1.984127e-5 weeks <br />4.566e-6 months <br />.

N/A3. Refer to "Reclosing Tripped Individual Load SupplyBreakers" section of Electrical System Operations(1107.001).

N/A4. IF any of the following conditions exist, - N/A N/A5. IF in Mode 4 or Mode 3 with RCS350F, ... N/A BOP N/A6. To clear alarm, perform either of the following:A. Place HS for affected pump inNORMAL-AFTER-STOP orPULL-TO-LOCK.B. Close breaker for affected pump (A-305 for P-34A,A-405 for P-34B).BOP / CRS Discuss backing out of the procedure to restore system alignmentas time allows.

BOPDirect WCO to realign test and recirc header based on discussion with CRS.END OF P-34A TRIPAdvance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion Page 9 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

2__Event

Description:

_____ERV Leaking requires ERV Isolation and entry into TRM 3.4.2

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorERV Leakage BOPReference ACA per OP-1203.012H for K09-A1 forRELIEF VALVE OPEN ATC1. Identify open relief by checking analog position indicationsand Hi-Alarm lights on panel C486-1.

N/A2. IF desired, - N/A CRS3. Refer to Pressurizer Systems Failure (1203.015).NOTEIf a relief valve is open, Quench Tank (T-42) temperature shouldgo to saturation for its pressure.

BOP4. Monitor Quench Tank pressure, level and temperature.NOTETemperature elements downstream of each PSV indicate valveposition. Temps are available on SPDS:PZR PSV-1002 Outlet Temp (T1027)PZR PSV-1001 Outlet Temp (T1026)ERV PSV-1000 Outlet Temp (T1025)

N/A5. IF relief valve TEs read normal - N/A N/A6. IF XI-1000 keyswitch was placed in SILENCE ALARM - N/A CRSPressurizer Systems Failure (OP-1203.015) Section 1 ATC 1.Close Pressurizer ERV Isolation Valve (CV

-1000).A.IF CRS/SM desires,THEN override CV-1000 torqueswitch by holding the handswitch in the desiredposition.N/A 2.IFERV leakage with CV

-1000 closed exceeds capabilityto maintain RCS pressure,THEN trip reactor AND perform Reactor Trip (1202.001)while continuing with this procedure.

Page 10 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

2__Event

Description:

_____ERV Leaking requires ERV Isolation and entry into TRM 3.4.2

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRS 3.IF closing CV

-1000 stops leak,THEN perform the following:A. Continue power operations with ERV isolated.B. Notify Senior Manager, Operations.C. Log in station log and on plant status board.

CRS 5.IFERV (PSV-1000) is inoperable,OR ERV Isolation Valve (CV-1000) is inoperable,THEN perform the following:A. Close ERV Isolation.B. Maintain ERV vent path closed AND refer to TRM 3.4.2.C. Place caution tag on CV-1000 handswitch stating, "Useas required by EOP and then only as a last resort".D. Initiate a Condition Report.EXAMINER NOTE: CRS Should enter TRM 3.4.2 Condition A. Step 7 directs him toreference T.S. 3.4.1, however he should not enter the specification.

CRS 6.IF CV-1000 is closed,THEN perform the following:A. Assess risk using Risk Assessment Guidelines(COPD-24).B. Update System Alignments in EOOS to reflect CV-1000closed.CRS 7.Refer to "RCS Pressure, Temperature and Flow DNBSurveillance Limits" of the ANO1 COLR (TS 3.4.1).END OF ERV LEAKAGEAdvance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion. NOTE alarm for next event takes 5minutes to build in, consider inserting malfunction while applicant is reviewing TRMand T.S.

Page 11 of 57Op-Test No.: _2016-1_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

3__Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails__________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorReference ACA 1203.012C for K05-D5 for H2/SEAL OILTROUBLE.BOP1. Observe Generator Monitoring System CRT (QS-9504) orPlant Computer for alarm messages.FieldOperator2. Go to H 2 Control Panel (M27) alarm reflash unit (K1648) todetermine cause of alarm.FieldOperator3. IF no alarm is visible on K1648 reflash unit, - N/A CRS4. IF alarm is indicated on K1648,THEN refer to Attachment B for further instructions.BOOTH:Inform CRS that the cause of alarm is HYDROGEN PRESSURE HI N/A1. IF cause of reduced hydrogen pressure is known, - N/A BOP2. Monitor H 2 temperature and cooling water flows whileperforming the following:A. IF H 2 pressure high,THEN vent hydrogen from generator by performing"Main Generator Pressure and Purity Adjustments"of 1106.002 Exhibit A until the high pressure alarmclears and system is within allowable operatingrange.N/A3. IF H 2 leakage is suspected, - N/AEXAMINER NOTE:Crew should identify that H2 temperature is high and take appropriateactions as addressed on following pages.

Page 12 of 57Op-Test No.: _2016-1_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

3__Event

Description:

___ CV-4018 Temperature Control Valve Fails__________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorReference ACA 1203.012C for K04-B6 forGENERATOR H2 TEMPERATURE HI BOP1. Check the following to determine the point in alarm: Generator and Coolers Gas Outlet Temperatures(TR-9001) Plant Monitoring System Dynamic Alarm Display BOP 2.For generator temperature alarms, perform the following asapplicable:A. IF any Gen H 2Cooler Outlet (TR-9001, points 7 thru10) is >125F, THEN perform the following: IF all hydrogen coolers have high or risingtemperature,AND Generator H2 Temp Control CV-4018(TIC-4018)on C19 is NOT at setpoint,THEN place TIC-4018 in "M" (manual).(1) Rotate TIC-4018 MAN ADJknob to adjust total ACWflow to coolers as needed.(2) Inspect Generator HydrogenTemperature Control Valve(CV-4018) locally.BOOTH:Delete malfunction when TIC

-4018 is taken to manual to allow control from thecontrol room.EXAMINER NOTE:Once the BOP takes manual control of the TIC the malfunction will beremoved which will allow the BOP to control temperature. The rest of the steps will not benecessary and the next event can be initiated.

Page 13 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

4__Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high duringdownpower and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will berequired to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorControlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails highReference ICS Abnormal Operations AOP (OP-1203.001)Section 7, Selected Turbine Header Pressure High BOP ATC ATC 1.Perform the following:Verify Turbine in OPER AUTO OR TURB MAN control.

-IF Turbine in OPER AUTO,THEN perform the following:A. While monitoring SG pressure, adjust SETTER asnecessary to stabilize steam header pressure andRCS Pressure.B. Depress GO pushbutton AND release.C. Verify REFERENCE matches SETTER.

-IF Turbine in TURB MAN,THEN while monitoring SG pressure, operate GVpushbuttons as necessary on C01 Lower OperatorConsole to stabilize steam header pressure and RCSpressure.Verify SG/RX Demand H/A station in HAND.Place BOTH TURB BYP Valve H/A stations in HAND.

ATC 2.IF open,THEN while monitoring turbine load and SG pressureclose LOOP A and LOOP B TURBINE BYPASS VALVES.

ATC 3.Select the good Turbine Header Pressure instrument forindication. Steam Header B PT-2633 (NNI-Y)

N/A 4.Lower SG/RX Demand H/Astation as necessary tostabilize power < 100%.

Page 14 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

4__Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high duringdownpower and requires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will berequired to close TBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control.TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior 5.Proceed as directed by CRS/SM.EXAMINER NOTE: The following stepswill return ICS to automatic control.EXAMINER CU E:If the crew pursues taking all of ICS to manual per Step 8.0, direct themas SM to take individual stations to Auto, rather than taking all major stations to handthen auto.9.0 Turbine Control Transfer to Integrated Control ATC9.1 Verify main steam header pressure is at the setpoint selectedon Header Pressure Controlling substation.

BOP9.2 Monitor Governor Valve demand and the following PMS/PDSpoints for stable conditions: IC57 TVGV XFER TO SEL HDR PRES (PPAS) EH02 GOVERNOR VLV DEMAND (PPAS) ZT6631 GOVERNOR VLV #1 POSITION (PPAS) ZT6662 GOVERNOR VLV #2 POSITION (PPAS) ZT6628 GOVERNOR VLV #3 POSITION (PPAS) ZT6661 GOVERNOR VLV #4 POSITION (PPAS)

Page 15 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

4__Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high andrequires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to closeTBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue thedownpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorCAUTIONIf Turbine Bypass Valves are open in AUTO and unit loaddemand rises above 15% (~135 MWe), then the valves willbe rapidly closed, possibly creating a significant pressuretransient.

N/A9.3 IF Unit Load Demand is approaching 15% ... N/ANOTEIf header pressure error is >+/-50 psig, then Turbine Control willnot transfer into INTEG CONTROL.When placing the turbine in integrated control, instabilitiesoccurred when Reference Counter was between 60% and75%.BOP9.4 WHEN Turbine Bypass Valves are fully closed AND 50 psibias is applied, THEN verify Turbine Control in OPER AUTO.9.4.1 Closely monitor Turbine HeaderPressure and PMS/PDS forindications of turbine instability.

BOP9.5 WHEN turbine header pressure is at setpoint (5 psi) ANDstable (rate of change <10 psi/minute), THEN transferturbine controls as follows:9.5.1 Depress INTEG CONTROL button on C33.9.5.2 Check OPER AUTO and TURBINE MANUALlamps off.9.5.3 Check INTEG CONTROL lamp lit.9.5.4 IF UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1) is inalarm due to turbine mode only,THEN check UNIT MASTER IN TRACK(K07-A1) clear.

BOP9.6 Verify turbine control is steady.

Page 16 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

4__Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high andrequires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to closeTBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue thedownpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE: The following steps will return SG/RX Demand to Automatic14.0 SG/RX Demand Transfer to AutoNOTE With SG/RX Demand in HAND and when plant efficiencychanges occur (such as changes in condenser vacuum orcirc water flow), changes in generated megawatts will createa difference between POS and MEAS VAR. If MW & PRESS COMP ULD (IC01) and SG/RX H/A StationOutput (IC03) are approximately equal, then a bumplesstransfer should occur when SG/RX Demand is placed into AUTO. POS reads SG/RX Demand H/A station output (handdemand, analog memory) 0-1000 MWe (IC03). MEAS VAR reads rate-limited ULD (before calibratingintegral) 0-1000 MWe (UL02).

ATC14.1 Check that POS and MEAS VAR demands areapproximately equal (normally 2% or less).

BOP14.2 IF PDS is available,THEN check that SG/RX Demand the following are within 30MW of each other: MW & PRESS COMP ULD, IC01 (input) SG/RX H/A Station Output, IC03 (output)CAUTIONIf POS and MEAS VAR differ significantly (>3% or >30 MW),placing SG/RX Demand in AUTO can cause a plant transient. Ifdeviation cannot be corrected, then an ICS auto-balancingcircuit malfunction might exist.

Page 17 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

4__Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high andrequires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to closeTBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue thedownpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorCRITICAL STEP ATC14.2.1IF significant error exists, such as one of the following: >3% between POS and MEAS VAR >30 MW between IC01 and IC03THEN perform one of the following: Notify CRS/SM AND obtainpermission prior to proceeding. Place applicable H/A stations inmanual and re-perform applicablesections of this procedure.14.3Place SG/RX Demand H/A station in AUTO.19.1Turbine Bypass Valve Transfer to Auto PREFERREDMethod.CAUTIONTo ensure bumpless transfer, a transfer of H/A station fromHAND to AUTO is not made without first minimizing errorbetween MEAS VAR and POS.NOTEPOS reads hand demand (analog memory). MEAS VAR readsbiased header pressure error (50% = null).19.1.1Verify MEAS VAR reads less than or equal to50%.

Page 18 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016-1_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

4__Event

Description:

___Main Turbine Controlling Header Pressure Transmitter fails high andrequires intervention by the BOP to control the main turbine. The ATC will be required to closeTBVs. The crew will determine and select the good transmitter for control and will continue thedownpower with the SG/RX Demand in manual._____________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior19.1.2 Verify Turb Byp Valves are fully closed: Loop A (CV-6689, CV-6690) Loop B (CV-6687, CV-6688)19.1.3 Place applicable Turb Byp Valves H/A station in AUTO.19.1.4 Verify Header Pressure and Turbine Controlremain steady.EXAMINER NOTE:Once the crew hasstabilized the plant and returned ICS to auto, readyto proceed to the next event.Advance to next event Page 19 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

5__Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorRCS Hotleg leak BOPReference ACA per OP-1203.012I for K10-B2 forPROC MONITOR RADIATION HI BOP1. Check panels C486-2 and C25 (Bays l, 2, 3) to determinewhich process monitor is in alarm.A. IF alarm is on RB Atmos Gaseous Monitor (RI-7461),THEN GO TO step 13.EXAMINER NOTE: Applicants can also determine cause of alarm using the Plant Computerand may not get into the ACA rather once they determine the alarm is from RI-7460proceed directly to Excess RCS Leakage AOP (OP-1203.039). Refer to the Entryconditions listed on the next page, which justifies why it is acceptable to skip the ACAguidance of leak investigation per OP-1103.013.NOTE HIGH alarm condition on RI-7461 is indicated by a red lampand a flashing "H" on monitor display. Alarm setpoint is adjustable at RI-7461 on C25 and is set perRadiation Monitoring System Check and Test (1305.001),Supplement 5. Alarm setpoint for RI-7461 can be read by repeatedlypressing the MODE key until HighAlm value is displayed.

BOP13. IF RB Atmos Gaseous Monitor (RI-7461) radiation is high,THEN perform the following:A. Compare counts to High Alarm setpoint bydepressing MODE key until HighAlm valueis displayed.B. IF alarm is caused by instantaneous spiking -

N/A C.IF alarm is due to rise in activity and confirmationis warranted, - N/A Page 20 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

5__Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior D.IF alarm is confirmed,THEN perform the following: IF RCS is > 200°F,THEN perform RCS Leak Detection (1103.013).IF reactor building is open for access, ... N/AE. Monitor RDACs. IF rising trend is observed,THEN notify Chemistry to perform Offsite DoseProjections (1904.002).Notify SM to review Emergency Action Level Classification(1903.010).

CRSExcess RCS Leakage AOP (OP-1203.039)ENTRY CONDITIONNOTEThis procedure is intended for RCS leak rates which pose a threatto plant operations but do not require use of Emergency OperatingProcedures. Small RCS leaks which are not an immediate threatto plant operations are addressed in RCS Leak Detection(1103.013).One or more of the following: Unexplained drop in makeup tank level Unexplained mismatch between RCS in-flow and out-flow Unexplained rise in reactor building temperature, pressure, orsump level Unexplained rise in reactor building dew point (PMS/PDSM6278, M6278RTD, M6279, M6279RTD) RB Leak Detector (RX-7460) high alarm(s) or rising activity Page 21 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

5__Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior N/A 1.IFHPI is required to maintain RCS inventoryAND SG tube leakage is not indicated,THEN trip the reactor AND perform Reactor Trip(1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.

BOP 2.IF desired,THEN open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407) to OP HPI pump.

ATC 3.IF desired,THEN perform one of the following: Reduce letdown flow by closing Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) Isolate Letdown by closing either: Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS): CV-1214 CV-1216 CRS 4.IFlocation of leak is known,THEN perform the applicable step(s): RB Sump Inleakagestep 5 BOP 5.Monitor RB parameters: Humidity (PMS/PDS M6278, M6278RTD, M6279,M6279RTD) RB temperature RB pressure RB Sump level Page 22 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

5__Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior A.IFleakage into RB Sump is indicated,THEN perform the following:1) Consider performing Repetitive Tasks (1202.012),Maximize RB Cooling (RT-9).2) Determine RCS Leakrate (Exhibit 1).

3)GO TO step 16

.BOPDetermine RCS Leakrate per Exhibit 1EXAMINER NOTE: RCS leak is greater than theT.S. limit of 1 gpm unidentified and the CRSshould enter T.S. 3.4.13 Condition A. Final leak rate for this event is ~35 gpm.

CRS 16.IFtotal RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by TechSpec 3.4.13AND poses an immediate threat to plant operations,THEN perform the following:A. IF reactor is Critical,THEN commence plant shutdown per Rapid PlantShutdown (1203.045).

CRSCommence plant shutdown per Rapid Plant Shutdown.Section 1, Rapid Plant Shutdown Without Small SG Tube LeakNOTEShutdown rate shall be based on plant conditions and safetyconsiderations. Rate may be raised or lowered at any timeas plant conditions necessitate.Recommended shutdown rates for RCS leaks insidecontainment with no additional complications are as follows:

-< 50 gpm -- 0.5 to 5% per minute

- 50 gpm -- 5 to 10% per minuteUse of this procedure may be terminated at any point if acomplete shutdown is not required.Net Generation can be monitored using PMS point JNETGEN.Steady state reactivity controls per ANO ReactivityManagement Program (COPD-030) are not applicable.

Page 23 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

5__Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC CRS N/A CRS BOP BOP N/A 1.Commence power reduction at 0.5 to 10% per minute. IF power reduction isNOT due to automaticrunback,THEN verify ATC has been given a specific endpoint for the power reduction and rate of desiredpower change. IF power reduction is due to automatic runback, - N/A Instruct ATC to report power level at CRS directedfrequency. IF power reduction is due to RCS leak or steam leakinside RB,THEN maximize RB cooling per RT-9. IF necessary to maintain Makeup tank level,THEN open BWST T3 Outlet to operating HPI Pump(CV-1407 or CV-1408)ANDminimize or isolate Letdown. IF power reduction is due to Dispatcher request, - N/AATC / BOP 2.Monitor ICS and EHC subsystems for proper integratedresponse.Manual control of ICS or EHC subsystemsmay be initiated at any time deemedappropriate by the operator.As MFW Block Valve Closure setpoint isapproached (~45% FW Loop Demand),monitor the following ICS feedwater PDSpoints (as a minimum): FW23, MFW VLV CONTROL OUT LPA FW27, MFW VLV CONTROL OUT LPB FW19, LIMITED MFW FLW ERR LPA (MFWflow error Loop A)FW20, LIMITED MFW FLW ERR LPB (MFWflow error Loop B)

Page 24 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

5__Event

Description:

_____RCS Leak develops requiring plant shutdown

__TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorUpon closure of each MFW Block, check ICSfeedwater PDS points respond as expected: FW23 and FW 27 track together and lowerwith power reduction. FW19 and FW20 remain near zero. IF PDS points doNOT respond as expectedwith MFW Block closed, - N/A IF desired to restore automatic control of a subsystem,THEN refer to Integrated Control System (1105.004). IF desired to stop downpower above final ULDsetpoint,THEN perform Operations of SG/RX DemandHand/Auto Station (Exhibit 1) of thisprocedure.EXAMINER NOTE

The following step allows for stopping the downpower if cause has beencorrected, that is not the case so Step 3 is N/A.

N/A 3.IFplant has been stabilized with the reactor critical,THEN perform the following:EXAMINER NOTE: Insert next event at lead examiner discretion during the downpower.The downpower will continue to take the plant off line.

ATC BOP BOP7. WHENMain Generator output 350 MW,AND main turbine will be shutdown,THEN perform the following:A. Set Lo-Load Limit at minimum.B. Open Turbine Bypass Condenser Sprays (HS-2858 onC02).C. Verify HP Turbine Drains open (HS-6627 on C02).Advance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion Page 25 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorLarge RCS Leak ATC 1.Depress ReactorTrip PB.A. Verify all rods insertedANDreactor power dropping.

BOP 2.Depress Turbine trip PB.A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

ALL 3.Check adequate SCM.

BOPCritical Task3. Check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCMANDperform the following:

A.IF 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN trip all RCPs: P32A P32C P32B P32D B.IF > 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN leave currently running RCPs on.C. Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency ActionLevel Classification (1903.010).D. Perform the following:

1)IF 4160V bus A1 or A2 is energized,THENGO TO 1202.002, "LOSS OFSUBCOOLING MARGIN" procedure.

2)IF only EDG power is supplying 4160V buses,THENGO TO 1202.007,"DEGRADED POWER"procedure.

Page 26 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorTransition to Loss Of Subcooling Margin EOPCAUTIONTripping all RCPs > 2 minutes after loss of adequate SCM couldcause reactor core to become uncovered.

BOP BOP ATC CRS 1.Check elapsed timesince loss of adequate SCM ANDperform the following:

A.IF 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN trip all RCPs: P-32A P-32C P-32B P-32DB. Initiate full HPI (RT-3).

1)IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).C. Verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).D. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floatingsteps.ATC2. IF a feed source other than MFW is available,THEN trip both MFW pumps:A Main Feed PumpB Main Feed Pump ATC3. Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

ATC4. Check RCS press 150 psig.

Page 27 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior N/A 5.IF RCS T-cold is < 540F and dropping ANDRB and AUX Building Sump levels are stable ANDSCM is adequate,THEN GO TO 1202.003, "OVERCOOLING" procedure.

ATC6. Isolate Pressurizer Spray Line as follows:A. Place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode in MANANDverify Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) closed (modulatingvalve).B. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

ATC 7.IFboth of the following conditions exist:HPI cooling is not in progressERV was not opened by procedure to intentionallydepressurize the RCSTHEN verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.ATC 8.Check Nuclear Loop ICW process monitor alarm clear.N/A 9.IF CET temps are superheated ANDmoving away from the saturation line,THEN GO TO 1202.005, "INADEQUATE CORE COOLING"procedure.

ATC10. Check SG tube integrity (RT-18).

ATC11. IF SCM is adequate,THEN control RCS press low within limits of Figure 3(RT-14).

Page 28 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC12. Check RCS press remains 150 psig.

CRS 12.GOTO 1202.010, "ESAS"procedure.

CRSTransition to ESAS EOP ATC 1.Check adequate SCM.

CRS BOP ATC 2.Direct Control Board Operators to perform the following:Verify proper ESAS actuation (RT-10) Monitor floating steps BOPCriticalTaskDuring performance of RT

-10 the BOP will identify that CV

-1400 has failed to openEXAMINER NOTE:Identification and correction of CV

-1400 failure is a***CRITICALTASK*** that must be completed before announcing RT-10 is complete.

ATC 3.IFMakeup Tank level drops below 18",THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).N/A 4.IFESAS actuated on high RB press alone

- N/A ATC5. Isolate Pressurizer Spray Line as follows:A. Place Pressurizer Spray Control Mode in MANANDverify Pressurizer Spray valve (CV-1008) closed(modulating valve).B. Close Pressurizer Spray Isolation (CV-1009).

ATC 6.IFthe following conditions exist:HPI cooling is not in progressERV was not opened by procedure to intentionallydepressurize the RCSTHEN verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) closed.ATC 7.Check NUC ICW Monitor (RI-2236) alarm clear.

ATC 8.Check SG tube integrity (RT

-18).

Page 29 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC 9.Check RCS press remains >

150 psig.CRS 9.GO TOstep 13.NOTEAligning Pressurizer AUX Spray to LPI system before going onsump recirc reduces personnel exposure should the lineup berequired for boron precipitation mitigation at a later time. Transferto RB Sump suction must commence when BWST level reaches 6',even if this alignment is not complete.

CRS13. Dispatch an operator to perform Decay Heat RemovalOperating Procedure (1104.004), "DH System Aux SprayAlignment Prior to RB Sump Recirc" section.

A.IF BWST level reaches 6' before alignment is complete,THEN notify dispatched operator to exit the Aux Bldg,regardless of alignment status, until transfer to RB sumpsuction is complete and radiation levels can be determined.

BOP 14.Check LPI flow meets the following criteria: 2 LPI pumps 1 LPI pump >2800 gpm/pump >3050 gpm/pumpA. Override all HPI pumps: P36A P36B (C18) P36B (C16) P36C Page 30 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOPB. Perform the following to secure HPI:1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for running HPI pumps:P36A P36B P36CP64A P64B P64C2) Stop running HPI pumps: P36A P36B P36C3) Override AND close all HPI Block valves. P36A/B P36B/CCV-1219 CV-1227CV-1220 CV-1228CV-1278 CV-1284CV-1279 CV-12854) Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

BOPC. Dispatch an operator to isolate CFTs as follows:1) Remove Danger Tag, unlock AND close CoreFlood Tank Outlet supply breakers: B5661 B55452) Close Core Flood Tank Outlet valves: CV-2415 CV-24193) Open AND lock Core Flood Tank Outlet supplybreakers: B5661 B5545 Page 31 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP ATC ATC ATCD. Verify all RCPs secured.E. Perform the following to secure EFW:1) Place EFW pump (P7B) in PULL-TO-LOCK.2) Place EFW pump Turbine K3 Steam Admissionvalves in MANUAL AND close: CV-2613 CV-2663F. Close Main Feedwater Isolation valves: CV-2630 CV-2680G. Close MSIVs: CV-2691 CV-2692 H.GO TO step 18.CAUTIONFull flow from both trains of HPI, LPI, and RB Spray can reduceBWST level to 6' within 25 minutes of ESAS actuation.

Page 32 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP CRS BOP BOP BOP18. Before BWST level reaches 6', perform the following:A. Verify RB Sump Outlets open: CV-1414 CV-1415B. Evacuate all unnecessary personnel from AuxiliaryBuilding in preparation for RB sump recirculation.

C.IF RB Spray has actuated,THEN verify RB Spray flow throttled to maintain 1050 to1200 gpm per train.D. Verify both Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pumpsrunning: P34A P34B 1)IF either Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat)Pump is unavailable,THEN stop associated HPI pump. P34A P34B P36A/B P36B/C E.IF HPI is in service,THEN verify both Decay Heat Supply to Makeup PumpSuctions open: CV-1276 CV-1277 1)IF CV-1276 or CV-1277 fails to open,THEN stop associated HPI pump:CV-1276 CV-1277 P36A/B P36B/C Page 33 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

6__Event

Description:

____Large RCS Leak results in an automatic Reactor Trip, LOSM and ESASActuation. The leak is large enough to cause RCS pressure to stabilize below 150 psig.

___TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorWARNINGIf core is significantly damaged, initiation of sump recirculation maycause high radiation in areas near HPI, LPI, and RB Spray systempiping.CAUTION Failure to throttle RB Spray before initiating sump recirc mayresult in inadequate pump suction press. Full flow from both trains of HPI, LPI, and RB Spray canremove 6' of water from BWST in 5 minutes. The next step is a time-critical action. Do not delayperformance of this step for administrative reasons.

BOP 19.WHENBWST level reaches 6',THEN shift to RB sump suction per Attachment 1.

Next eventcommences when RB pressure exceeds 4 psig.

Page 34 of 57Op-Test No.:

_2016_Scenario No.: _

3__Event No.: _

8__Event

Description:

___ES Channel 5 and 6 fail to actuate_________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorES Channels 5 and 6 fail to actuateEXAMINER NOTE:ES Channels 5 and 6 actuate based on Reactor Building pressureand should have actuated at 4 psig (18.7 psia).

CrewRecognize that ES Channels 5 and 6 failed to actuate.

ATCCriticalTaskActuate Channels 5 OR 6 BOPPerform RT-10 for Channels 5 and 6 components.EXAMINER NOTE:Manual actuation ofES Channels 5 OR 6is a***CRITICAL TASK***that must be completed prior to exceeding the setpoint for channels 7 - 10 which isReactor Building pressure of 44.7 psia.

When RT-10 is complete and the CRS has transitioned to ESASFreeze at lead evaluator discretion Page 35 of 57SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKSANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input fromOperations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The followingpages come from that document.At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1exam.

Page 36 of 57CT-4Initiate LPICT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water massTBD DescriptionInitiate LPI anytime LPI initiation setpoints are reached.TBD ConditionsLPI initiation setpoints reached.Associated GEOG Bases:ANO Version(s)(1) P-34A LPI Pump must be started before commencing sump recirculation alignment. (Thesump recirculation alignment will make P-34B not available; therefore, P-34A is required tomaintain LPI safety function.)(2) ESAS Channels 3 and 4 should be manually actuated prior to actuation of ES Channels 7-10 due to Hi-Hi RB Pressure (44 psig).(3) At least one LPI must be manually started before RT10 is announced as being completed.SES usedJustification for ANO(1) P-34A LPI Pump must be started before commencing sump recirc alignment. (The sumprecirc alignment will make P-34B not available; therefore, P-34A is required to maintain LPIsafety function.)(2) Actuation of ES Channels 3&4 prior to reaching the next ESAS actuation set point of 44psigRB pressure provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that proper safety systemactuation did not occur and then to manually actuate the failed channels to ensure LPIsafety function is met.(3) The ESAS start signals to P34A/B are failed in this scenario. Starting at least one LPI pumpprior to RT-10 being announced as complete provides a reasonable time for the crew toutilize proper procedure guidance to restore LPI safety function.

Page 37 of 57For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (3) is applicable. The failure of CV-1400 to opencoupled with the loss of P-34A results in NO LPI being available. The action of openingCV-1400 prior to completing RT-10 is the criteria for acceptable performance.

Page 38 of 57CT-19Maintain RB Radiation Boundary (includes SG tubes)CT based on: Isolate possible RCS leak pathsTBD DescriptionOperate RB cooling and spray systems to maintain RB temperature and pressure within normal limits.TBD ConditionsOperation of RB isolation and cooling systems when their respective actuation setpoints arereached or RB atmosphere is being degraded due to HPI cooling.Associated GEOG Bases:ANO Version(s)(1) ES channel 3 actuated before RT-10 is reported as complete(2) ESAS should be manually actuated before Reactor Building pressure exceeds 44 PSIA(Prior to ESAS Channels 7 through 10 auto actuating).(3) ESAS Channels 3 and 4 should be manually actuated within four minutes of ESAS Channels1 and 2 actuating.SES used Page 39 of 57Justification for ANO:(1) ES Channel 3 will fail to actuate and require operator action to ensure that the RB Radiationboundary is protected. Performing this action prior to announcement of RT-10 completeprovides a reasonable time for the crew to utilize procedural guidance to determine that thechannel is failed and to implement actions to correct.(2) Actuation of ES Channels 1-6 is critical to provide the required safety functions associatedwith those respective channels when automatic actuation fails to occur. Performing thisaction prior to the next actuation setpoint of 44# provides a reasonable time for the crew todetermine that the safety functions are not being met and to implement actions to correct.(3) Actuation of ES Channels 3&4 prior to reaching the next ESAS actuation set point of 44psigRB pressure provides a reasonable time for the crew to determine that proper safety systemactuation did not occur and then to manually actuate the failed channels to ensure DiverseContainment function is met.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (2) is applicable. The failure of ES Channels 5 & 6to actuate must be identified and corrected prior to exceeding the next ESAS actuationsetpoint of 44 psig RB Pressure, EITHER Channel 5 OR 6 must be manually actuated inorder to meet the criteria for acceptable performance. This provides reasonable time forthe crew to determine that the safety functions are not being met and to implementactions to correct the issue.

Page 40 of 57CT-1Trip all RCPs(Rule 1.0)CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water massTBD DescriptionTrip all RCPs immediately, no later than 1 or 2 minTBD ConditionsAnytime adequate SCM is lostAssociated GEOG BASES:ANO Version(s)The RCPs should be tripped within two minutes of a Loss of Adequate Subcooling Margin.*TCOA per OP-1015.050*Justification for ANOAs described in the TBD.As noted above, this is a Time Critical Operator Action per OP-1015.050.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria RCPs should be tripped within 2 minutes of LOSM followingthe reactor trip.

Page 41 of 57RT-9MAXIMIZE RB COOLING1. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running: VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1D2. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves: CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-38153. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers: SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413END Page 42 of 57Page 1 of 4RT-5VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL1. Verify EFW actuation indicated on C09:Train A:Train B: Bus 1 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 2NOTETable 1 contains EFW fill rate and level bands for various plant conditions.2. Verify at least one EFW pump (P7A or P7B) running with flow to SG(s) throughapplicableEFW CNTRL valve(s).

SG A SG BCV-2645 P7ACV-2647CV-2646 P7BCV-26483. IF SCM is not adequate,THEN perform the following:A. Select Reflux Boiling setpoint for the following: Train A Train BNOTETable 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.B. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain SG levels 370 to 410".

Page 43 of 57Page 2 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL3. (Continued) 1)IF both SGs are available,THEN verify SG level rising and tracking EFIC setpoint until 370 to 410" isestablished.

a)IF EFW flow is less than adequate,THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND to maintain 340 gpm toapplicable SG until level is 370 to 410".

b)IF EFW flow is excessiveAND> 340 gpm to either SG,THEN throttle EFW to applicable SG in HAND to limit SGdepressurization.

Do not throttle below 340 gpm on either SG until SG level is 370 to 410".

2)IF only one SG is available,THEN feed available SG in HAND at 570 gpm until SG level is 370 to 410".

3)IF EFW is being controlled in HANDANDSG press drops below 720 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling,THEN continue feeding at required minimum rateAND perform the following:a) Bypass MSLI by momentarily placing SG Bypass toggle switch on eachEFIC cabinet Initiate module in BYPASS. C37-3 C37-4 C37-1 C37-2b) Place applicable EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG BCV-2645 P7ACV-2647CV-2646 P7BCV-2648c) Place applicable EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL.

SG A SG BCV-2627 P7ACV-2620CV-2670 P7BCV-2626Page 3 of 4 Page 44 of 57VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL4. IF SCM is adequate,THEN perform the following:CAUTIONExcessive EFW flow can result in loss of SCM due to RCS shrinkage.NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow. Expect CETs to rise until natural circ conditions are established. If EFW flow control is in HAND,additional flow may not be necessary to prevent rising CETs until natural circ conditions areestablished.A. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain applicable SG levelband per Table 1.

1)IF EFW flow is less than adequate OREFW flow is excessive,THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND as necessary to ensure thefollowing: Maintain sufficient EFW flow to prevent rise in CET temp. Maintain continuous EFW flow until applicable level band is reached. Maintain sufficient EFW flow to ensure SG level is either stable OR rising until applicable level band is reached.5. IF all RCPs are off,THEN check primary to secondary heat transfer in progress indicated by all of thefollowing: T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2) T-hot tracking CET temps T-hot/T-coldT stable or dropping6. Monitor EMERGENCY FEEDWATER and EFIC alarms on K12.

Page 45 of 57Page 4 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROLTable 1EFIC Automatic Level Control SetpointsConditionLevel BandAutomatic Fill RateAny RCP running 20 to 40"No fill rate limitAll RCPs off and Natural Circ selected300 to 340"2 to 8"/minAll RCPs off and Reflux Boiling selected370 to 410"2 to 8"/minTable 2Examples of Less Than Adequate EFW Flow Indications SG level < 20" and no EFW flow indicated All RCPs off and SG level not tracking EFIC calculated setpoint All RCPs off and EFIC level setpoint not trending toward applicable level bandExamples of Excessive EFW Flow Indications SG press drops 100 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling SCM approaching minimum adequate due to EFW flow induced overcooling EFW CNTRL valve open with associated SG level > applicable setpoint level bandEND Page 46 of 57RT-18Page 1 of 1CHECK SG TUBE INTEGRITY1. Check the following indications:None of the following radiation monitor indications rising OR in alarm:

-Main Condenser process monitor (RI-3632)

-Either OTSG N-16 Gross Detector:

  • RI-2691*RI-2692-Either Steam Line High Range Radiation Monitor:
  • RI-2681*RI-2682No report from Nuclear Chemistry that SG tube leak exists.No rise in unidentified RCS leakage accompanied by:

-Higher than expected SG level

-Lower than expected FW flow rateEND Page 47 of 57RT-14Page 1 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESSNOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred: HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control. When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply. PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists,THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig,THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.3. IF PZR steam space leak exists,THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.

B.IF SCM is adequate,THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Throttle HPI.C. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdownper RT-13.D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 48 of 57Page 2 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. IF RCS press is high,THEN limit press using one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met: HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13013) Throttle HPI.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D.IF PZR AUX Spray is in service,THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.F. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdownper RT-13.G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 49 of 57Page 3 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. (Continued)

H.IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),THEN perform the following:1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36CP64AP64B P64C2) Stop desired HPI pump(s): P36A P36B P36C3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:P36A/BP36B/C CV-1219 CV-1220 CV-1278 CV-1279 CV-1227 CV-1228 CV-1284 CV-12855. IF RCS press is low,THEN raise press using one or more of the following:A. Raise makeup flow.B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.D. Reduce Letdown flow.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 50 of 57Page 4 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS5. (CONTINUED)CAUTIONIf HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPIcooling is no longer required.F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation(CV-1000) closed.CAUTIONWith RCS solid, 1F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.6. IF PZR is solid,THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature. Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS pressNOTEAdjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flowon-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate andcooldown rate.7. IF normal makeup is in service ANDHPI is in service,THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintainnormal makeup flow on-scale.END Page 51 of 57RT-10Page 1 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATIONNOTEObtain Shift Manager/CRS permission prior to overriding ES.1. Verify BWST T3 Outlets open: CV-1407 CV-1408 A.IFBWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) fails to open,THEN override AND stop associated HPI, LPI, and RB Spray pumps until failedvalve is opened:CV-1407CV-1408P34AP34BP36A/BP36C/BP35AP35B2. Verify SERV WTR to DG1 and DG2 CLRs open: CV-3806 CV-3807 Page 52 of 57Page 2 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION3. IF any RCP is running,THEN perform the following:

A.IF ES Channel 5 or 6 has actuated,THEN perform the following:

1)IF SCM is adequate,THEN trip all running RCPs due to loss of ICW: P32A P32C P32B P32D 2)IF SCM is not adequate,THEN check elapsed time since loss of adequate SCMAND perform the following:

a)IF 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN trip all RCPs: P32A P32C P32B P32D b)IF > 2 minutes have elapsed,THEN perform the following:(1) Leave currently running RCPs on.(2)IF RCS press > 150 psig,THEN notify CRS toGO TO 1202.002, "LOSS OF SUBCOOLINGMARGIN"procedure.(3) Restore RCP services per RT-8 while continuing.

B.IF neither ES channel 5 nor 6 has actuated,THEN dispatch an operator to performService Water And Auxiliary Cooling System(1104.029) Exhibit B, "Restoring SW to ICW Following ES Actuation" whilecontinuing.

1)WHEN ICW Cooler SW Outlets and Bypasses are aligned per 1104.029,Exhibit B,THEN override AND open one Service Water to ICW Coolers Supply(CV-3811 or CV-3820).

Page 53 of 57Page 3 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION4. Verify proper ESAS Channels tripped:ConditionChannels ActuatedRCS press 1550 psig1,2,3,4RB press 18.7 psia1,2,3,4,5,6RB press 44.7 psia7,8,9,105. Perform the following:A. Verify each component properly actuated on C16 and C18,except those overriddenin previous steps.B. Verify proper ES system flow rates.

NOTEDuring ESAS actuation, low LPI flow is expected until RCS depressurizes below LPI pump shutoff head.During large break LOCAs, high LPI flow can be experienced. Flow must be throttled to ensure ECCS flows are maintainedwithin assumptions of calculations.

1.IF any of the following conditions exist: A HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A4) B HPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-A5) A LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B4) B LPI FLOW HI/LO (K11-B5) A RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C4) B RB SPRAY FLOW HI (K11-C5)THEN use Annunciator K11 Corrective Action (1203.012J) to clear unexpectedalarms.C.IF only one train of HPI is availableANDRCS press is > 600 psig,THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the nexthighest flow.

Page 54 of 57Page 4 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION6. On C10, perform the following: Verify DGs operating within normal limits: DG 1 DG 2 4100 to 4200 V 4100 to 4200 V 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 59.5 to 60.5 Hz 2750 KW 2750 KW Verify the following breakers open: A3-A4 Crossties: A-310 A-410 B5-B6 Crossties: B-513 B-613 Unit AUX feeds to A1 and A2: A-112 A-212 Verify the following breakers closed: A3 Feeds to B5: A-301 B-512 A4 Feeds to B6: A-401 B-6127. On C09, perform the following:A. Check AUX Cooling Water header depressurized.

B.IF proper EFW actuation and control has not already been verified,THEN verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).

Page 55 of 57Page 5 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION8. On C19, perform the following:A. Verify LPI (Decay Heat) Room Cooler running in each Decay Heat Room:P34A RoomP34B RoomVUC1A or BVUC1C or D B.IF RB Spray has actuated,THEN verify SW to RB Spray P35A and P35B LO CLRs open: CV-3804 CV-38059. IF all RCPs are offANDRCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) is closed,THEN place RCP Seal Bleedoff (Alternate Path to Quench Tank) controls in CLOSE: SV-1271 SV-1273 SV-1270 SV-127210. IF leakage into the RB is indicated,THEN verify RB cooling maximized:A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running: VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1DB. Verify RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves open: CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815C. Verify key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers unlatched: SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-7413 Page 56 of 57Page 6 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION11. Initiate RB H 2 sampling using Containment Hydrogen Control (1104.031), Exhibit A.12. Verify each component properly actuated on C26.13. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26: Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814) Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816) Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)14. Verify the following High Point Vents closed:A Loop B LoopReactorVesselPressurizer SV-1081 SV-1082 SV-1083 SV-1084 SV-1091 SV-1092 SV-1093 SV-1094 SV-1071 SV-1072 SV-1073 SV-1074 SV-1077 SV-107915. IF AUX Lube Oil pump for running HPI pump fails to stop after 20 second time delay,THEN within one hour of ESAS actuation dispatch an operator to stop AUX Lube Oilpump locally at breaker while continuing:

P64A P64B P64CB5721B5722/B6515B651416. Place running Low Pressure Injection (Decay Heat) Pump (P34A/P34B) handswitches in NORMAL-AFTER-START to enable DECAY HEAT PUMP TRIP (K09-A7)alarm: P34A P34B17. Monitor ENGINEERED SAFEGUARDS ACTUATION SYSTEM alarms on K11.

Page 57 of 57Page 7 of 7VERIFY PROPER ESAS ACTUATION18. IF any of the following components/systems are in service:Condensate PumpsCondenser Vacuum PumpsWaterbox Vacuum PumpsSeal Oil SystemControl Room ChillersTHEN coordinate with CRS/SM to secure components and/or systems, as timepermits.19. Coordinate with CRS/SM to re-verify component actuation with another operator.END Page 1 of 56Appendix DScenario OutlineForm ES-D-1Facility: __ANO-1_________Scenario No.:

_____4_______Op-Test No.: __

2016-1_Examiners:___________________________Operators: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Initial Conditions: _99.7% power, P-7B EFW Pump OOS

___Turnover: ____99.7% power, P-7B EFW Pump OOS, Group 7 rods at 95%____________________________________________________________________________________________________EventNo.PositionEventType*EventDescription 1 ATC RDilute rods in 2%

2 BOP CRS C TSCFT Pressure high 3 ATC BOP I"B" Steam Generator S/U Level Fails Low.

4 ATC C P-8A Tripsrequiring down power to 70%

5 BOP ITurbine stops responding to down powerat 90%6 All C TSRCP Seal Cooler leak 7 All MCondensate system leak results in a loss of all MFW and Reactortrip 8 ATC I CTFailure of EFIC to actuate 9 BOP C CT P-7A Tripresulting in transition to Overheating EOP*(N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical TaskTarget Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d)Actual Attributes 1.Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2 2.Abnormal events (2-4) 4 3.Major transients (1-2) 1 4.EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 1 5.EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1 6.EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2 Page 2 of 56NARRATIVE:This scenario begins with plant power at 99.7% and Group 7 rods at 95%. During turnover thecrew is directed to dilute and insert rods 2% (Approximately 4 ppm dilution). ICS willautomatically insert rods to maintain RCS Tave at setpoint. The dilution will require acalculation performed on the plant computer and operation of the BATCH Controller to add theDI Water to the Makeup Tank.After the dilution is started, the B CFT (Core Flood Tank) pressure will rise above the T.S. limitwhich will require entry into T.S. 3.5.1 Condition B. The BOP will be directed to vent the tankpressure off. The field operators will be dispatched to verify the flowpath of nitrogen to the CFTis isolated. Report from the field will reveal that the lineup was not properly secured by theprevious crew.After venting the CFT, the "B" Steam Generator S/U Level will fail low. The ATC will have toidentify the failure, he will then place the "B" MFW Pump H/A Station to HAND in accordancewith the ICS AOP (Abnormal Operating Procedure), the BOP will verify the other channelreading properly by performing a channel check on the plant computer and then the BOP willselect the NNI-Y channel. When the good signal is selected the ATC will return the ICS stationto automatic control.After the MFW Pump control is back in automatic, a Heater Drain Pump (P-8A) will trip whichrequires a rapid downpower to 70% (10%/min) in accordance with the Rapid Plant ShutdownAOP. During the downpower the Main Turbine will stop responding which will require manualaction by the BOP to balance the plant and continue with the downpower.After the downpower to 70% is complete, an RCP Seal Cooler leak will develop requiring entryinto T.S. 3.4.13 for RCS Leakage and performance of Excess RCS Leakage AOP. This willresult in taking the unit off line.The major event will begin, during the final downpower, with a large Condensate System leak.A report from the field will let the crew know that it is an unrecoverable leak and will result in theloss of all Main Feedwater Pumps including the Auxiliary Feedwater Pump (P-75).A loss of all Feedwater should cause an EFIC actuation however, EFIC will fail to actuate EFWrequiring the ATC to complete the actuation (critical task). This will result in P-7A being the onlysource of feed since P-7B was out of service as indicated in the initial conditions. Thecontrolling procedure at this time is the Reactor Trip EOP. (PRA)The final event is a trip of the steam driven EFW pump P-7A. The CRS will transition to theOverheating EOP which will require a critical action of the BOP to initiate HPI Cooling. Oncecontrol is established with HPI Cooling in progress the scenario is complete. (PRA)PRA / IPE explanation:Key equipment for potential risk increase includes Feedwater Control System, EmergencyFeedwater System, and Makeup and Purification.Key Operator actions include initiating HPI Cooling.Initiating events include a Loss of Feedwater.Critical TasksCT Establish FW Flow and Feed SG(s), acceptable performance is to initiate EFW prior tothe Steam Generator going dry as indicated by a steady level of 6 inches on EFIC Low Range.CT Initiate HPI Cooling, acceptable performance is to initiate HPI Cooling within 20minutes of the loss of all Feedwater and Emergency Feedwater. This time begins when P-7A trips.

Page 3 of 56Appendix DRequired Operator ActionsForm ES-D-2Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 "Dilution -Manual Batch Feed"___________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorReference OP-1103.004CAUTIONThe following section has been determined to have a ReactivityAddition Potential (RAP). This activity is classified as a Risk LevelR2 if dilution >3 ppm is planned or Risk Level R3 if dilution <3 ppmis planned.N/A briefconducted prior totaking thewatch12.1.1IF a Reactivity Management Brief has NOT beenconducted,THEN perform a Reactivity Management Brief perCOPD-030 with an SRO.NOTESince Letdown 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) allows all three of itsflowpaths to be open to each other momentarily during stroke,some flow from Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250) can go directlyto the bleed flowpath, reducing expected reactivity effects. Rodswill not move in as far as expected when diluting with high boronconcentrations early in core life, up to ~0.6% less inward motioncan occur.

ATC12.1.2Dilution is required for boron concentration changeduring normal operation to maintain required controlrod configuration.

ATC12.1.3Makeup and purification system in operation perMakeup & Purification System Operation (1104.002),"System Startup" section.

ATC12.1.4Chemical addition system aligned per Conduct ofOperations (1015.001), "System AlignmentVerification" section.

Page 4 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 "Dilution -Manual Batch Feed"___________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC12.1.5IF manual bleed is to be initiated,THEN verify the following: Vacuum degasifier either bypassed or in-serviceper Vacuum Degasifier Operations (1104.016). Clean liquid waste system in operation per CleanWaste System Operation (1104.020), "InitialStartup" section.NOTE When using the BORON program, any operating conditionsmay be input. "Mass of Reactor Coolant vs. Pressurizer Level", AttachmentC and the BORON program automatically add 167,000pounds to the reactor coolant mass when RCS temperature is 250.0°F, to account for the decay heat system.BOP / ATC12.1.7Perform the following calculations:A. Use "Feed Volume for Batch Boration orDilution", Attachment A.3OR Plant Monitoring System BORON programto determine volume of DI water needed.B. Record volume of batch to be added on "RCSLiquid Addition Data Sheet", Attachment B.C. Obtain an RO/SRO independent review ofcalculation and record on "RCS Liquid AdditionData Sheet",Attachment B.

Page 5 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 "Dilution -Manual Batch Feed"___________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC12.1.8Ensure adequate storage availability exists for anywaste to be generated, if applicable. Compare volume of feed calculated in above stepvs. available Clean Waste Receiver Tanks (T-12s)and any excess letdown due to heatup ifapplicable. IF Clean Waste Receiver Tanks (T-12s) cannotreceive required volume,THEN transfer applicable Clean Waste ReceiverTanks (T-12s) to Unit 2 per Clean Waste SystemOperation (1104.020).

ATC12.1.9IF dilution >3 ppm is planned,THEN verify reactor power 99.75%.CAUTIONProper batching of DI water to the Makeup Tank (T-4) duringhigh Condensate Transfer System usage can require twoCondensate Transfer Pumps (P-9A, P-9B) in-service to provideadequate pressure. (CR-ANO-1-2012-1045)

BOP12.1.10Verify at least one Condensate Transfer Pump (P-9A,P-9B) in-service.BOOTH: Report that P

-9A is in service ATC12.1.11IF desired, THEN GO TO "Batch Controller Operation"Attachment H of this procedure and exit this section.EXAMINER NOTE: Operation of the BATCH Controller can be performed from thestep by step procedure or by following Attachment H which is a checklist of actionsthat can be utilized by an operator with experience setting up the BATCH Controllereither way is acceptable in this case. The initial condition of Attachment H are arepeat of the previous steps and are not duplicated belowATC / BOP2.1 Verify Batch Controller set up for required batch size andflowrate.2.1.1 Obtain Licensed Operator verification of requiredbatch size.

Page 6 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 "Dilution -Manual Batch Feed"___________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC2.2 Verify both Makeup Filters in-service: Makeup Filter (F-3A) Makeup Filter (F-3B)

ATC2.3 IF dilution with Manual Batch Feed,THEN perform the following:2.3.1 Open Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251).2.3.2 Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).2.3.3 Start Batch Controller by depressing RUN.2.3.4 IF desired to reduce inventory, THEN placeLetdown 3-way valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.A. WHEN no longer desired toBLEED, THEN verify Letdown3-way valve (CV-1248) inLETDOWN.2.3.5 IF desired, THEN adjust Batch Controller FlowControl Valve (CV-1249) to regulate flow.2.3.6 WHEN batch completes OR must be stopped,THEN verify the following valves closed: Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250) Batch Controller Flow Control Valve(CV-1249)2.3.7 Close Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251).

Page 7 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

1__Event

Description:

___Crew will dilute rods in 2% per OP-1103.004 Section 12 "Dilution -Manual Batch Feed"___________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior2.3.8 IF desired, THEN perform one of the following toremove extra Makeup Filter (F-3A/B) from service: Place Makeup Filter F-3A handswitch(HS-1246) to CLOSE. Place Makeup Filter F-3B handswitch(HS-1247) to CLOSE.2.3.9 Update "RCS Liquid Addition Data Sheet",Attachment B as appropriate.2.3.10 IF reactor power was reduced 99.75%,AND dilution reactivity effects have occurred,THEN may raise power as desired.

ATCMonitor for expected reactivity effects of the dilutionAdvance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion Page 8 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

2__Event

Description:

___"B" Core Flood Tank Pressure high resulting in a T.S. entry

___________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorReference ACA OP-1203.012I for K10-B5 for CFT B PRESS HI/LO BOP1. Determine whether CFT (T-2B) pressure is high or low fromCore Flood Tank "B" (PI-2419, PI-2418) Press on C16and C18.NOTETS 3.5.1 band for Core Flood Tank pressure is 600 +/- 40 psig(560 to 640 psig). Instrument uncertainties require maintainingCFT pressure within a narrower band.

CRS2. IF pressure is outside of band 572 to 628 psig, THEN declareCFT inoperable, write a Condition Report and enter TS 3.5.1Condition B.

Booth: Once the CFT pressure exceeds 630 psig, set Remote for N2

-5 back to 0. This willstop the pressurization and allow for lowering pressure back to within band.

BOP3. IF pressure is high, THEN lower pressure using Core FloodSystem Operating Procedure (1104.001), "Venting andDepressurizing Core Flood Tanks (CFTs)" section.A. Do NOT allow pressure to exceed band of 572 to 628psig.BOPReference OP-1104.001, Venting and Depressurizing Core FloodTanks (CFT) sectionCAUTION Vented gas can be radioactive. When RCS is >800 psig, CFT admin limits for pressure580-620 psig must be observed to avoid violating limits ofTS 3.5.1.Booth: When dispatched report back that N2

-5 was found partiallyopen and N2

-2 wasfound with N2 aligned.NOTEIf depressurizing for refueling shutdown and performance ofSupplements 2 and 3 of this procedure is required, CFTpressure of 60 to 70 psig will be needed.

BOP14.2 IF lowering CFT T-2B pressure,THEN open Core Flood Tank T2B Vent (CV-2420)handswitch HS-2420.14.2.1 WHEN desired pressure is reached,THEN close CV-2420 handswitch HS-2420.Advance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion Page 9 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump toHAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump toautomatic.________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference OP-1203.001, ICS Abnormal Operations ATC1. Place affected MFW Pump H/A to HAND.

N/A 2.IFMain Feedwater Block Valve(s) closed,THEN place associated Startup and Low Load ControlValves in HAND.NOTEPlacing both Feedwater Loop Demand H/As in HAND will result inan ICS tracking condition which will ensure ICS follows generatedmegawatts potentially allowing for more stable transient recovery.

ATC 3.IF desired,THENplace the following in HAND: Feedwater Loop A Demand H/A Feedwater Loop B Demand H/A ATC 4.Perform the following to stabilize RCS parameters: IF Main Feedwater Block Valve(s) closed,THEN operate associated Startup and Low Load ControlValves in HAND. Lower affected MFW Pump H/A as necessary BOP 6.Select the good SG Startup Level instrument forindication. STM GEN B: LT-2613LT-2614 (NNI-Y)

Page 10 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump toHAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump toautomatic.________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC 7.Proceed as directed by CRS/SM.

CRSDirect returning MFW Pump to Automatic per OP-1105.00418.0 Main Feedwater Pump Transfer to Auto N/ACAUTIONIf reactor power ~20%, then placing MFW Pump H/Astations in AUTO could result in erratic feedwater control.With both MFW Pumps in manual and the Feedwater PumpsDisch Crosstie (CV-2827) open, placing "B" MFW Pump inAUTO with a significant difference in demand signalsbetween "A" and "B" MFW Pumps will cause a feedwatertransient.NOTEPOS reads MFW pump speed demand(3000-5900 RPM). IfMain FW Block Valve is closed, then MEAS VAR reads valveP(0-100 PSI). If Main FW Block Valve is open, then MEAS VARreads flow error (50% = null).EXAMINER NOTE:The guidance below assumes that the failure was noticed and the BMFW Pump was taken to hand prior to any changes in FW flow. If the crew was slow andactual FW flow changes occurred, then additional stations would have been taken to manualprior to restoring the MFW Pump to automatic.

N/A18.1 IF inP control (Main FW Block Valve closed), - N/A Page 11 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump toHAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump toautomatic.________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC18.2 IF in flow control (Main FW Block Valve open),THEN transfer as follows:18.2.1 Null flow error by performing either or both of thefollowing: Adjust associated Feedwater Demand H/Ain HAND. Slowly adjust pump speed/auto demandusing MFW Pump H/A station to nullflow error.18.2.2 Place MFW Pump H/A station in AUTO.EXAMINER NOTE: The following steps are provided in the event that the crew has to takeadditional ICS stations to hand to respond to the previous event. These stepsprovide direction for Transferring Major ICS Control Stations to AUTO.8.1 Initial conditions: Diamond Panel in Manual, if applicable RX Demand in HAND Feedwater Demand Loop A in HAND Feedwater Demand Loop B in HAND Load RatioT-cold in HAND ULD Unit Master Station in HAND Reactivity Management Brief performed per COPD-030 withan SRO Page 12 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump toHAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump toautomatic.________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTE With the major stations in HAND, and the plant in a stable(balanced) condition, aligning all stations prior to returningany station to AUTO will provide a controlled, bumplessreturn to full automatic. Description section 3.1 of this procedure contains"Expected and normal indications when transferring H/Astations to manual".8.2 IF MEAS VAR can NOT be aligned,THEN GO TO the appropriate section for transferringstation with misaligned MEAS VAR to AUTO.8.3 IF SG/RX Demand in AUTO, THEN perform the following:8.3.1 Verify SG/RX Demand station display selected to POS.8.3.2 Depress SG/RX Demand station HAND pushbutton.8.3.3 Check SG/RX Demand station output remains steady.8.4 Verify Turbine in INTEG CONTROL, controlling TurbineHeader pressure at setpoint.CAUTIONTo ensure bumpless transfer, a transfer of H/A station from HANDto AUTO is not made without first minimizing errorbetween: MEAS VAR and POS on controller for H/A stations otherthan ULD Current power and PMS CTP input for ULD Page 13 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump toHAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump toautomatic.________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior8.5 Check MEAS VAR on both FW Loop Demand stations on thecaret.8.5.1 IF required, THEN drive SG/RX Demand in HAND until eitherlimit below is met: MEAS VARs for Feedwater Demand Loop A andFeedwater Demand Loop B are at the caret. Indicated error is split between the two MEAS VARs.8.5.2 IF error between the two loops differs,THEN drive Load RatioT-cold H/A station in HAND toremove difference.8.6 Check T-ave is at setpoint.8.6.1 IF required,THEN perform one or both of the following: Move rods in MANUAL. Adjust feedwater flow to bring T-ave to setpoint.A. Return to step 8.5.8.7 Check RX Demand MEAS VAR on the caret.8.8 Check SG/RX H/A station POS and MEAS VAR areapproximately equal.8.9 Place stations in AUTO as follows:8.9.1 Diamond Panel, if applicable8.9.2 RX Demand Page 14 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

3__Event

Description:

___B SG S/U Level fails low slowly, requiring taking the B MFW Pump toHAND and selecting the good (NNI-Y) signal for control before returning the MFW Pump toautomatic.________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior8.9.3 Feedwater Loop Demands: Loop A FW Loop Demand Loop B FW Loop Demand8.9.4 Load RatioT-cold8.9.5 SG/RX Demand8.10 Check UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1) alarm clear.Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Page 15 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

4__Event

Description:

__P-8A Heater Drain Pump trips requiring a down power to 70% at a rate of10%/min._________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference ACA OP-1203.012E for K06-A8, P8A/P8B FLOW LO ATC 1.Monitor MFWP suction pressure andfeedwater flow very closely for adverse effecton feedwater flow.

BOP ATC2. IF either heater drain pump tripped, THEN perform thefollowing:OTHERWISE GO TO step 3 for P-8A low flow with pumprunning ORGO TO step 4 for P-8B low flow with pump running.A. Verify standby Condensate Pump (one of P-2A thruP-2C) has auto started.B. Commence reducing power at rate up to 10%/minuteto within the capacity of T-40 high level dump (~ 630MW or ~70% power).NOTEHeater Drain Pump trip at power levels above 70% requiresprompt action to open the Htr Drn Tk Hi Lvl Dump Control ValveBypass Valve for the affected Heater Drain Pump in order tomaintain Heater Drain Tank level on scale.

BOP N/A BOP N/AC. IF Heater Drain Pump P-8A tripped,THEN inform Auxiliary Operator Heater Drain PumpP-8A tripped AND to perform "Local Actions for HeaterDrain Tank T-40A Level Control On High Level Dump"Exhibit A of this procedure. (Exhibit A is located atT-40 level instrument rack R43.)D. IF Heater Drain Pump P-8B tripped, - N/AE. Place Low Level Condenser Spray CV-2907 ANDCV-2868 into service by placing HS-2907 on C02 in OPEN.F. IF necessary, - N/A Page 16 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

4__Event

Description:

__P-8A Heater Drain Pump trips requiring a down power to 70% at a rate of10%/min._________________________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOPG. Verify the following Polisher parameters aremaintained per Condensate DemineralizerSystem Operation and Regeneration(1106.024): PolisherP (63 psid max) Polisher flow (1500 to 3550 gpm) Polisher Resin TrapP (10 psid)BOOTH: When dispatched acknowledgethat T-40A level will be maintained per local exhibit.

BOPH. WHEN practicable, THEN perform the following:1) Refer to "Heater Drain Pump (P-8A and P-8B)Shutdown" section of Condensate, Feedwater,and Steam System Operation (1106.016) to placethe tripped Heater Drain Pump in a shutdownlineup.2) Refer to "Power Escalation" section of PowerOperation (1102.004) for guidance on operationwith one Heater Drain Pump in-service.I. Refer to "Reclosing Tripped Individual Load SupplyBreakers" section of Electrical SystemOperations (1107.001).EXAMINER NOTE:Once a controlled down power has been establishedANDbefore thedown power is complete, initiate failure on the Main Turbine.BOOTH: Insert malfunction when power is reduced to 90% or at the lead evaluatorsdirection.Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretionOR at 90% Power.

Page 17 of 56 Op-Test No.:_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

5__Event

Description:

__Turbine EHC stops responding during down power.___________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference ACA 1203.012F for K07-A1 for UNIT MASTER IN TRACK.ATC/BOP1. Determine cause of tracking.

BOP2. IF Unit Master in track is a result an ICS failureOR an ICS input signal failure, THEN take manual control ofaffected ICS station(s) AND return plant to steady-statecondition.A. Refer to ICS Abnormal Operation (1203.001).

BOP3. IF caused by EHC in manual, THEN perform the following:A. Verify that NSSS stabilizes.B. Operate EHC system OR ICS in manual until problemhas been corrected.EXAMINER NOTE:The rest of the procedure is N/A. In fact the crew may not reference theACA since the only action to take is to operate the Turbine in manual to stabilizethe plant. The crew may choose to also take the SG/RX station to HAND. IF so,the ATC will control the rate of the down power and the BOP will maintain headerpressure within the given band. The following step assumes the turbine is inOperator Auto at a selected rate of change and is leading the down power.INFORMATION: There are three modes of operation on the Main Turbine. ICS Auto whichis the normal automatic control for the turbine. Operator Auto which requires theBOP to manually change the SETTER and then select GO after which the turbineREFERENCE will change at the rate selected to the SETTER value. TurbineManual which gives the BOP direct control of the Throttle Valves.ATC / BOPContinue down power with the Turbine in manual control (Operator Auto)to <70% power. (630 MWe) (Reference Voltage ~74V)EXAMINER NOTE:Once power is reduced to <70% the next event can be initiated.This willconclude both of the previous two malfunctions.Advance to next event at leadevaluatordiscretion Page 18 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorRCP Seal Cooler Leak CRSReference ACA OP-1203.012G for K08-C7 for RCP BLEEDOFF TEMP HI BOP1. At C13, check bleedoff temperature from each RCP on RCPP-32A thru D Seals recorders, to determine which pump is inalarm.CRS2. IF RCP SEAL COOLING FLOW LO (K08-E7) is alarmed,THEN GO TO K08-E7.

CRS3. Refer to "Seal Degradation" section of Reactor CoolantPump and Motor Emergencies (1203.031).CREW4. Determine cause of problem.

CRSReference OP-1203.031, Seal Degradation Section BOP 1.Verify the following valves are open: RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) Return (CV-1274) RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32D (CV-1270) RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32C (CV-1271) RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32B (CV-1272) RCP Seal Bleed off (Normal) from P-32A (CV-1273)

A.IF RCP seal bleed off was inadvertently isolated on arunning RCP,THEN immediately restore seal bleed off.1) Verify seal parameters return to normal.CAUTIONLoss of seal injection to an idle RCP will result in RCP seal bleedoff temperature >180°F within a few minutes.

Page 19 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC 2.Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV

-1206) open.A. Verify RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow (CV-1207)maintaining 32 to 40 gpm.B. Verify individual seal injection flow rates 8 to 10 gpm.

C.IF one RCP seal injection flow is abnormally high(RCS leak into seal cooler is indicated),THEN GO TO Excess RCS Leakage (1203.039).

D.IF seal injection is lost to an idle RCP,THEN seal bleed off should be isolated by performingExhibit A of this procedure.

CRSReference OP-1203.039EXAMINER NOTE:Crew may proceed directly to OP

-1203.039 when they have identifiedthe RCP Seal Cooler leak based on Seal Injection flowrates.

N/A 1.IFHPI is required to maintain RCS inventory, - N/A N/A 2.IFdesired, - N/A ATC 3.IF desired,THEN perform one of the following: Reduce letdown flow by closing Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) Isolate Letdown by closing either: Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS): CV-1214 CV-1216 CRS 4.IFlocation of leak is known,THEN perform the applicable step(s): RCS Leakage into ICW Systemstep 6through 9 Page 20 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CREW 6.Check any of the following for indications of RCS leakageinto ICW system: Nuclear Loop ICW activity rising Indication of Letdown Cooler RCS leak into ICW:

- Letdown Cooler ICW Outlet temp rising on PMS: 8P ICW trend T2214 for E29A T2215 for E29B Indication of RCP Seal Cooler RCS leak into ICW:

- RCP Seal Temp rising

- RCP Seal Bleedoff Temp rising

- Skewed RCP Seal Injection FlowsNOTEICW Surge Tank T-37B Level (PDIS 2229) 0.5 to 2.7 psid(1 psid = 333 gallons)CRS / BOPA. Dispatch an operator to determine Nuclear Loop ICWSurge Tank (T37B) level trend.BOOTH: When dispatched report T

-37B rate of change ~0.1 psid/minCAUTIONThere are indications that a small RCS to ICW leak exists in oneor both Letdown Coolers (reference CR-ANO-1-2015-3017).Industry experience has shown that there is elevated risk of moreleakage during single cooler operation due to flow-inducedvibration.NOTEWith small leak rates, sufficient time should be available to isolateone cooler at a time.

N/A 7.IFRCS leak into Letdown Cooler is indicated, - N/A CRS 8.IFRCP Seal Cooler RCS to ICW leak is indicatedOR RCS leak into Letdown Cooler can not be isolated,THEN perform the following:

Page 21 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTEMinimum seal injection flow for each RCP is 2.5 gpm.

ATC N/A ATC BOP A.IFseal injection is available,THEN verify 2.5 gpm seal injection flow per RCP.

B.IF seal injection is not available, - N/AC. Place RCP Seal Cooling pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK: P-114A P-114BD. Verify Letdown isolated.NOTEAfter ICW to and from the RB is isolated, RCS leakage into theRCP Seal Cooler will be relieved through the RCP Seal Coolerrelief valve and will eventually reach the RB Sump.

BOP BOPE. Close Nuclear ICW RB Inlet (CV-2233).F. Close both Nuclear ICW RB Outlets: CV-2214 CV-2215NOTEIf RCS leakage into the RCP Seal is greater than the seal injectionflowrate then it is expected that RCP seals will heat up rapidly onthe affected Reactor Coolant Pump.

BOPG. Monitor RCP Seal temperatures to ensure adequatecooling from seal injection.

1)IF required for adequate RCP seal cooling,THEN perform the following:a) Verify RC Pump Seals Total INJ Flow(CV-1207) in HAND.b) Raise seal injection flow.

Page 22 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRS CRS N/A N/A CRSH. Notify Radiation Protection to implement Unit 1 Off-Normal Operations (1601.307) for primary to ICW leak.

I.Close ICW Surge Tank Crossconnect Isol (ICW-165).

J.IF RCP Seal temperatures rise, - N/A K.IF Nuc ICW Feed and Bleed in progress, - N/A L.GO TO step 15

.EXAMINER NOTE:Step 9 is only applicable if RCP Seal temperatures rise indicatinginadequate seal cooling otherwise the CRS will proceed to Step 15 BOP 9.IFRCP seals temperatures rise indicating inadequateseal cooling due to RCS leakage greater than sealinjection flow,THEN perform the following:NOTE Flux/Flux/Flow 2 pump reactor trip setpoint is 52%. Withhigh imbalance, e.g.20%, refer to COLR Figure 8-C. High power/pumps reactor trip setpoints are: One pump per loop 55% Zero pumps in one loop 0% Tripping 1 RCP with reactor power > 92% could result inreactor trip on high power/imbalance/flow.

N/A BOP A.IFtripping the affected RCP(s) will result in automaticreactor trip, - N/A B.IF tripping the affected RCP(s) will not cause anautomatic reactor trip,THEN perform the following:1) Trip affected RCP(s).2) Verify proper ICS response.

3)IF only one RCP is in operation per loop,THEN refer to Tech Spec 3.4.4.

Page 23 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTEReverse rotation is indicated by the following: Computer alarm based on reverse lube oil flow RCP high vibration RCP motor bearing high temperature BOP C.IFRCP was stopped,THEN monitor affected RCP for reverse rotation usingany of the following: Associated RCS loop flow indicates lower thanexpected Plant computer reverse rotation alarm on idle RCP(not applicable for P-32B)

- RCP P32-A REVERSE ROTATION (FS6510)

- RCP P32-C REVERSE ROTATION (FS6512)

- RCP P32-D REVERSE ROTATION (FS6513) Loss of zero speed indication on idle RCP (Indicatedby portable instrumentation)

D.IFRCP reverse rotation is indicated, - N/ACAUTIONClosing the seal bleed off path on a running RCP will cause sealdamage due to overheating.NOTEClosing the seal bleed off valves after the RCP is tripped limitsthe heatup rate of the seal.

BOPE. For any RCP tripped due to inadequate seal cooling,perform "RCP Seal Bleedoff Isolation", Exhibit A ofReactor Coolant Pump and Motor Emergency(1203.031) for applicable RCP.

N/A 10.Check RCP seals for proper staging.

A.IF seal degradation, - N/A Page 24 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

6__Event

Description:

___RCP Seal Cooler Leak develops at a rate greater than T.S. limit

________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTERecommended shutdown rates for RCS leaks insidecontainment with no additional complications are as follows:< 50 gpm -- 0.5 to 5% per minute 50 gpm -- 5 to 10% per minute CRS ATC 16.IFtotal RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by TechSpec 3.4.13AND poses an immediate threat to plant operations,THEN perform the following:

A.IF reactor is Critical,THEN commence plant shutdown per Rapid PlantShutdown (1203.045).

B.IF reactor is shutdown, - N/AEXAMINER NOTE:Once T.S. 3.4.13Condition Ais entered all intended aspects of thisevent are complete.

N/A 17.IFtotal RCS leakage is in excess of that allowed by TechSpec 3.4.13AND poses no immediate threat to plant operations, -N/ANOTE Non-isolable RCS to ICW leaks should be considered pressureboundary leakage. After ICW to and from the RB is isolated, RCS leakage into theRCP Seal Cooler will be relieved through the RCP Seal Coolerrelief valve and will eventually reach the RB Sump.

CRS18. Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency ActionLevel Classification (1903.010).

N/A 19.IFleakage is within Tech Spec 3.4.13 limits,- N/A N/A 20.IFleak is isolated

,- N/AAdvance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Page 25 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss ofsuction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CREWReference ACA 1203.012D for K05-F7 for OIL SUMP LEVEL HI.NOTE Main Turbine L.O. Conditioner (M-207) equipment drains arerouted to the T-27 tank room floor drain system which drainto the NE (#3) oil sump. The drain line from the T-27 tank room to the NE (#3) oilsump leaks into the surrounding soil. Consequently, TurbineLube Oil Tank T-27 Rm Floor Drn (FYD-138) is throttledopen 1/2 turn (should not be closed), in order to allow oil todrain freely into the NE oil sump and not remain standing inthe drain line. Maintaining only 1/2 turn open allows the sumppump to keep up with any drain flow.

CRS1. IF caused by flooding, THEN GO TO Internal Flooding(1203.054).

N/A2. Dump sump using Turbine Building Draining System(1104.044), "Turbine Building Oil Sump Dump" section.

N/A3. IF oil leakage, THEN secure source of leak.

CRS4. IF condensate leak is suspected, THEN GO TO AnnunciatorK06 Corrective Action (1203.012E) and perform actions forHotwell Level Low (K06-F7).

CRSReference ACA 1203.012E for K06-F7 forHOTWELL LEVEL HI/LO.EXAMINER NOTE:Once the field operator is asked to investigate the cause of the alarm,he will report back that there is a large Condensate System leak in the bowling alley near thepolishers. This report will Cue the crew to trip the reactor.

N/A1. IF hotwell level high, THEN perform the following: - N/ANOTECond E-11A Hotwell Level Lo (LS-2872) actuation prevents startof Condensate Pumps.

BOP N/A2. IF hotwell level low, THEN perform the following:

A.Verify Condensate Makeup (CV-2873) open.

B.IF valve does NOT open automatically, - N/A C.IF breaker thermal overload is tripped, - N/A D.IF CV-2873 still does NOT function, - N/A E.WHEN level rises to ~51%, - N/A Page 26 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss ofsuction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTECondensate Pumps (P-2A thru C) need 17' submergence at fullvacuum for NPSH at 8400 gpm. The pump suction up to thebottom of the Condenser hotwell provides 22' submergence.

CREW CT ATC BOP3. IF hotwell level is low AND can NOT be recovered,THEN perform the following prior to the hotwell going empty:A. Verify the reactor tripped, initiate EFW and performReactor Trip (1202.001), while continuing here.B. IF any Main Feedwater Pump or the Aux Feed Pumpis running, THEN verify EFW initiatedAND trip the running feedwater pump(s).C. Trip all running Condensate Pumps (P-2A thru C).EXAMINER NOTE:***CRITICAL TASK***EFIC is defeated and will not automaticallyactuate. It is a Critical Task that the ATC manually actuates EFW.Acceptableperformance is to initiate EFW prior to the Steam Generator going dry asindicated by a steady level of 6 inches on EFIC Low Range. P-7A will be theonly available EFW Pump since P-7B was initially OOS.EXAMINER NOTE: The following guidance is from 1203.054, Internal Flooding Attachment2, which would be used in the event of a Condensate System leak with loweringhotwell level. Either the ACA or the AOP accomplish the same actions and onlyone or the other would be used.

CRS 1.Determine leaking system:

A.IF indications of Aux Building flooding exist, - N/A B.IFindications of Diesel Fuel Vault flooding exist, - N/AC. GO TO appropriate step for leaking system: Condensate/Feedwaterstep 3 N/A 3.IFHotwell level is stable,-N/A CRS(Contingency for the above step) 3.GO TO Attachment 2.

Page 27 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss ofsuction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSTransition to OP-1203.054 Attachment 2, Condensate / FeedwaterSystem Leak With Lowering Hotwell Level.

ATC ATC CT ATC BOP ATC N/A 1.IFhotwell level is low ANDlevel can NOTbe recovered,THEN perform the following:A. Manually trip the reactor and perform Reactor Trip(1202.001), while continuing with this procedure.B. Manually actuate EFW.C. Trip both Main Feed Pumps: A Main Feed Pump B Main Feed PumpD. Place Condensate Pumps in PULL-TO-LOCK: P2A P2B P2C E.Perform RT-5.

F.GO TO step 6

.EXAMINER NOTE

Step 6 deals with recovery efforts, such as isolating the leak, de

-energizing wetted equipment, etc. These actions will not be performed during the scenario.

CRSReference EOP 1202.001, Reactor Trip ATC 1.Depress Reactor Trip PB.A. Verify all rods insertedANDreactor power dropping.

BOP 2.Depress Turbine trip PB.A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

Page 28 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss ofsuction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorATC / BOP 3.Check adequate SCM.

CRS 4.Perform the following:Advise Shift Manager to implement Emergency ActionLevel Classification (1903.010). Direct Control Board Operators to monitor floating steps ATC 5.Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) demand adjusted to zero.

BOP 6.Open BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operatingHPI pump.ATC 7.IF Emergency Boration is not in progress,THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint to 100".

ATC 8.Control RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

BOP N/A N/A N/A N/A 9.Checkfor proper electrical response (RT

-19).A.IF all 4160V buses are de-energized, ... N/A B.IF only EDG power is supplying 4160V buses, - N/A C.IF 4160V bus A3 or A4 is de-energized, - N/A D.IF 4160V bus A1 or A2 is de-energized, - N/ACAUTIONThe following step will result in load shed of non-vital 4160V busesA1 and A2.NOTEStartup XFMR SU2 is considered available if all the followingconditions are met: SU2 voltage 146KV with SU2 voltage regulator in service(C10 indication) orSU2 voltage 159KV with SU2 voltage regulator out of service Either Russellville East or Pleasant Hill 161KV transmission linein service SU2 load shedding enabled No Unit 2 buses powered from SU2SU2 voltage regulator 3% reduction disabled ATC 10.Check OP HPI pump supplying normal Makeup and SealInjection.

Page 29 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__The Major Event is a Condensate pipe rupture which will result in a loss ofsuction source to both of the MFW Pumps and the Auxiliary FW Pump (P-75)

_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE:After EFW is actuated, continue in Reactor Trip until you are satisfied with thecrews performance, then proceed to the next event. The following Floating Step in the Reactor TripEOP, will cause the CRS to transition to Overheating. IF all MFW and EFW is lost,THEN GO TO 1202.004, "OVERHEATING" procedure.Advance to next event at lead evaluator discretion Page 30 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE: Record time P

-7A trips for start of Critical Task (20 minutes) acceptancecriteria for initiating of at least one HPI Pump operating at full flow and the ERV cycled open.

CRSReference Overheating EOP CREWEntry Conditions RCS temp rising above either:580F T-hot with any RCP on OR610F CET temp with all RCPs off, following a Reactor trip Loss of all feedwater (MFW and EFW) following a Reactor tripATC / CRS 1.IFany of the following criteria is met before overheatingis corrected:ERV opens in AUTORCS press 2450 psigRCS press approaches NDTT Limit (Figure 3)Overheating causes SCM to become inadequateTHEN GO TO step 5.

ATC CRS 2.Perform the following:Verify proper EFW actuation and control (RT-5).Direct Control Board Operators to monitor FloatingSteps.

Page 31 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior N/A ATC ATC ATC ATC 3.IF EFWcannotbe placed in service,THEN perform the following:

A.IF Main or Aux Feedwater Pump is available,THENrefill SG using RT-16.

1)GO TO step 5.3.A Contingency:A. Close Main Feedwater Isolation valves: CV-2630 CV-26803.B. Restore EFW using Annunciator K12 Corrective Action(1203.012K), while continuing with this procedure.C. Place EFW CNTRL valves in HANDAND close: SG A SG BCV-2645 CV-2647CV-2646 CV-2648D. Place EFW Pump P7B in PULL-TO-LOCK.E. Verify EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Admission Valves in MANUAL AND closed: CV-2613 CV-2663 Page 32 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP 4.Reduce running RCPs to one per loop.

A.IF SG Tube-to-ShellT reaches 60F (tubes hotter)ANDSCM is adequate,THEN trip running RCP(s).

1) Do not restart an RCP until SG Tube-to-ShellT is 50F (tubes hotter).

N/A 5.IFoverheating has been corrected,THEN GO TO 1202.001, "REACTOR TRIP"procedure.EXAMINER NOTE:Overheating is not corrected.EXAMINER NOTE: The following are the contingency actions for Step 5 above.

BOP N/A N/A 5.IFany of the following criteria is met:* ERV opens* RCS press 2450 psig* RCS press approaches NDTT Limit (Figure 3)* Secondary feed not expected to become available* Overheating causes SCM to become inadequateTHEN while continuing attempts to restore secondary feed,perform the following:A. Initiate HPI cooling (RT-4).1) Record time full HPI flow initiated for reference instep 11: ____________

B.IF no HPI pumps are available, - N/A C.IF ERV cannot be opened, - N/A Page 33 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior N/A CRS D.IF SG Tube-to-ShellT reaches 60F (tubes hotter)ANDSCM is adequate,THEN trip the running RCP(s).

1) Do not restart an RCP until SG Tube-to-ShellT is 50F (tubes hotter).E. Continue efforts to restore feedwater ANDcontinue with this procedure.

ATC 6.Check ESAS ACTUATION alarms clear on K11.

ATC 7.Check adequate SCM.

ATC8. IF Makeup Tank level drops below 18",THEN close Makeup Tank Outlet (CV-1275).

ATC9. Check Letdown in service.

ATC10. Control RCS press within limits of Figure 3 (RT-14).

ATC11. Check CET temps stable or dropping.EXAMINER NOTE:The following step describe the BOP actions for RT

-4. Once HPIcooling is in service, the scenario is complete at the discretion of the lead examiner.CET temperatures should be stabilized with the BOP actions in RT-4. RT-4 is a critical task.

BOPInitiate HPI Cooling per RT-4 ATC 1.IFRCP Seal Injection is in service,THEN place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD.OTHERWISE verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.

BOP 2.Open both BWST T3 Outlets: CV-1407 CV-1408 ATC 3.Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV

-1000) open.

Page 34 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP 4.IFOP or STBY HPI pump is running,THEN perform the following:

A.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN fully open all associated HPI Block valves: P36A/B P36B/CCV-1219 CV-1227CV-1220 CV-1228CV-1278 CV-1284CV-1279 CV-1285 BOP 5.Prevent dead heading HPI pumps by verifying one of thefollowing: Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 and CV-1301 OROpen HPI Block valve(s) as follows: Fully open one HPI Block valve associated with ESHPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285).IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off,THEN fully open one HPI Block valve associated withOP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285).

BOP 6.Place ES HPI pump in service asfollows:A. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

B.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN start ES HPI pump.C. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.D. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves: P36A P36C .CV-1219 CV-1227CV-1220 CV-1228CV-1278 CV-1284CV-1279 CV-1285 Page 35 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior E.IF ERV opens in auto,THEN performstep 11 while continuing.

BOP 7.IFOP and STBY HPI pumps are both off,THEN place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:

A.IF HPI Pump (P36B) will be used,THEN verify the following selected to energized bus: P36B/P64B Bus Select MOD Control P64B Transfer SwitchB. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

C.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN start OP or STBY HPI pump.D. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.E. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves: P36A/B P36B/CCV-1219 CV-1227CV-1220 CV-1228CV-1278 CV-1284CV-1279 CV-1285 N/A 8.IF noHPI pumps are available,- N/A BOP 9.Close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV

-1300 or CV

-1301).N/A 10.IFonly one train of HPI is availableANDRCS press is > 600 psig,THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow towithin 20 gpm of the next highest flow.

Page 36 of 56Op-Test No.:

_2016Scenario No.: __

4__Event No.: __

8__Event

Description:

__P-7A trip resulting in a total loss of MFW and EFW. CRS will transition tothe Overheating EOP.______________________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC 11.Perform the following to manually cycle ERV ANDcontinue with this procedure:A. Open ERV.

B.WHEN either of the following criteria is met,THEN place ERV in AUTO: RCS press drops to 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM approaches minimum adequateEXAMINER NOTE

      • CRITICAL TASK***Record time of at least one HPI Pump operatingat full flow and the ERV cycled open. Acceptance criterion for the critical task is within 20minutes from the time P-7A tripped.FREEZE AT THE DISCRETION OF THE LEAD EVALUATORNotes:

Page 37 of 56SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKSANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input fromOperations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The followingpages come from that document.At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1exam.

Page 38 of 56CT-10Establish FW Flow and Feed SG(s)CT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water massCT based on: Mitigate inadequate and maintain adequate heat flow from core to heat sinksTBD DescriptionFeed available SG(s) using primary or alternate pumps and control SG level at LOSM setpoint.TBD ConditionsAnytime SCM is lostPSHT is lost; SCM may or may not exist. FW flow control must be controlled to maintain/initiatePSHT.Associated GEOG Bases:ANO Version(s)(1) EFW should be restored to establish PSHT prior to loss of adequate SCM at <30°F due toCET temperature rise.(2) EFW should be manually started within five minutes of tripping the reactor.(3) Bus 1 and Bus 2 EFW pushbuttons on Train A and Train B Remote Matrices depressedwithin five minutes of tripping A and B Main Feedwater Pumps.(4) EFW should be manually started to establish the preferred method of core cooling (PSHT).This should be accomplished within five minutes of the LOOP.(5) Manually actuate EFW before A OTSG level indicates 6 inches (dry).(6) Prompt identification of the loss of NNI power should be accomplished with 5 minutes of receipt ofthe loss of NNI Power. To assure the RCS is being cooled using the EFW.SES used Page 39 of 56Justification for ANO:(1) In both of these scenarios, all feedwater sources have been lost and the capability to restoreEFW is subsequently restored to the crew. The criterion to establish feedwater flow from therestored source before SCM is lost provides reasonable time for the crew to reestablishPSHT before core safety is challenged.(2)(3)(4) In these scenarios, Reactor Trip Immediate Actions are occurring at the same timefeedwater sources are lost, 5 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew todetermine that the safety function has not been met and to initiate appropriate actionsto restore the safety function.(5) Manually actuating EFW before the A OTSG indicates dry keeps the OTSG available as aheat removal source once the MSIV has been closed to isolate the overcooling. If the SG isallowed to boil dry, it will require a lengthy restoration of level to return it to available status.(6) The 5 minute criterion is consistent with (2), (3), and (4) above. Identification of the loss ofNNI power allows for the crew to transition to appropriate procedural guidance and to assureRCS cooling is accomplished using EFW.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria (5) above, is the acceptance criteria for initiatingEFW. Acceptable performance is to initiate EFW prior to the Steam Generator going dryas indicated by a steady level of 6 inches on EFIC Low Range.

Page 40 of 56CT-14Initiate HPI CoolingCT based on: Mitigate inadequate and maintain adequate heat flow from core to heat sinksTBD DescriptionMaintain adequate core cooling when 1 0to 2 0heat transfer is not adequate or will beintentionally terminated.TBD ConditionsMitigating a Loss of Heat Transfer when there is no feedwater or SCM is lostMitigating Excessive Heat Transfer and SGTR and 1 0to 2 0heat transfer is intentionallyterminatedLOSM when 1 0to 2 0heat transfer is not adequate and SCM has not been restoredAssociated GEOG Bases:

Page 41 of 56ANO Version(s)At least one HPI pump operating at full flow (its four HPI nozzles full open) and the ERV cycled openwithin 20 minutes of P-7A EFW pump tripping.SES usedJustification for ANO:The 20 minutes for this criterion is from the basis document analysis that shows that initiationfrom at least one HPI pump within 20 minutes of the loss of feedwater, in conjunction with onlyPzr safety valves lifting, was sufficient to cool the core.

Page 42 of 56For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam, the criterion above is the acceptance criteria for initiatingHPI Cooling. Acceptable performance is to initiate HPI Cooling within 20 minutes of theloss of all Feedwater and Emergency Feedwater. This time begins when P-7A trips.

Page 43 of 56RT-5Page 1 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL1. Verify EFW actuation indicated on C09:Train A:Train B: Bus 1 Bus 1 Bus 2 Bus 2NOTETable 1 contains EFW fill rate and level bands for various plant conditions.2. Verify at least one EFW pump (P7A or P7B) running with flow to SG(s) throughapplicableEFW CNTRL valve(s).

SG A SG BCV-2645 P7ACV-2647CV-2646 P7BCV-26483. IF SCM is not adequate,THEN perform the following:A. Select Reflux Boiling setpoint for the following: Train A Train BNOTETable 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow.B. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain SG levels 370 to 410".(3. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 44 of 56Page 2 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL3. (Continued) 1)IF both SGs are available,THEN verify SG level rising and tracking EFIC setpoint until 370 to 410" isestablished.

a)IF EFW flow is less than adequate,THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND to maintain 340 gpm toapplicable SG until level is 370 to 410".

b)IF EFW flow is excessiveAND> 340 gpm to either SG,THEN throttle EFW to applicable SG in HAND to limit SGdepressurization.

Do not throttle below 340 gpm on either SG until SG level is 370 to 410".

2)IF only one SG is available,THEN feed available SG in HAND at 570 gpm until SG level is 370 to 410".

3)IF EFW is being controlled in HANDANDSG press drops below 720 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling,THEN continue feeding at required minimum rateAND perform the following:a) Bypass MSLI by momentarily placing SG Bypass toggle switch on eachEFIC cabinet Initiate module in BYPASS. C37-3 C37-4 C37-1 C37-2b) Place applicable EFW CNTRL valves in VECTOR OVERRIDE:

SG A SG BCV-2645 P7ACV-2647CV-2646 P7BCV-2648c) Place applicable EFW ISOL valves in MANUAL.

SG A SG BCV-2627 P7ACV-2620CV-2670 P7BCV-2626 Page 45 of 56Page 3 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROL4. IF SCM is adequate,THEN perform the following:CAUTIONExcessive EFW flow can result in loss of SCM due to RCS shrinkage.NOTE Table 2 contains examples of less than adequate/excessive EFW flow. Expect CETs to rise until natural circ conditions are established. If EFW flow control is in HAND,additional flow may not be necessary to prevent rising CETs until natural circ conditions areestablished.A. Verify EFW CNTRL valves operate to establish and maintain applicable SG levelband per Table 1.

1)IF EFW flow is less than adequate OREFW flow is excessive,THEN control EFW to applicable SG in HAND as necessary to ensure thefollowing: Maintain sufficient EFW flow to prevent rise in CET temp. Maintain continuous EFW flow until applicable level band is reached. Maintain sufficient EFW flow to ensure SG level is either stable OR rising until applicable level band is reached.5. IF all RCPs are off,THEN check primary to secondary heat transfer in progress indicated by all of thefollowing: T-cold tracking associated SG T-sat (Fig. 2) T-hot tracking CET temps T-hot/T-coldT stable or dropping6. Monitor EMERGENCY FEEDWATER and EFIC alarms on K12.

Page 46 of 56Page 4 of 4VERIFY PROPER EFW ACTUATION AND CONTROLTable 1EFIC Automatic Level Control SetpointsConditionLevel BandAutomatic Fill RateAny RCP running 20 to 40"No fill rate limitAll RCPs off and Natural Circ selected300 to 340"2 to 8"/minAll RCPs off and Reflux Boiling selected370 to 410"2 to 8"/minTable 2Examples of Less Than Adequate EFW Flow Indications SG level < 20" and no EFW flow indicated All RCPs off and SG level not tracking EFIC calculated setpoint All RCPs off and EFIC level setpoint not trending toward applicable level bandExamples of Excessive EFW Flow Indications SG press drops 100 psig due to EFW flow induced overcooling SCM approaching minimum adequate due to EFW flow induced overcooling EFW CNTRL valve open with associated SG level > applicable setpoint level bandEND Page 47 of 56RT-14Page 1 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESSNOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred: HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control. When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply. PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists,THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig,THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.3. IF PZR steam space leak exists,THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.

B.IF SCM is adequate,THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Throttle HPI.C. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdownper RT-13.D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 48 of 56Page 2 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. IF RCS press is high,THEN limit press using one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met: HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13013) Throttle HPI.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D.IF PZR AUX Spray is in service,THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.F. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdownper RT-13.G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 49 of 56Page 3 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. (Continued)

H.IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),THEN perform the following:1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36CP64AP64B P64C2) Stop desired HPI pump(s): P36A P36B P36C3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:P36A/BP36B/C CV-1219 CV-1220 CV-1278 CV-1279 CV-1227 CV-1228 CV-1284 CV-12855. IF RCS press is low,THEN raise press using one or more of the following:A. Raise makeup flow.B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.D. Reduce Letdown flow.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 50 of 56Page 4 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS5. (CONTINUED)CAUTIONIf HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPIcooling is no longer required.F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation(CV-1000) closed.CAUTIONWith RCS solid, 1F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.6. IF PZR is solid,THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature. Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS pressNOTEAdjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flowon-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate andcooldown rate.7. IF normal makeup is in service ANDHPI is in service,THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintainnormal makeup flow on-scale.END Page 51 of 56RT-19Page 1 of 2CHECK PROPER ELECTRICAL RESPONSE1. Check 125 V DC Bus D01 energized:Turbine Trip Solenoid Power Available light litBreaker position indications available on left side of C10 A.IF 125 V DC Bus D01 is de-energized,THEN inform CRS to perform "Loss of D01" section of Loss of 125 V DC (1203.036)in conjunction with Reactor Trip procedure, while continuing.2. Check Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers open.51145118Exciter Field breaker A.IF Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers are closed,THEN perform the following:

1)IF 125 V DC Bus D01 is energized,THEN perform the following:a) Inform the CRS.b) Manually trip Main Generator breakers: 5114 5118c) Manually trip Exciter Field breaker.

2)IF 125 V DC Bus D01 is de-energized,THEN leave Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers closed.

Page 52 of 56Page 2 of 2CHECK PROPER ELECTRICAL RESPONSE3. Check DGs off: DG1 DG2 A.IF DG is running,THEN perform the following: Verify associated SERV WTR to DG CLRs open:

DG1 DG2CV-3806CV-3807 Inform CRS that DG is running4. Check vital 4160 V buses energized: A3 A4 A.IF either 4160 V bus A3 or A4 is de-energized,THEN inform CRS.5. Check non-vital 4160 V buses energized: A1 A2 A.IF either 4160 V bus A1 or A2 is de-energized,THEN inform CRS.END Page 53 of 56RT-4Page 1 of 4INITIATE HPI COOLING1. IF RCP Seal Injection is in service,THEN place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD.OTHERWISE verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.2. Open both BWST T3 Outlets: CV-1407 CV-14083. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) open.4. IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running,THEN perform the following:

A.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN fully open all associated HPI Block valves:P36A/BP36B/CCV-1219CV-1220CV-1278CV-1279CV-1227CV-1228CV-1284CV-12855. Prevent dead heading HPI pumps by verifying one of the following: Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-1301 OR Open HPI Block valve(s) as follows: Fully open one HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump(CV-1220 or CV-1285).IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off,THEN fully open one HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump(CV-1220 or CV-1285).

Page 54 of 56Page 2 of 4INITIATE HPI COOLING6. Place ES HPI pump in service as follows:A. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

B.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN start ES HPI pump.C. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.D. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves:

P36A P36CCV-1219CV-1220CV-1278CV-1279CV-1227CV-1228CV-1284CV-1285 E.IF ERV opens in auto,THEN performstep 11 while continuing.7. IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off,THEN place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:

A.IF HPI Pump (P36B) will be used,THEN verify the following selected to energized bus: P36B/P64B Bus Select MOD Control P64B Transfer SwitchB. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.

C.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN start OP or STBY HPI pump.D. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.E. Fully open all associated HPI Block valves:P36A/BP36B/CCV-1219CV-1220CV-1278CV-1279CV-1227CV-1228CV-1284CV-1285 Page 55 of 56Page 3 of 4INITIATE HPI COOLING8. IF no HPI pumps are available,THEN notify CRS to perform Contingency Actions for no HPI pumps availableAND GO TO step 12.9. Close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).10. IF only one train of HPI is availableANDRCS press is > 600 psig,THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the nexthighest flow.11. Perform the following to manually cycle ERV AND continue with this procedure:A. Open ERV.

B.WHEN either of the following criteria is met,THEN place ERV in AUTO: RCS press drops to 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM approaches minimum adequateCAUTIONElectromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) is left open until HPI cooling is no longer required to maximizeHPI cooling flow.

1)IF ERV fails open,THEN do not close Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000).

C.WHEN RCS press reaches 2400 psig ORapproaches NDTT Limit on Figure 3,THEN repeatstep 11 until ERV can remain open with the following criteria met: RCS press > 1650 psig if ES is armed SCM adequate D.IF ERV is closedANDCET temp rise causes adequate SCM to be lost, without a drop in RCS press,THEN open ERVAND leave open to maximize cooling.

Page 56 of 56Page 4 of 4INITIATE HPI COOLING12. Turn off all Pressurizer Heaters.13. Trip all but one RCP.14. Maximize RB cooling as follows:A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running: VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1DB. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves: CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815C. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers: SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-741315. Isolate possible RB leak paths as follows:

A.IF RB Sump draining is in progress,THEN close RB Sump to AUX Sump valves: CV-4400 CV-4446B. On C25, depress STOP for RB Leak Detector RX-7460 Sample Pump Control(PB-7462).C. On C26, close RB Leak Detector Isolations (SV-7454 and SV-7456) by placingHS-7454 in CLOSE BOTH.END Page 1 of 51Appendix DScenario OutlineForm ES-D-1Facility: __ANO-1_________Scenario No.:

_____5_______Op-Test No.: __

2016-1_Examiners:___________________________Operators: __________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________Initial Conditions: _60% power, ICS runback defeated, EH Oil Pump auto start defeated

___Turnover: ____60% Power, Secure #1 EDG during Surveillance Testing_________________________________P-28A - "A" MFWP Emergency Lube Oil Pump OOS.________________________EventNo.Positi onEventType*EventDescription 1 BOP NUnload and secure #2 EDG 2 ATC CRS C TSDropped rod in Group 6 3 ATC IICS signal to "A" MFW Pump fails low 4 BOP IGland Steam Pressure Controller fails closed 5 BOP CEH Oil Pump trips with failure of the standby pump to auto start 6 AllC / TSSG Tube Leak requiring shutdown 7 All MSG Tube Rupture 8 ATCC / CT2 Stuck Rods post trip 9 ATCC / CTTBVs close due to loss of vacuum interlock*(N)ormal, (R)eactivity, (I)nstrument, (C)omponent, (M)ajor, (TS) Technical Specification, (CT) Critical TaskTarget Quantitative Attributes (Per Scenario; See Section D.5.d)Actual Attributes 1.Malfunctions after EOP entry (1-2) 2 2.Abnormal events (2-4) 3 3.Major transients (1-2) 1 4.EOPs entered/requiring substantive actions (1-2) 1 5.EOP contingencies requiring substantive actions (0-2) 1 6.EOP based Critical tasks (2-3) 2 Page 2 of 51NARRATIVEThis scenario starts with plant power at 60%. During turnover the BOP will be directedcomplete the #2 EDG Surveillance. This will require him to unload and secure the dieselgenerator.Following the completion of the surveillance, a rod will drop in (Group 6 Rod 3) which shouldresult in a plant runback to 40% but the automatic runback fails which will require the ATC tomanually lower power to 40% using the SG/RX station. Group 6 Rod 3 will be declaredinoperable and T.S. 3.1.4 Condition A.After power is reduced to 40%, the ICS signal to the A MFW Pump will fail low which will lowerFeedwater flow to the A SG. The ATC will trip the A MFW Pump and verify flow to both steamgenerators.Next, the Gland Sealing Steam Pressure Controller will fail closed resulting in loweringcondenser vacuum. The BOP will throttle open the pressure regulator bypass valve to regainsealing steam to the main turbine.Next, the running EH Oil Pump will trip with a failure of the standby pump to automatically start.The BOP will be able to manually start the standby EH Oil Pump from the control room toprevent a turbine trip.Then a small tube leak will develop in excess of the T.S. limit requiring a plant shutdown andentry into T.S. 3.4.13 Condition B. The major event will be an escalation of the tube leak to aTube Rupture.Post trip there will be two stuck rods which will require emergency boration, commencing /performing an emergency boration is a critical task for the ATC. The second critical task is tocommence a cooldown and depressurization. Initially the TBVs will be utilized for the cooldown.The cooldown is a critical task since lowering the dp between the RCS and the secondary sideof the will reduce the tube leak rate. Once the cooldown is in progress Condenser Vacuum willdegrade to the point where the Turbine Bypass Valves (TBVs) are interlocked closed, this willrequire a transition to the Atmospheric Dump Valves (ADVs) in order to continue the cooldown.The scenario will complete once the cooldown is re-established on the ADVs.PRA / IPE explanation:(OE) ANO has had a MFWP Control Signal fail without a pump trip.(OE) Industry events include Tube leak / rupture.Critical TasksCT Establish and Maintain Reactor Shutdown Requirements, the initiation of emergencyboration must occur within 15 minutes of the reactor trip.CT Minimize SCM, an RCS cooldown must be commenced prior to the ruptured STEAMGENERATOR reaching 400 inches which could result in increased exposure to the public.

Page 3 of 51Anticipated Procedures Used in Scenario 5Event 11. 1104.036, Emergency Diesel Generator Operation, Supplement 2 (NOP)Event 21. 1203.012F, ACA for K07-B32. 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action, Section 2 (AOP)3. 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown (AOP)4. T.S. 3.1.4Event 31. 1203.027, Loss of Feed (AOP)Event 41. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-B4 through C42. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-B23. 1203.016, Loss of Condenser Vacuum (AOP)4. 1203.045, Rapid Plant Shutdown (AOP)Event 51. 1203.012D, ACA for K05-C3 & K05-B7Event 61. 1203.012F, ACA for K07-A52. 1203.023, Small Tube Leak, Section 1 SG-A Tube Leak (AOP)3. 1203.014, Control of Secondary System Contamination (AOP)4. T.S. 3.4.135. T.S. 3.7.5Event 71. 1202.006, Tube Rupture (EOP)2. 1107.001, Electrical System Operations (NOP)3. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-12 (EOP)4. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-14 (EOP)5. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-2 (EOP)Event 81. 1202.006, Tube Rupture (EOP)2. 1202.012, Repetitive Tasks, RT-12 (EOP)Event 91. 1202.006, Tube Rupture (EOP)EOP - Emergency Operating ProcedureAOP - Abnormal Operating ProcedureACA - Annunciator Corrective ActionsNOP - Normal Operating Procedure Page 4 of 51List of Initial Conditions and Triggers for Scenario 5At Time OnEventActionDescription 00:00:00None Insert malfunction RD351STUCK ROD GROUP 3 ROD 1 00:00:00None Insert malfunction RD355STUCK ROD GROUP 4 ROD 7 00:00:00NoneInsert remote CO_P28A to OFFCO_P28A A MAIN FEEDWATERPUMP K2A EMERGENCY OIL P28A 00:00:00NoneInsert override DO_PB6704Gto OffGRN LP,OIL PP,TEST START,P28ANone 4Insert malfunction MS140GLAND SEAL FAILURENone 1Insert malfunction RD294 to 0 DROP ROD GROUP 6 ROD 3 140-0 INCHESNone 1Insert remote ICSRBD toDISABLEICSRBD DISABLE ICS RUNBACKSIGNALSNone 2Insert malfunction RX598 to 0in 10A MFW SPEED DEMAND TO LOVEJOYNone 3Insert remote CO_P14B to OFFCO_P14B MAIN TURBINE EH FLUIDPUMPNone 3Insert overrideDI_HS9201STOP to TRUESTOP,EH OIL PUMPS P14A,HS-9201None 5Insert malfunction RC001 to0.00500 in 300OTSG A TUBE RUPTURE 0-40TUBESNone 6Insert malfunction RC001 to0.30000 in 300OTSG A TUBE RUPTURE 0-40TUBESNone 7Insert malfunction MC088 to6000.00000 in 480CONDENSER VACUUM LEAK 0-6000SCFMNone 8Delete overrideDI_HS9201STOP to TRUESTOP,EH OIL PUMPS P14A,HS-9201NoneNone Run Event File P14A START Page 5 of 51Appendix DRequired Operator ActionsForm ES-D-2 Op-Test No.:_201 6-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

1___Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 startingat Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior T=0 BOPReference 1104.036 Supplement 2 BOP2.21.4 Perform the following to remove DG2 2.21.4PERFORM the following to remove DG2 from paralleloperation:

A.RECORD Time/Date at which loadreduction is commenced:Time/Date _______/________NOTEGradual and uniform load changes minimize engine wear andinternal stresses. A 100% load change typically takes ~90 sec.Longer unloading times are acceptable when delays are causedby reactive load adjustments or equipment monitoring.CAUTIONA delay in opening output breaker at 100 KW when unloadingdiesel can result in generator motoring which causes lockoutrelay to actuate and trip DG output breaker and shutdown theengine.BOP B.PERFORMthe following to unload DG2: Using DG2 governor control,UNLOAD DG2 to 100 KW. Using DG2 voltage regulator,MINIMIZE KVARs.C.OPEN DG2 Output Breaker (A-408).

D.RECORD Time/Date (A-408) opened:Time/Date ______/________

Page 6 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

1___Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 startingat Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP E.IFan Extended Load Run wasNOTperformed,THENSUBTRACT time recorded in step 2.13.9from time recorded in step 2.21.4A to determineDG2 Initial Time.RECORD result in Table 2 as DG2 Initial Time.MARK the following as N/A in Table 2:

- DG2 Extended Time

- DG2 Additional Time

- DG2 Total TimeNOTEAdditional Run Time between 2625 and 2750 KW can berequested by Systems and Components Engineering in step2.2I.21 or step 2.8.10 of Supplement 10, DG2 Endurance Test.

N/A F.IFan Extended Load Run was performed,-N/AEXAMINER CUE: At Step C, inform applicant that DG2 has ran unloaded for 17 minutes.

BOP2.21.5PERFORMthe following to stop diesel:

A.Using DG2 governor control,ADJUST frequencyto 60 Hz.B.Using DG2 voltage regulator,ADJUST voltageto 4160 volts.

C.WHEN DG2 has run unloaded for 17 minutes orlonger AND as soon as practicable,THEN at C10,DEPRESS DG2 STOPpushbutton.

D.RECORD Time/Date DG2 stopped:Time/Date ______/_______

Page 7 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

1___Event

Description:

__Secure #2 EDG per 1104.036, Supplement 2 startingat Step 2.18.4.__________________________________________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTE The following Functional Capability Test (Optional) isperformed at the request of Systems and ComponentsEngineering. Being prepared to obtain elapsed time from start signal untilDG2 AC voltage exceeds 4000 volts is essential to properlycapture data.

N/A2.22 IFFunctional Capability Test has NOTbeen performedAND requested by Systems and ComponentsEngineering, - N/A BOP2.23 RESTORATIONBOOTH: When called, Engine Total Hrs = 1147.2hrsEXAMINER CUE

PanelC20 isnot modeled in simulator so, whenasked a tStep 2.23.3

,DG2 Watt-hour meter = 305720 KWH.EXAMINER NOTE:The rest of the surveillance is mostly administrative in nature and not allthe panels / readings are modeled in the simulator. The only switch manipulation would beto stop the EDG Room Exhaust Fans after 20 minutes and to verify K01-C4 and K01-D4 areclear. Recommend inserting next malfunction at this time.Proceed at the discretion of the Lead Examiner Page 8 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

2___Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorReference 1203.012F, ACA for K07-B3 forASYM ROD RUNBACK IN EFFECT ATC N/A N/A CRS1. Verify ICS in track AND running back.2. IF asymmetric rod runback clearly caused by an ICS failureOR an ICS input signal failure,THEN take manual control of affected ICS station(s)AND return plant to steady-state condition.A. Refer to ICS Abnormal Operation (1203.001).3. IF necessary,THEN take manual control of the diamond station.

A.Reduce reactor power until unit load demand

<40%.4. GO TO Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action (1203.003).EXAMINER NOTE:It is not necessary to take the diamond station to hand, but the ATC willhave to take the SG/Rx to hand and lower power. With ICS in TRACK the ULD is notavailable for the down power.CRS may go directly to 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction Action.

CRSReference 1203.003, Control Rod Drive Malfunction, Section 2 N/A 1.IFeither of the following conditions exist:- N/A N/A2. IF more than one rod drops AND NI power is2%,THEN trip the reactor and perform Reactor Trip(1202.001).

CREW 3.IF a single rod drops,THEN verify ICS runback to 40% of 902 MWe (~360 MWe)OR current generator output is 40% of 902 MWe (~360MWe).NOTEInstructions in CRD System Operating Procedure (1105.009)prefer NI power level <37% for recovery of a dropped rod.

CRS ATCA. Perform Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045) inconjunction with this procedure.B. Adjust ICS demand as needed to reduce AND maintainthe following conditions to clear the CRD WithdrawalInhibited condition, and prevent Out Inhibit condition: <360 MWe Page 9 of 51 <40% NI power Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _2___Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorNOTE Technical Specifications defines an inoperable rod asfollows:- Safety Rod that is not fully withdrawn within one hour,except during performance of rod exercise surveillance(TS 3.1.5).If the Safety Rod is declared inoperablein TS 3.1.5, then TS 3.1.4 must also be entered.

- Inability to move control rod (SR 3.1.4.2) or APSR(TS 3.1.6).

- Rod can not be located with API, RPI or limit lights (TS3.1.7).Not meeting TS 3.1.7 results in not meeting eitherTS 3.1.4 or 3.1.6. If the inoperable control rod is fully inserted, then it is notnecessary to consider it inoperable for the purposes ofshutdown margin calculations because it has inserted itsnegative reactivity. A control rod is considered to be inoperable if it is not free toinsert into the core within the required insertion time, or doesnot have at least one position indicator channel operable,i.e., cannot be located. (Ref. TS 3.1.4 Bases).EXAMINER NOTE: CRS should enter T.S. 3.1.4 Condition A for the inoperablerod. (Group 6 Rod 3)

CRS 4.IFrod is declared inoperableOR rod is misaligned >6.5% from its groupaverage (misaligned rod position is not usedin the rod group average calculation),THEN within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> AND once every 12hours thereafter, either verify 1.5% availableshutdown margin per Reactivity BalanceCalculation (1103.015) OR initiate boration torestore SDM to be within COLR limit within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br />.

Page 10 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

2___Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior N/A BOP A.IFcontrol rod is not fully inserted,- N/A B.IF rod is fully inserted,THEN use "Calculation of Shutdown Margin forShutdown Conditions (Also Reactor Critical with aninoperable control rod)" Worksheet 4 and use "with noknown inoperable rod" option.NOTEControl Rod Tech Spec Application Examples (Attachment B)contains information concerning Tech Spec applicationassociated with different control rod failures.

CRS 5.IFrod is declared inoperableOR rod is misaligned >6.5% from its group average(misaligned rod position is not used in the rod groupaverage calculation),THEN perform one of the following:

A.IF a safety rod,THEN enter TS 3.1.4 and TS 3.1.5.

B.IF a regulating rod,THEN enter TS 3.1.4. Condition AEXAMINER NOTE:Once the rod is declared inoperable and power reduced to <40%, readyto insert next malfunction at the discretion of the Lead Examiner.

CREW 6.Within 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br />, perform one of the following:A. Restore control rod alignmentAND verify control rod is within 6.5% of groupalignment.B. Reduce reactor thermal power to60%of the allowable thermal power(TS 3.1.4)AND perform the following:1) Contact Reactor EngineeringAND verify the potential ejected rod worth is withinthe assumptions of the rod ejection analysis within72 hours.2)IF thermal rated power is >20%,THEN perform Power Peaking Check (1103.019)

Page 11 of 51within 72 hours8.333333e-4 days <br />0.02 hours <br />1.190476e-4 weeks <br />2.7396e-5 months <br />.

Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

2___Event

Description:

_Group 6 Rod 3 drops with ICS runback disabled_______________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRS 7.Consult Senior Manager, Operations and ReactorEngineering personnel.

ATC 8.Monitor core quadrant tilt for limits specified in COLR,and TS 3.2.4.NOTEPMS turn on codes RIS1, RIS2 and RIS3 indicate SPND outputversus SPND string number and core location. The Uncorrectedand Corrected SPND reports only indicate SPND output andSPND string. In order to determine a given core location thenRIS1, RIS2 or RIS3 may be used.

BOP 9.Perform the following:A. Collect the following plant computer printouts fromNASP menu, "OPS Procedure 1203.003" selection: Uncorrected SPND Signals Imbalance, Tilt and Rod Index Corrected SPND SignalsENDOF EVENT Page 12 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

3__Event

Description:

__ICS Signal to "A" MFW Pump fails low._____________________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE:Expect the crew to identify malfunction prior to any alarms. Theexpected alarms would be; MFW A/B DELTA P LO (K07-D7), REACTOR IS FEEDWATERLIMITED (K07-C1) and UNIT MASTER IN TRACK (K07-A1). However guidance for thecondition is contained in 1203.027 Loss of Feed.

CRSReference 1203.027, Loss of Feed N/A1. IF either of the following conditions apply: - N/A ATC2. IF both MFWPs are running AND 1 MFWP has failed withouttripping, THEN manually trip the bad MFWP.

ATC3. IF only one MFWP is operating, THEN verify that FeedwaterPumps Disch Crosstie (CV-2827) is open.

ATC4. Verify ICS reduces power - N/A ATC5. Open Pressurizer Spray (CV-1008) in MAN as necessary.

ATC6. WHEN RCS pressure starts to drop, THEN verify PressurizerSpray Control Mode switch in AUTO.

ATC7. Verify CV-1008 closes per one of the following setpoints ORisolate it, as necessary, by closing the Spray Isolation (CV-1009). Normal operation:Closes - 2155 psig Power >80% AND MFWP trip:Closes - 2030 psig CREW8. Attempt to determine cause of loss of feed and correct it.BOOTH:If directed report no obvious problems at the A MFW Pump.NOTEA feedwater line rupture in the reactor building may be indicatedby rising reactor building temperature, pressure or sump level.

CRS9. IF feedwater flow to both SGs is restoredAND is sufficient for present power level,THEN stabilize plant AND continue operation as directed byOperations Manager.END OF EVENT Page 13 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

4___Event

Description:

__Gland Seal Steam Pressure Controller fails closed.

_TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference 1203.012D ACA for K05-B4 - E4 forGS PRESS #3 BRG LOEXAMINER NOTE:This event will also cause a lowering in condenser vacuum which willrequire the ATC to adjust power due to the inefficiencies occurring.

BOP1. IF Gland Seal Steam Header Press <75 psig,THEN at C12, slowly open Gland Sealing Steam MainRegulator Bypass (CV-6606).

ATC2. Check the status of the following alarms:A. GS PRESS #4 BRG LO (K05-C4)B. GS PRESS #5 BRG LO (K05-D4)C. GS PRESS #6 BRG LO (K05-E4)NOTELPT A Brg #3 GS Supply regulator (CV-6823) and Brg #3GS Supply Regulator CV-6823 Bypass (GS-6823-3) arelocated in the East door of the HP Turb Housing."Adjusting Gland Seal Steam Regulators" Attachment B ofGland Seal Steam System (1106.013) contains instructionsfor regulator operation.

N/A3. IF this is the only GS PRESS BRG LO alarm in, - N/AEXAMINER NOTE: The following steps are a contingency if the GS Pressure is not properlycontrolled and causes a degradation in vacuum to the point that a power reductionis required.

CRSReference 1203.012D, ACA for K05-B2 forCONDENSER VACUUM LO CRS1. IF vacuum continues to degrade, THEN refer to Loss ofCondenser Vacuum (1203.016).

BOP2. IF cause of degraded vacuum is known, AND either,* MWe is <270 AND vacuum stabilizes >26.5" Hg, OR* MWe is >270 AND vacuum stabilizes >24.5" Hg,THEN adjust alarm setpoints to near but belowcurrent vacuum reading using Plant Computer pointsY2850 and Y2851 per Plant Computer Operation(1105.010).OTHERWISE refer to Loss of Condenser Vacuum(1203.016).

Page 14 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

4___Event

Description:

__Gland Seal Steam Pressure Controller fails closed.

_TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference 1203.016, Loss of Condenser Vacuum ATC 1.Commence reducing turbine load to stabilize vacuum. IF MWe is >270 and vacuum is <24.5" HgTHEN trip the turbine. IF MWe is <270 and vacuum is <26.5" Hg,THEN trip the turbine.

CRS 2.Refer to Rapid PlantShutdown (1203.045).

BOP 3.Verify proper condenser vacuum pump operation asfollows:A. Condenser Vacuum Pumps (C-5A and C-5B on C02)running.1) IF Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5A/B) autostarts,THEN place handswitch in normal after start.B. Adequate Condenser Vacuum Pump (C-5A/B)Separator Tank (T-75A, T-75B) water level.C. Condenser Vacuum Pump Cooler (E-46A/B) ACWOutlet Temperature (TI-4020, TI-4022) normal.NOTEUnder ideal conditions, the condenser vacuum pumps can onlyachieve approximately 26" Hg in the hogging mode of operation.

BOP D.IFMain Condenser vacuum continues to degradebelow 26" Hg,THEN consider placing the localCondenser Vacuum Pump AUTO-HOG handswitches(HS-3636 and HS-3638) in HOG position, prior to goingbelow 25" Hg.

N/A E.IFoutside ambienttemperature is below freezing, -

N/ANOTEThe following step automatically sets the CONDENSERVACUUM LO (K05-B2) alarm setpoints to 24.7" or 26.7" Hg,depending upon MWe output to PMS.

BOP 4.From PMS Alarm menu, set the Transient Low VacuumAlarm:"Y", Enter, F3 (save).EXAMINER NOTE:When the gland sealing steam PCV bypass is controlling gland steampressure, proceed to the next event.

Page 15 of 51Proceed to the next event at the discretion of the Lead Examiner.

Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

5___Event

Description:

_EH Oil Pump trips with failure of the standby pump to auto start.

_TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference 1203.012D, ACA for K05-C7 for EH PUMP P14A/BTRIP and K05-B7 for EH OIL PRESS HI/LO.

FYIInstruction per K05-B7 starting at Step 2 BOP2. IF EH pressure low, THEN perform the following:NOTEWhen the EH Oil system is in-service, the pressure should be>1500 psig even when the turbine is tripped.

BOP N/A N/AA. Manually start the standby EH Oil Pump (P-14Aor P-14B) or verify auto start at 1400 psig.B. IF EH pressure low AND holding constant, THENimmediately initiate steps to determine cause oflow pressure.C. Adjust EH Pump compensator adjustment toestablish 1850 to 1900 psig.Instruction per K05-C7 N/A1. IF EH Fluid Lockout Relay (286/LFT) is tripped, - N/A BOP2. IF 286/LFT is not tripped, THEN either manually startstandby EH Oil Pump (P-14A or P-14B) OR verify autostart at 1400 psig.B. IF P-14B is tripped, THEN go to P-14B breaker(B-4225).1.Reset per "Reclosing Individual LoadSupply Breakers" section of1107.001.C.Place handswitch for tripped pump innormal-after-stop or PULL-TO-LOCK.

CREW3. Initiate steps to determine cause of trip.BOOTHReport that there is no obvious problem at the pump, but the breaker thermals aretripped.Proceed to the next event at Lead Examiner discretion.

Page 16 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

6___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown._______TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRSReference 1203.012F, ACA for K07-A5 forA OTSG N-16 TROUBLEEXAMINER NOTE:The ACA is written for small slow developing tube leaks, the CRS mayelect to go directly to the AOP. The following steps are from the ACA.

BOP BOP CRS CREW CRS1. Observe RI-2691 to determine alarm mode.2. IF the reactor is critical with RI-2691 in Alert or High alarm,OR alarm is suspected to be a spike,THEN verify Gross/Analyzer switch in the Analyzer (left)position, located inside the drawer on the right side,second card from the front. (Rate meter will now showN16 gamma only.)3. IF OTSG tube leak is indicated by rising N-16 levels,THEN perform the following:A. Direct Chemistry to sample secondary system foractivityB. Determine primary system leak rate.4. IF OTSG tube leak validated by any of the following- Chemistry Sample- Main Condenser Radiation Process Monitor (RI-3632)rising- RCS leak rate is rising as indicated by Makeup Tank(T-4) level droppingTHEN GO TO Small Tube Leak Procedure (1203.023):

CRSReference 1203.023, Small Tube LeakSection 1, SG-A Tube LeakNOTE Due to lower flow rates and pressure differentials, leak ratesat low power (<20%) may not be accurately representedwhen using either N-16 Radiation Monitoring System. The MGP N-16 Radiation Monitoring System can detectleaks up to 156 gpm.

CREW 1.Determine Primary to Secondary leak rate usingAttachment 1.

Page 17 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

6___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown._______TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CRS 2.Notify Chemistry personnel to perform Primary toSecondary Leakage (1602.001) without delay. (ReferenceTR 3.7.7.1)NOTEIt is necessary to continue to monitor for changes in leak rates andleak rate rate-of-change to determine if additional actions arerequired to be performed for higher leak rates.

CRS 3.WHENPrimary to Secondary leak rate has beendetermined,THEN GO TO the applicable step per the table below:EXAMINER NOTE:Based on the table the CRS should go to Step 4. Final leak rate for thisevent is ~3 gpm.

NOTETo avoid an unnecessary plant shutdown, tube leaks >75 gpdshould be qualitatively confirmed prior to declaration. Leakageis qualitatively confirmed when two independent radiationmonitors trend in the same direction with the same order ofmagnitude. If only one radiation monitor is functional, thenshutdown shall be based on the indication of the one monitor.

CRS4. IF total SG tube leakage (both SGs) is1 gpm (1,440gpd), THEN perform the following:

A.IF turbine trips,THEN immediately trip the reactorAND GO TO Tube Rupture (1202.006).

B.IF reactor trips,THEN GO TO Tube Rupture(1202.006).

ATC 5.Reduce reactor power to <50% within 1 hour1.157407e-5 days <br />2.777778e-4 hours <br />1.653439e-6 weeks <br />3.805e-7 months <br /> at1.0%/minute per Rapid Plant Shutdown (1203.045). Place unit in Mode 3 within the next 2 hours2.314815e-5 days <br />5.555556e-4 hours <br />3.306878e-6 weeks <br />7.61e-7 months <br /> by continuingshutdown at0.5%/minute per Rapid Plant Shutdown(1203.045). GO TO step 10 while continuing with plant shutdown andcooldown.

Page 18 of 51ATTACHMENT 1PRIMARY TO SECONDARY LEAK RATE ESTIMATION1.0 Estimate primary to secondary leakrate using one or more of the following: Use the following formula to perform mass balance estimate for leak rates >5 gpm.( )

+( )

-( )

-( )

=( )Makeup Seal Injection Letdown Seal Bleedoff Leak Rate IF the reactor is critical,THEN use PMS indications for SG Leak Rate and Rate of Change.SG-ASG-BN-16 AVG Leakrate GPM(SGALRGPM) ( )N-16 AVG Leakrate GPM(SGBLRGPM) ( )N-16 AVG Leakrate GPD(SGALRGPD) ( )N-16 AVG Leakrate GPD(SGBLRGPD) ( )N-16 Leakrate ROC GPM/HR(SGAROC1) ( )N-16 Leakrate ROC GPM/HR(SGBROC1) ( )N-16 Leakrate ROC GPD/HR(SGAROC2) ( )N-16 Leakrate ROC GPD/HR(SGBROC2) ( )

NOTE N-16 detectors RI-2691 and RI-2692 have a GROSS/ANALYZER switch located inside the drawer onthe right side, second card from the front. The correlation between cpm and gpd in the table below is based on 100% Rx power N-16 productionand steam flow. The same countrate at <100% is indicative of a larger leak. IF the reactor is critical,THEN place the applicable OTSG N-16 Detector in ANALYZER mode and estimateleak rate. A OTSG N-16 Detector (RI-2691) B OTSG N-16 Detector (RI-2692)

IF OTSG N-16 Detector reading inANALYZER mode is:THEN SG Tube Leak Rate is:2 x 10 3 cpm30 gpd5 x 10 3 cpm75 gpd1 x 10 4 cpm150 gpd Perform RCS Leak Detection (1103.013).

Page 19 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

6___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Leak requiring shutdown._______TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP 10.Perform Control of Secondary System Contamination(1203.014).NOTEOnly the MGP N-16 Radiation Monitoring System is qualified tomeet the minimum requirements specified by EPRI Guidelines.

N/A 11.IF theMGP N-16 Radiation Monitoring System is orbecomes unavailable to SG-A,THEN perform Attachment 2, "No Operable ContinuousRadiation Monitor" section.

BOP 12.Raise monitoring of radiation monitors to once every 15minutes using Attachment 3.NOTESteam Line High Range Radiation Monitors(RI-2682 and RI-2681) readings may be inconclusive due toinadequate shielding.

CREW 13.Unless already determined, determine affected SG usingone or more of the following:

ATC CRS 14.IFshutdown is required,THEN place SG-A EFW Pump Turbine (K3) Steam Supply(CV-2667) valve in MANUALAND close:A. Refer to TS 3.7.5 Condition A.EXAMINER NOTE:

The T.S. for the tube leak isT.S. 3.4.13Condition B

.The EFWT.S.3.7.5 Condition A, will be entered when CV-2617 is closed. That may occur here or later inthe Tube Rupture EOP. Once the proper T.S. entries occur, proceed at the discretion of theLead Examiner.

Page 20 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.:

__5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A Steam Generator Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE:Per the table in Step 3 of the Tube Leak AOP, when STEAMGENERATOR leakage is >10 gpm, the crew should transition to the Tube Rupture EOP.Final leak rate is ~150 gpm.

CRS1. IF reactor or turbine has tripped ORtrips during plant runback ORPZR level drops below 100" during plant runback,THEN perform the following:A. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor Floating Steps.B. GO TO step 11

. CRS 2.Perform the following:A. Direct Control Board Operators to monitor Floating Steps.B. Advise Shift Manager to perform BOTH of the following: Notify Nuclear Chemistry to begin off-site doseprojections. Implement Emergency Action Level Classification(1903.010).

BOP 3.Open BWST T3 Outlet (CV

-1407 or CV

-1408) to operatingHPI pump.ATC 4.Perform the following:

A.IFSGs are above LOW LEVEL LIMIT, THENverifyPressurizer Level Control (CV-1235) maintains PZRlevel 200".B.IFSGs are at LOW LEVEL LIMIT,THENverify Pressurizer Level Control (CV-1235)maintains PZR level > 100".

ATC5. IF Reactor power is > 20%,THEN begin controlled plant shutdown at 5%per minute.

Page 21 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior CREW 6.Determine bad SG using one or more of the following:OTSG N-16 Gross Detectors:

SG ASG B RI-2691 RI-2692SGTR display on SPDSPlant Monitoring System AlarmsSteam Line High Range Radiation Monitors:

SG ASG B RI-2682 RI-2681Local steam line radiation surveyNuclear Chemistry sampleAt low FW flow rates:Higher than expected SG levelLower than expected FW flow rateLower than expected MFW pump speed CRS7. Verify Control of Secondary System Contamination(1203.014) being performed in conjunction with thisprocedure.

ATC 8.WHENbad SG is known,THEN place bad SG EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supplyvalve in MANUAL AND close:

SG A CV-2667 BOP 9.Perform the following during power reduction (Refer toPower Reduction and Plant Shutdown (1102.016) ifneeded):B. At 50%, transfer plant auxiliaries to SU1 per ElectricalSystem Operations (1107.001). (See Attachment 1 to thisguide)

Page 22 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A Steam Generator Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE:Per the table in Step 3 of the Tube Leak AOP,when STEAMGENERATOR leakage is >10 gpm, the crew should transition to the Tube Rupture EOP.

N/A ATC ATC BOP C.WHENMain Generator output 350 MW - N/AD. Set Lo-Load Limit at minimum.E. Verify HP Turbine Drains open on C02.F. Verify Gland Sealing Steam Spillover Regulator Bypass(CV-6640) closed.NOTEWhen both SGs are on LO LEVEL LIMIT, further power reductionwill result in lowering Tave and pressurizer level. Slowing down therate of power change can help achieve more precise control ofRCS inventory.

ATC G.WHENboth SGs are on LO LEVEL LIMIT (20 to 40"),THEN perform the following:1) Place Feedwater Demand H/A stations in HANDANDadjust demand to zero: Feedwater Demand Loop A Feedwater Demand Loop B2) Place Reactor Demand H/A station in HANDANDadjust as necessary to control reactor power below20%.BOP 10.WHENreactor power is below 20%,THEN perform the following:A. Verify plant auxiliaries aligned to SU1.B. IF Main Turbine is in service,THEN place in TURBINE MANUAL.C. Adjust Header Pressure Controlling setpoint to 45.

ATC11. Depress Reactor Trip PB.A. Verify all rods insertedANDreactor power dropping.BOOTH: Insert Vacuum leak when the reactor is trippedand adjust as necessary to causethe low condenser vacuum interlock closure of the TBVs after a cooldown is commenced.

Page 23 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATCCritical TaskA. Perform the following:

1)IF Reactor fails to trip, - N/A 2)IF more than one rod fails to fully insert ORreactor power is not dropping,THEN perform Emergency Boration (RT-12).

3) Do not continue until Reactor is shutdown.EXAMINER NOTE:***CRITICAL TASK***The two stuck rods represent Event 8 and theperformance of RT-12 is a Critical Task. RT-12 is located at the end of this exam guide andmust be initiated within 15 minutes of the reactor trip. Record time of reactor trip.

BOP12. Verify Turbine tripped.A. Check Turbine throttle and governor valves closed.

BOP13. Check adequate SCM.

BOP14. Verify Header Pressure Controlling setpoint adjusted to 45.A. Check TURB BYP Valves controlling SG press950 to 990 psig in AUTO OR< 990 psig with TURB BYP Valves in HAND.B. Check MSSV OPEN (K07-C5) alarm clear.

CRS 15.Verify Shift Manager advised to performBOTH of thefollowing:Notify Nuclear Chemistry to begin off-site doseprojections.Implement Emergency Action Level Classification(1903.010).

Page 24 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior ATC16. Verify Orifice Bypass (CV-1223) closed.

BOP17. Verify BWST T3 Outlet (CV-1407 or CV-1408) to operatingHPI pump open.

N/A18. IF only DG power is available,THEN GO TO 1202.007, "DEGRADED POWER" procedureunless entry was from that procedure.

BOP19. Check Main Generator and Exciter Field breakers open:51145118Exciter Field breakerNOTEPZR cooldown rate limits do not apply during SGTR.

ATC 20.Operate Pressurizer Heaters ANDPressurizer Sprayvalve (CV-1008) to maintain RCS press low within limitsof Figure 3 (RT-14).

A.IF RCS press drops below 1700 psigAND SCM is adequateAND RCS press is controlled,THEN bypass ESAS.

BOP21. Stabilize PZR level 55" as follows:

A.IF Emergency Boration is not in progress,THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint to 100".

B.IF HPI is in service,THEN adjust HPI flow as necessary to maintain PZRlevel 55"AND RCS press low within limits of Figure 3(RT-14).C.IF PZR level is < 55", OR if PZR level is predicted to drop below 55",THEN initiate HPI (RT-2).

Page 25 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP 22.Verify OTSG N

-16 Gross Detectors selected to GROSS:RI-2691RI-2692 CREW 23.Verify bad SG determined using one or more of thefollowing:EXAMINER NOTE:The bad SG was previously determined, so the bulleted guidance hasnot been included here.

CRS 24.Verify Control of Secondary System Contamination(1203.014) being performed in conjunction with thisprocedure.

ATC 25.Verify bad SG EFW Pump Turbine K3 Steam Supply valvein MANUAL AND closed:

SG A CV-2667 N/A26. IF bad SG level is approaching 410"- N/AEXAMINER NOTE:Emergency Cooldown rates are not applicable for the given scenario.

ATC 27.IFemergency cooldown rate is notrequired ORRCS T-hot is 500 F,THEN establish RCS cooldown rate of 100 F/hr asfollows:A. For good SG, place TURB BYP Valves in HANDANDadjust to maintain cooldown rate 100F/hr.EXAMINER NOTE:***CRITICAL TASK***Commencing the cooldownis one of the CriticalTasks, an RCS cooldown must be commenced prior to the ruptured STEAM GENERATORreaching 400 inches. A loss of condenser vacuum is in progress and will require transition tothe ADVs for the cooldown to continue.

ATC B.IFRCS press drops below 1700psigAND SCM is adequateAND RCS press is controlled,THEN bypass ESAS.

C.IF only one SG is bad,THEN steam bad SG only asnecessary to maintain Exhibit 1 limits.Proceed to the next eventwhen TBV interlock closed

.

Page 26 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

7___Event

Description:

__ A STEAM GENERATOR Tube Rupture.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or Behavior BOP28. Perform the following to place AUX Feedwater Pump(P75) in service:A. Dispatch an operator to open AUX FW Pump RECIRCto E-11A Isolation (FW-1).B. Verify Feedwater Pumps Discharge Crosstie (CV-2827)open.C.WHEN FW-1 is open,THEN start P75.

ATC29. IF MFW pump(s) operating, THEN perform the following:A. Place operating MFW Pump H/A station(s) in HANDANDadjust demand to zero: MFW Pump Loop A MFW Pump Loop B1) Check P75 maintains 70 psid across Startup valves.2) Check good SG Startup valve maintains SG level20 to 40".3) Checkbad SG Startup valve maintains SG level 20 to 40" ORclosed if SG level > 40".B. Trip Main Feed Pump(s).

Page 27 of 51 Op-Test No.:_2016-1_Scenario No.: __

5__Event No.: _

9___Event

Description:

__ TBVs Close due to loss of vacuum.____________TimePositionApplicant's Actions or BehaviorEXAMINER NOTE:The following step is the contingency action for Step 27, whichestablishes the cooldown. ***CRITICAL TASK*** An RCS cooldown must be commencedprior to the ruptured STEAM GENERATOR reaching 400 inches.

ATCCritical Task A.IF TURB BYP Valves are not available,THEN operate ATM Dump Control System for good SG inHAND to maintain cooldown rate 100 F/hr.SG A SG BCV-2376ATM DUMPISOLCV-2619CV-2668ATM DUMP CNTRLCV-2618 1)IF both SGs are bad,THEN steam both SGs.EXAMINER NOTE:Once the cooldown is re

-established with ADVs, the scenario iscompleted.FREEZE AT LEAD EXAMINERS DISCRETION Page 28 of 51SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION FOR CRITICAL TASKSANO-1 has developed a document that utilizes technical basis documents and input fromOperations Management to define acceptable performance for critical tasks. The followingpages come from that document.At the end of each critical task page, is the applicable criteria discussion pertaining to 2016-1exam.

Page 29 of 51CT-23Establish and Maintain Reactor Shutdown RequirementsCT based on: Reactivity control to provide adequate shutdown marginTBD DescriptionWhen reactor trip occurs or should occur, the operator must initiate rod insertion signals andmaintain decreasing reactor power. If more than one rod remains stuck out, the operator shouldbegin boration to increase the shutdown margin.During cooldown, due to Excessive Heat Transfer or SGTR, shutdown margin must bemaintained by adding boron to the RCS as necessary.TBD ConditionsReactor trip is required and during cooldown due to Excessive Heat Transfer or SGTRmitigation.Associated GEOG Bases:ANO Version(s)(1) Emergency Boration should be directed and started within 15 minutes of the reactor trip.(2) The manual trip should occur before the ERV opens or the Pressurizer exceeds 290 inches.(3) The reactor should be tripped before one train of HPI is fully in service (four HPI nozzles fullopen).(4) The reactor should be tripped within two minutes after any crew member identifies a seconddropped rod.(5) Emergency boration should be restarted within 15 minutes after the Operating HPI pump trips.(6) The reactor should be manually tripped before PZR level reaches 100 inches.(7) Reactor shall be tripped within five minutes of the sheared shaft malfunction becoming active.SES used Page 30 of 51Justification for ANO:(1) Per the Unit 1 TS Bases, 15 minutes provides an adequate time for an operator to correctlyalign and start the required systems and components necessary to ensure that adequateSDM exists in Modes 3, 4, and 5.(2) With RPS failed and no automatic actions to trip the reactor on a closed MSIV, operatoraction is required to place the plant in a safe, analyzed condition. Accomplishing this taskprior to the ERV lift setpoint (> RPS High Pressure trip) and High Pzr level requiring manualtrip, provides adequate time for the crew to diagnose the unanalyzed condition (reactorcritical with closed MSIV) and trip the reactor. Due to the degraded heat sink, RCS pressureand Pzr level will be quickly rising providing indications to the crew that this event hasoccurred.(3) Tripping the reactor before a full train of HPI is in service provides a reasonable time for thecrew to diagnose the need to initiate HPI to make up for RCS inventory loss and to trip thereactor appropriately.(4) 2 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew to diagnose the condition of 2 droppedcontrol rods and to trip the reactor as required.(5) Same justification in (1) above.(6) A large LOCA is in progress for this scenario. 100" Pzr level as a criterion providesadequate time for the crew to determine that RCS makeup capacity is exceeded and to tripthe plant prior to reaching the 100" Rx Trip EOP requirement.(7) 5 minutes provides a reasonable time for the crew to diagnose the sheared shaft conditionand implement the proper actions IAW appropriate procedural guidance to protect the corefrom a reduced flow condition.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criterion (1) is applicable. The initiation of emergencyboration must occur within 15 minutes of the reactor trip.

Page 31 of 51CT-7Minimize SCMCT based on: Add/Maintain appropriate RCS water massCT based on:Maintaining acceptable limits of radiation releases due to SGTR inducedRB bypassTBD DescriptionMaintain RCS pressure close to but above minimum allowable SCM and, if applicable, the RCPNPSH limit.TBD ConditionsSGTR mitigation when SCM is greater than the minimum allowable.Associated GEOG Bases:ANO Version(s)The PZR cooldown/RCS cooldown should be commenced before the 'X' SG reaches 400inches based upon limiting the off-site release and the need for future steaming of the bad SG.The PZR cooldown should be commenced by minimizing SCM IAW RT-14 (Pzr Spray Valve fullopen and all pzr heaters off).ANO BasisCommencing a PZR cooldown and RCS cooldown on a tube rupture is critical to minimize theleak flow rate and minimize the duration of the transient before the leak flow is terminated.SES usedJustification for ANOCommencing the Pressurizer and RCS Cooldown is critical to lower the RCS to OTSG D/P,which reduces the RCS leak rate, sometimes by as much as a factor of 2. Accomplishing thisaction before the affected (bad) SG reached 400" provides 2 functions:

Page 32 of 51 Prevents challenging the 410" criteria which would result in the need to perform an EmergencyC/D or HPI cooldown (if the other SG is affected) to reduce the SG pressure below the MSSVsafety valve setpoint to facilitate isolation of the affected SG. The Emergency C/D canchallenge operator control of the plant, while the HPI cooldown can challenge the MSSV safetyvalve setpoint, resulting in an unnecessary steam release.1. Prevents the need to isolate the affected SG until procedurally directed. This maintainsthe bad SG available should subsequent issues occur in the other SG.2. Prevents the need to isolate the affected SG until procedurally directed. This maintainsthe bad SG available should subsequent issues occur in the other SG.For the 2016-1 ILO NRC Exam criteria, an RCS cooldown must be commenced prior tothe ruptured STEAM GENERATOR reaching 400 inches which could result in increasedexposure to the public.

Page 33 of 51 RT-2Page 1 of 6INITIATE HPI1. IF HPI initiation is for any reason other than Emergency Boration (RT-12),THEN isolate Letdown by closing either: Letdown Coolers Outlet (RCS) (CV-1221)

OR Letdown Coolers Outlets (RCS): CV-1214 CV-12162. IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running,THEN perform the following:A. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP or STBY HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

B.IF RCP Seal Injection is in service,THEN place RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) in OVRD.

C.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN open HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump(CV-1220 or CV-1285) to maintain PZR level and RCS press.

D.IF initiating HPI for Emergency Boration only,THEN GO TORT-12 step 2.B

.E.IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop,THEN open additional HPI Block valves associated with OP or STBY HPI pump:P36A/BP36B/CCV-1219CV-1278CV-1279CV-1227CV-1228CV-1284 Page 34 of 51Page 2 of 6INITIATE HPI3. IF either OP or STBY HPI pumps are availableAND both pumps are off,THEN place OP or STBY HPI pump in service as follows:A. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP and STBY HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.B. Verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.C. Close RCS Makeup Block (CV-1233 or CV-1234).D. Prevent dead heading pump by verifying one of the following: Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-1301 OR One HPI Block valve associated with OP HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) fullyopen.E.IF HPI Pump (P-36B) will be used,THEN verify the following selected to energized bus: P36B/P64B Bus Select MOD Control P64B Transfer SwitchF. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for OP or STBY HPI pump.G. Start OP or STBY HPI pump.H. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.(3. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 35 of 51Page 3 of 6INITIATE HPI3. (Continued)

I.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN open HPI Block valve associated with OP or STBY HPI pump(CV-1220 or CV-1285) to maintain PZR level and RCS press.

1)IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop,THEN open additional HPI Block valves associated with OP or STBY HPIpump:P36A/BP36B/CCV-1219CV-1278CV-1279CV-1227CV-1228CV-12842) Monitor Makeup Tank level and control per step 10 as necessary.

J.IF initiating HPI for Emergency Boration only,THEN GO TORT-12 step 2.B

.4. IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop,THEN place ES HPI pump in service as follows:A. Open BWST T3 Outlet to ES HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408).B. Prevent dead heading pump by verifying one of the following: Both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-1301 OR One HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) fullyopen.C. Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.

D.IF OP and STBY pumps are both off,THEN verify RCP Seal INJ Block (CV-1206) closed.(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 36 of 51Page 4 of 6INITIATE HPI4. (Continued)

E.WHEN associated BWST T3 Outlet is open,THEN start ES HPI pump.F. Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.G. Open HPI Block valve associated with ES HPI pump (CV-1220 or CV-1285) tomaintain PZR level and RCS press.

1)IF initiating HPI for Emergency Boration only,THEN GO TORT-12 step 2.B

.2)IF PZR level or RCS press continues to drop,THEN open additional HPI Block valves associated with ES HPI pump:

P36A P36CCV-1219CV-1278CV-1279CV-1227CV-1228CV-12843) Monitor Makeup Tank level and control per step 10 as necessary.5. IF all HPI Block valves are fully openANDadditional HPI flow is required,THEN close HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).6. IF only one train of HPI is availableANDRCS press is > 600 psig,THEN throttle HPI Block valve with the highest flow to within 20 gpm of the nexthighest flow.

Page 37 of 51Page 5 of 6INITIATE HPI7. IF leakage into the RB is indicated,THEN maximize RB cooling as follows:A. Verify all four RB Cooling Fans running: VSF1A VSF1C VSF1B VSF1DB. Open RB Cooling Coils Service Water Inlet/Outlet valves: CV-3812/CV-3814 CV-3813/CV-3815C. Unlatch key-locked Chiller Bypass Dampers: SV-7410 SV-7412 SV-7411 SV-74138. Verify the following sample valves closed on C26: Pressurizer Steam Space Sample Valve (CV-1814) Pressurizer Water Space Sample Valve (CV-1816) Hot Leg Sample (SV-1840)9. Verify the following High Point Vents closed,except when another procedure directs otherwise:A Loop B LoopReactorVesselPressurizer SV-1081 SV-1082 SV-1083 SV-1084 SV-1091 SV-1092 SV-1093 SV-1094 SV-1071 SV-1072 SV-1073 SV-1074 SV-1077 SV-1079 Page 38 of 51Page 6 of 6INITIATE HPI10. IF Makeup Tank level is risingANDit is necessary to control Makeup Tank level,THEN perform one or more of the following: Verify all running HPI pump flow(s) 90 gpm/pumpANDclose HPI Pump RECIRC Block (CV-1300 or CV-1301).1) Maintain running HPI pump flow 90 gpm/pump. IF OP and STBY HPI pumps are both off,THEN start OP or STBY pump per step 3. IF OP or STBY HPI pump is running,THEN perform the following:1) Verify HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Transfer HPI flow from ES pump to OP or STBY pump as necessary to controlMakeup Tank level.

3)IF total HPI flow is within capacity of OP or STBY HPI pump,THEN perform the following:a) Transfer remaining HPI flow to OP or STBY HPI pump.b) Start AUX Lube Oil pump for ES HPI pump.c) Stop ES HPI pump.d) Stop AUX Lube Oil pump.END Page 39 of 51RT-14Page 1 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESSNOTE PTS limits apply if any of the following has occurred: HPI on with all RCPs off RCS C/D rate > 100F/hr with Tcold < 355 F RCS C/D rate > 50F/hr with Tcold < 300 F Once invoked, PTS limits apply until an evaluation is performed to allow normal press control. When PTS limits are invoked OR SGTR is in progress, PZR cooldown rate limits do not apply. PZR cooldown rate <100°F/hr.1. IF PTS limits apply or RCS leak exists,THEN maintain RCS press low within limits of Figure 3.2. IF RCS press is controlled AND will be reduced below 1650 psig,THEN bypass ESAS as RCS press drops below 1700 psig.3. IF PZR steam space leak exists,THEN limit RCS press as PZR goes solid by one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.

B.IF SCM is adequate,THEN throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Throttle HPI.C. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected, restore Letdownper RT-13.D. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).

Page 40 of 51Page 2 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. IF RCS press is high,THEN limit press using one or more of the following:A. Throttle makeup flow.B. Throttle HPI flow by performing the following:1) Check adequate SCM AND any of the following conditions met: HPI Cooling (RT-4) not in progress CET temps dropping RCS press rising with Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) open2) Verify both HPI Recirc Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13013) Throttle HPI.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN operate Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) in HAND.

D.IF PZR AUX Spray is in service,THEN throttle Pressurizer AUX Spray (CV-1416) open.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in OFF.F. Raise Letdown flow.

1)IF ESAS has actuated,THEN unless fuel damage or RCS to ICW leak is suspected restore Letdownper RT-13.G. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation open (CV-1000)AND cycle Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000).(4. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 41 of 51Page 3 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS4. (Continued)

H.IF desired to secure HPI pump(s),THEN perform the following:1) Start AUX Lube Oil pumps for associated HPI pump(s):

P36A P36B P36CP64AP64B P64C2) Stop desired HPI pump(s): P36A P36B P36C3) Close all associated HPI Block valves:P36A/BP36B/C CV-1219 CV-1220 CV-1278 CV-1279 CV-1227 CV-1228 CV-1284 CV-12855. IF RCS press is low,THEN raise press using one or more of the following:A. Raise makeup flow.B. Raise HPI flow or initiate HPI per RT-2.

C.IF RCP is running,THEN verify Pressurizer Spray Control (CV-1008) closed.D. Reduce Letdown flow.E. Place Pressurizer Heaters in MANUAL.(5. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 42 of 51Page 4 of 4CONTROL RCS PRESS5. (CONTINUED)CAUTIONIf HPI cooling is in progress, Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation (CV-1000) must be left open until HPIcooling is no longer required.F. Verify Electromatic Relief ERV (PSV-1000) or Electromatic Relief ERV Isolation(CV-1000) closed.CAUTIONWith RCS solid, 1F temp change can cause 100 psig press change.6. IF PZR is solid,THEN RCS press may also be controlled by varying RCS temperature. Raise RCS temp to raise RCS press Lower RCS temp to lower RCS pressNOTEAdjusting Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintain normal makeup flowon-scale will allow CV-1235 to automatically compensate for small changes in RCS leak rate andcooldown rate.7. IF normal makeup is in service ANDHPI is in service,THEN adjust Pressurizer Level Control setpoint and HPI as necessary to maintainnormal makeup flow on-scale.END Page 43 of 51RT-12Page 1 of 5EMERGENCY BORATIONNOTEIf an unexpected delay occurs in implementation of Step 1, then promptly initiate Emergency Borationusing HPI per step 2.1. IF Boric Acid pump (P39A or P39B) and Batch Controller are available,THEN perform the following:

A.IF both OP and STBY HPI Pumps are off ORLetdown is isolated,THEN GO TO step 2.B. Set Batch Controller for maximum batch size as follows:1) Depress lower DISPLAY.2) Depress TOTAL.3) Depress TOTAL RESET.4) Depress BATCH SET.5) Depress 9, six times.6) Depress ENTER.7) Depress lower DISPLAY.C. Verify Condensate to Batch Controller (CV-1251) closed.D. Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).E. Verify both Makeup Filters in service: F3A F3BF. Record initial BAAT (T-6) level ____________ in.G. Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 44 of 51Page 2 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION1. (Continued)H. Start Batch Controller by depressing RUN key.I. Adjust Batch Controller Flow CNTRL VLV (CV-1249) to 100% open as follows:1) Depress VALVE SET.2) Depress numbers: 1, 0, 0.3) Depress ENTER.4) Depress lower DISPLAY.5) Depress RATE.

J.IF Batch Controller output rate < 5 gpm,THEN perform the following:1) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s): P39A P39B2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).3) Stop Batch Controller by depressing STOP key.

4)GO TO step 2.K. Adjust Pressurizer Level Control Setpoint to 220".L. Verify BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408) open.

M.WHEN PZR level is 100",THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and componentlimitations.(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 45 of 51Page 3 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION1. (Continued)N. Perform the following as necessary to maintain Makeup Tank level 55 to 86":1) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).2) Stop running Boric Acid pump(s): P39A P39B3) Place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

4)WHEN Makeup Tank level is lowered to desired level,THEN perform the following:a) Return 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) to LETDOWN.b) Start available Boric Acid pump(s) (P39A or P39B or both).c) Open Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).O. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book.

PPM2) Calculate batch add required using Plant Computer ORSoluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.3,"Feed Volume For Batch Boration or Dilution".

gal3) Use 1103.004, Attachment D, "Volume of BAAT Vs. Depth of Liquid"to determine desired final BAAT level.

"(1. CONTINUED ON NEXT PAGE)

Page 46 of 51Page 4 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION1. (Continued)

P.WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added perstep 1.O.ORas determined by Reactor Engineering,THEN perform the following:1) Stop Boric Acid pump(s): P39A P39B2) Close Batch Controller Outlet (CV-1250).3) Verify Makeup Tank level 55 to 86".4) Close BWST T3 Outlet to OP HPI pump (CV-1407 or CV-1408).5) Adjust Letdown flow to desired rate.

Page 47 of 51Page 5 of 5EMERGENCY BORATION2. IF HPI will be used for emergency boration,THEN perform the following:A. Initiate HPI per RT-2.B. Verify HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) associated with running HPI pumpopen.C.IF Letdown is in service,THEN place 3-Way Valve (CV-1248) in BLEED.

D.WHEN PZR level is 100",THEN establish maximum Letdown flow allowed by cooling capacity and componentlimitations.E. Maintain PZR level 200 to 220" as follows:1) Verify both HPI Pump RECIRC Blocks open: CV-1300 CV-13012) Throttle HPI Block valve (CV-1220 or CV-1285) as necessary.F. As time permits, determine actual required boration as follows:1) Obtain required boron concentration from Plant Data Book.

PPM2) Calculate final BWST level for required boron addition using PlantComputer ORSoluble Poison Concentration Control (1103.004), Attachment A.6,"Continuous Feed and Bleed from BWST".

ft G.WHEN required amount of boric acid has been added per step 2.F.ORas determined by Reactor Engineering,THEN perform the following:1) Operate HPI as directed by CRS.2) Adjust Letdown flow as directed by CRS.END Page 48 of 51ATTACHMENT 1NOTESupplying ANO-1 from an off-site source (SU#1 and/or SU#2) will raise the risk of a grid-initiated offsite source feeder undervoltage relay actuation which will trip the offsite feederbreaker(s) to A and H buses and initiate auto-transfer of these buses to the selected offsitesource (Refer to CR-ANO-2-2014-0707).8.0 Transferring Buses from Unit Aux to SU1 8.1Perform the following:

8.1.1Check SU1 Transformer is considered operable.

8.1.2IF time permits,THEN establish flash protection boundary at affected breakers.{4.3.4}CAUTIONHigh circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remainclosed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remainclosed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.2IF desired to transfer A1 from Unit Aux to SU1,THEN perform the following:

8.2.1Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A1 (A-113) NOT in Local.

8.2.2Place A-113 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.2.3Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.2.4Close A-113 AND allow control switch to return toNORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.2.5Place A-113 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.2.6Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A1 (A-112) open.CRITICAL STEP{4.3.4}A. IF A-112 is NOT open,THEN trip A-112.

1.IF A-112 will NOT trip,THEN trip A-113.

2.Initiate Condition Report.

Page 49 of 51 8.2.7IF A-112 opened automatically,THEN place A-112 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.{4.3.4}CAUTIONHigh circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remainclosed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remainclosed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.3IF desired to transfer A2 from Unit Aux to SU1,THEN perform the following:

8.3.1Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to A2 (A-213) NOT in Local.

8.3.2Place A-213 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.3.3Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.3.4Close A-213 AND allow control switch to return toNORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.3.5Place A-213 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.3.6Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to A2 (A-212) open.CRITICAL STEP{4.3.4}A. IF A-212 is NOT open,THEN trip A-212.

1.IF A-212 will NOT trip,THEN trip A-213.

2.Initiate Condition Report.

8.3.7IF A-212 opened automatically,THEN place A-212 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

Page 50 of 51{4.3.4}CAUTIONHigh circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if bothfeeder breakers remainclosed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remainclosed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.4IF desired to transfer H1 from Unit Aux to SU1,THEN perform the following:

8.4.1Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H1 (H-15) NOT in Local.

8.4.2Place H-15 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.4.3Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.4.4Close H-15 AND allow control switch to return toNORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.4.5Place H-15 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.4.6Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H1 (H-14) open.CRITICAL STEP{4.3.4}A. IF H-14 is NOT open,THEN trip H-14.

1.IF H-14 will NOT trip,THEN trip H-15.

2.Initiate Condition Report.

8.4.7IF H-14 opened automatically,THEN place H-14 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

Page 51 of 51{4.3.4}CAUTIONHigh circulating currents can trip bus lockout relay if both feeder breakers remainclosed. Delaying steps which open a feeder breaker when both feeder breakers remainclosed allow high circulating currents to develop.

8.5IF desired to transfer H2 from Unit Aux to SU1,THEN perform the following:

8.5.1Check Startup Xfmr #1 Feed to H2 (H-25) NOT in Local.

8.5.2Place H-25 Synchronize switch to ON.

8.5.3Check synchroscope between 11 and 1 o'clock.

8.5.4Close H-25 AND allow control switch to return toNORMAL-AFTER-CLOSE position.

8.5.5Place H-25 Synchronize switch to OFF.

8.5.6Check Unit Auxiliary Xfmr Feed to H2 (H-24) open.CRITICAL STEP{4.3.4}A. IF H-24 is NOT open,THEN trip H-24.

1.IF H-24 will NOT trip,THEN trip H-25.

2.Initiate Condition Report.

8.5.7IF H-24 opened automatically,THEN place H-24 control switch in NORMAL-AFTER-TRIP.

8.6Check the following bus voltages: 4160V buses greater than 3640V (C10) 6900V buses greater than 6010V (C10) 480V buses between 460V and 500V (SPDS E1B5/E1B6) 8.6.1IF necessary,THEN adjust per "Startup Transformer Voltage RegulatorOperation" section of this procedure.

ES-301Transient and Event ChecklistForm ES-301-5Facility: ANO Unit 1Date of Exam: 8/18-23/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A P P L I C A N T E V E N T T Y P EScenarios 12 (Spare)3 5 T O T A L M I N I M U M(*)CREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITION S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O PR I URO-1 RX0 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 3, 4, 7, 9, 2, 3, 8, 98 4 4 2 MAJ 6 72 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2RO-2 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 3, 6, 8, 9 3, 4, 7, 9,8 4 4 2 MAJ 7 62 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2RO-3 RX0 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 4, 5, 10 2, 3, 8, 97 4 4 2 MAJ 7 72 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2RO-4 RX0 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 3, 4, 7, 9, 2, 3, 8, 98 4 4 2 MAJ 6 72 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2Instructions:

1.Check the applicant level and enter the operating test number and Form ES-D-1 event numbers for each event type; TSare not applicable for RO applicants. ROs must serve in both the "at-the-controls" (ATC) and "balance-of-plant" (BOP)positions. Instant SROs (SRO-I) must serve in both the SRO and the ATC positions, including at least two instrument orcomponent (I/C) malfunctions and one major transient, in the ATC position. If an SRO-Iadditionally serves in the BOPposition, one I/C malfunction can be credited toward the two I/C malfunctions required for the ATC position.

2.Reactivity manipulations may be conducted under normal orcontrolled abnormal conditions (refer to Section D.5.d) butmust be significant per Section C.2.a of Appendix D. (*) Reactivity and normal evolutions may be replaced withadditional instrument or component malfunctions on a one-for-one basis.

3.Whenever practical, both instrument and component malfunctions should be included; only those that require verifiableactions that provide insight to the applicant's competence count toward the minimum requirements specified for theapplicant's license level in the right-hand columns.

4.For licensees that use the ATC operator primarily for monitoring plant parameters, the chief examiner may place SRO-Iapplicants in either the ATC or BOP position to best evaluate the SRO-I in manipulating plant controls.

ES-301Transient and Event ChecklistForm ES-301-5Facility: ANO Unit 1Date of Exam: 8/18-23/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A P P L I C A N T E V E N T T Y P EScenarios 12 (Spare)3 5 T O T A L M I N I M U M(*)CREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITION S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O PR I URO-5 RX0 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 4, 5, 10 2, 4, 5, 8 4, 5, 610 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 73 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2RO-7 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 3, 6, 8, 9 4, 5, 67 4 4 2 MAJ 7 72 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2RO-8 RX0 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 2, 4, 5, 8 4, 5, 67 4 4 2 MAJ 6 72 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2RO-9 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 3, 6, 8, 9 3, 4, 7, 9, 4, 5, 611 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 73 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2 ES-301Transient and Event ChecklistForm ES-301-5Facility: ANO Unit 1Date of Exam: 8/18-23/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A P P L I C A N T E V E N T T Y P EScenarios 12 (Spare)3 5 T O T A L M I N I M U M(*)CREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITION S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O PR I USRO-I-2 RX0 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 4, 5, 10 2, 4, 5, 8 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 914 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 73 2 2 1 TS 2, 62 0 2 2SRO-I-4 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 2, 3, 8, 918 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 73 2 2 1 TS 3, 4 1, 24 0 2 2SRO-I-5 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 3, 6, 8, 9 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 911 4 4 2 MAJ 7 72 2 2 1 TS 2, 62 0 2 2SRO-U-1 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 914 4 4 2 MAJ 7 62 2 2 1 TS 3, 4 1, 24 0 2 2 ES-301Transient and Event ChecklistForm ES-301-5Facility: ANO Unit 1Date of Exam: 8/18-23/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A P P L I C A N T E V E N T T Y P EScenarios 12 (Spare)3 5 T O T A L M I N I M U M(*)CREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITION S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O PR I USRO-U-3 RX 21 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 914 4 4 2 MAJ 7 72 2 2 1 TS 3, 4 2, 64 0 2 2SRO-U-4 RX0 1 1 0NOR 1 12 1 1 1 I/C 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 914 4 4 2 MAJ 6 72 2 2 1 TS 1, 2 2, 64 0 2 2 NA RXNOR I/C MAJ TS NA RXNOR I/C MAJ TS ES-301Transient and Event ChecklistForm ES-301-5Facility: ANO Unit 1Date of Exam: 8/18-23/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1 A P P L I C A N T E V E N T T Y P EScenarios 1 3 4 NA T O T A L M I N I M U M(*)CREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITIONCREWPOSITION NA S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O P S R O A T C B O PR I URO-6 RX0 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 4, 5, 10 2, 4, 5, 8 2, 3, 5, 6, 912 4 4 2 MAJ 7 6 73 2 2 1 TS0 0 2 2SRO-I-3 RX 2 12 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 9, 10 3, 4, 6, 811 4 4 2 MAJ 7 72 2 2 1 TS 3, 42 0 2 2SRO-U-2 RX 11 1 1 0NOR 11 1 1 1 I/C 2, 3, 4, 5, 7, 8, 9 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 8, 914 4 4 2 MAJ 6 72 2 2 1 TS 1, 2 2, 64 0 2 2 NA RXNOR I/C MAJ TS ES-301Competencies ChecklistForm ES-301-6Facility: ANO-1Date of Examination: 8/22/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1APPLICANTS U1 U2 U3 U4CompetenciesSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIO 1 3 3 4 1 5 3 5Interpret/DiagnoseEvents and Conditions3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,92,3,4,5,6,7,8,93,4,5,6,7,8,9,102,3,4,5,6,7, 8,91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,92,3,4,5,6,7,8,9Comply With andUse Procedures (1)1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 9Operate ControlBoards (2)Communicateand Interact1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 9DemonstrateSupervisory Ability (3)1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8, 9Comply With andUse Tech. Specs. (3) 3,4 1,2 1,2 2,6 3,4 2.6 1,2 2.6Notes: (1)Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2)Optional for an SRO-U.

(3)Only applicable to SROs.Instructions:Check the applicants' license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow theexaminers to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all ratingfactors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1and ES-303-3.

ES-301Competencies ChecklistForm ES-301-6Facility: ANO-1Date of Examination: 8/22/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1APPLICANTS I2 SRO/ATC/BOP I3 SRO / ATC I4SRO/SRO/ATC I5 SRO / ATCCompetenciesSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIO 5 3 1 1 4 1 3 5 5 1Interpret/DiagnoseEvents and Conditions2,3,4,5,6,7,8,92,5, 6,84,5, 7, 103,4,5,6,7,8, 9, 103,4,5,6,7,8, 93,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,9 4,5 ,6, 72,3,4,5,6,7, 8,93,6,8,9Comply With andUse Procedures (1)1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,92,5, 6,81,4,5,7, 101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,3,4,5,6,7, 81,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,9 1,4 ,5, 6,71,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,92,3,6,7, 8,9Operate ControlBoards (2)2,5, 6,81,4,5,7, 101,3,4,5,6,7, 8 1,4 ,5, 6,72,3,6,7, 8,9Communicateand Interact1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,92,4,5,6, 81,4,5,7, 101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,3,4,5,6,7, 8,91,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,9 1,4 ,5, 6,71,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,91,2,3,6, 7,8,9DemonstrateSupervisory Ability (3)1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,9 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9, 101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,101,2,3,4,5,6,7,8 ,9 1,2,3,4,5,6, 7,8,9Comply With andUse Tech. Specs. (3)2.6 3,43,4 1,2 2.6Notes:(1)Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.(2)Optional for an SRO-U.(3)Only applicable to SROs.Instructions:Check the applicants' license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow theexaminers to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all ratingfactors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1and ES-303-3.)

ES-301Competencies ChecklistForm ES-301-6Facility: ANO-1Date of Examination: 8/22/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1APPLICANTS R1 / R8 ATC / BOP R2 ATC / BOP R3 ATC / BOP R4 ATC / BOPCompetenciesSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIO 3 5 1 3 5 1 5 3Interpret/DiagnoseEvents and Conditions2,5,6,84,5,6,73,6,8, 91,3,4,6, 7,94,5,6, 74,5,7, 104,5,6, 71,3,4,6, 7,9Comply With andUse Procedures (1)2,5,6,81,4,5,6, 72,3,6, 7,8,91,3,4,6, 7,91,4,5, 6,71,4,5,7,101,4,5, 6,71,3,4,6, 7,9Operate ControlBoards (2)2,5,6,81,4,5,6, 72,3,6, 7,8,91,3,4,6, 7,91,4,5, 6,71,4,5,7,101,4,5, 6,71,3,4,6, 7,9Communicateand Interact2,4,5,6, 81,4,5,6, 71,2,3,6,7,8, 91,3,4,5, 6,7,91,4,5, 6,71,4,5,7,101,4,5, 6,71,3,4,5, 6,7,9DemonstrateSupervisory Ability (3)Comply With andUse Tech. Specs. (3)Notes: (1)Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2)Optional for an SRO-U.

(3)Only applicable to SROs.Instructions:Check the applicants' license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow theexaminers to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all ratingfactors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1and ES-303-3.

ES-301Competencies ChecklistForm ES-301-6Facility: ANO-1Date of Examination: 8/22/16Operating Test No.: 2016-1APPLICANTS R5 ATC/BOP/BOP R7 ATC / BOP R6ATC/BOP/BOP R9ATC/BOP/BOPCompetenciesSCENARIOSCENARIOSCENARIO 5 1 3 1 5 3 1 4 1 5 3Interpret/DiagnoseEvents and Conditions4,5, 6,74,5,7,101,3,4,6, 7,93,6,8, 94,5,6,72,5, 6,84,5, 7,1 0 2,4 ,5, 6,7 ,93,6, 8,94,5, 6,71,3,4,6, 7,9Comply With andUse Procedures (1)1,4,5,6, 71,4,5,7, 101,3,4,6, 7,92,3,6, 7,8,91,4,5,6, 72,5, 6,81,4,5,7, 10 1,2 ,3, 5,6 ,7, 92,3,6,7, 8,91,4,5,6, 71,3,4,6, 7,9Operate ControlBoards (2)1,4,5,6, 71,4,5,7, 101,3,4,6, 7,92,3,6, 7,8,91,4,5,6, 72,5, 6,81,4,5,7, 10 2,4 ,5, 6,7 ,92,3,6,7, 8,91,4,5,6, 71,3,4,6, 7,9Communicateand Interact1,4,5,6, 71,4,5,7, 101,3,4,5,6,7, 91,2,3,6,7,8, 91,4,5,6, 72,4,5,6, 81,4,5,7, 10 1,2 ,3, 5,6 ,7, 91,2,3,6,7,8, 91,4,5,6, 71,3,4,5,6,7, 9DemonstrateSupervisory Ability (3)Comply With andUse Tech. Specs. (3)Notes: (1)Includes Technical Specification compliance for an RO.

(2)Optional for an SRO-U.

(3)Only applicable to SROs.Instructions:Check the applicants' license type and enter one or more event numbers that will allow theexaminers to evaluate every applicable competency for every applicant. (This includes all ratingfactors for each competency.) (Competency Rating factors as described on forms ES-303-1and ES-303-3.)